IntroductionWelcome| 00:04 | Welcome, to Camtasia Studio 8
Essential Training. I'm Chris Mattia.
| | 00:09 | In this video training series we're
going to learn how to set up our recording
| | 00:14 | equipment, calibrate our microphone,
and create a dedicated recording account.
| | 00:18 | We'll then step through all the
basics you need to know to record a
| | 00:22 | screencast, things like how to prepare
your materials, how to use the Camtasia
| | 00:27 | Recorder application.
| | 00:28 | Next, we'll learn all the ins and outs
of editing our screencast with Camtasia's
| | 00:33 | video Editor, including making basic
edits, working with audio, and adding a
| | 00:39 | close caption track to our video.
| | 00:41 | We'll then fire up PowerPoint and
learn how to use the Camtasia PowerPoint
| | 00:46 | add-in to record a PowerPoint presentation.
| | 00:49 | We'll learn how to add an
interactive quiz to our video and much more.
| | 00:53 | We have a lot to cover.
| | 00:55 | So let's get started with
Camtasia Studio 8 Essential Training.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:00 | If you're a premium member of the
lynda.com online training library or if
| | 00:05 | you're watching this training series on a
disc then you have access to the exercise files.
| | 00:10 | The exercise files for this title are
arranged with one folder for each chapter
| | 00:16 | used throughout the title.
| | 00:18 | In the early chapters of the title
you'll find a variety of documents that we
| | 00:22 | will be calling out in the movies or
that'll be a screen overlay such as the one
| | 00:26 | that you see now indicating the
specific file that we're using.
| | 00:31 | In the later chapters there will be a
project folder for most of the individual movies.
| | 00:37 | All of the files that you'll need to
complete the project for that movie will
| | 00:40 | be contained inside of that folder.
| | 00:42 | You have a variety of
documents in those folders.
| | 00:45 | First of all, you'll see a file
that's got the .camrec file extension.
| | 00:50 | These are the actual movie files that
we'll be editing and working with, but you
| | 00:54 | won't ever have to open those files.
| | 00:56 | The file that you want to
open is the CAMPROJ file.
| | 01:00 | This is the file that will have all of
the specific edits and materials that
| | 01:04 | will be working with
through out that particular movie.
| | 01:07 | For many of the movies I've included a
CAMPROJ file that has the word "END" in it.
| | 01:12 | This indicates the ending state
for that particular project file.
| | 01:16 | So you can see what my results were at the end.
| | 01:19 | Finally, some of the folders will
have additional documents that we will be
| | 01:23 | using throughout the training.
| | 01:24 | If you don't have access to the
exercise files, feel free to just create your
| | 01:28 | own files as we go along.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Getting StartedCreating a recording account| 00:00 | Before we begin recording it's a good
idea to have a dedicated account that's
| | 00:04 | just set aside for recording your screencast.
| | 00:07 | That way you can have a desktop space
that is set up and configured for recording all
| | 00:12 | the time, you can have a nice solid
color background, you can have your taskbar
| | 00:16 | hidden with no additional items in it,
and you can have your screen set up
| | 00:21 | exactly the way that you want with
all the specific recording settings.
| | 00:25 | Now in order to create a new
account you do have to have administrative
| | 00:29 | privileges on your computer.
| | 00:30 | So if you don't have
administrative privileges, don't worry.
| | 00:34 | Creating a dedicated recording
account is not a required step to
| | 00:37 | doing screencasting.
| | 00:39 | It just helps take your
screencast to the next level.
| | 00:42 | So if you have administrative access
and you want to follow along all you need
| | 00:46 | to do is go down to your Start
menu and go over to Control Panels.
| | 00:51 | Now from the Category view all we need
to do is click on the link that says Add
| | 00:56 | or remove user accounts.
| | 00:58 | If you're in the icon view you
can just use the User Accounts link.
| | 01:02 | Then we need to simply click on the link down
at the bottom that says Create a new account.
| | 01:07 | Click on that one time and we'll name
our account Recording that way it's really
| | 01:14 | clear to us right from a login screen
exactly what we're going to be doing in
| | 01:19 | this dedicated account.
| | 01:21 | Now you want to also make this
user an administrative user.
| | 01:25 | That way you have the ability to
install software, plug-ins, configure any
| | 01:30 | specific settings inside of Windows
that you need to configure while you're in your
| | 01:34 | recording account and you don't
have to jump out to another account.
| | 01:38 | With these two settings set go ahead
and click the button at the bottom that
| | 01:42 | says Create Account.
| | 01:44 | Now our account is created.
| | 01:46 | Let's go ahead and do a
little customization of it.
| | 01:48 | We can go ahead and click on the
Recording account and let's start by
| | 01:51 | changing the password.
| | 01:53 | Go ahead and click the Change the
password link and we'll go ahead and type in a
| | 01:57 | password that's going to
be easy for you to remember.
| | 02:00 | For me I use the same password for my
recording account as I do for my standard account.
| | 02:05 | That way I only have one password to
remember, but what you set here is up to you.
| | 02:10 | I'll go ahead and choose my
password and type it in again.
| | 02:17 | I like to go and set the password
hint to simply say Standard Password.
| | 02:24 | That way if it's been a couple of weeks
since I've done a recording and I forget
| | 02:27 | what my password was I'll know
it's my standard one that I use.
| | 02:31 | Go ahead and click the button at
the bottom that says Change password.
| | 02:34 | If you'd like you can even
customize the picture for this account.
| | 02:38 | Go ahead and click the Change the picture
icon and then choose the picture that you like.
| | 02:42 | I'm going to go ahead and
choose this picture down here.
| | 02:45 | I'll select it one time and then
click the Change Picture button.
| | 02:48 | Now my recording account is all set up.
| | 02:51 | We'll go ahead and test the account
by closing the window going down to the
| | 02:55 | Start menu and logging out of our
computer and then logging into our
| | 03:01 | recording account.
| | 03:05 | Type in the password that you just
set and then click the arrow to log in.
| | 03:11 | Now the first time we log into this
account it may take a few seconds for
| | 03:15 | Windows to go to all of the initial
account configuration and setup that are the
| | 03:20 | default settings on your
particular install of Windows.
| | 03:25 | Once the login process has completed
we're ready to begin customizing the
| | 03:29 | settings for our recording account
and we'll do that in the next movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Configuring a recording account| 00:00 | Now that we have our dedicated
recording account let's go ahead and customize
| | 00:04 | the settings on this account so that
our learners are able to focus on the
| | 00:08 | content that we are teaching inside of
Camtasia Studio rather than on a fancy
| | 00:14 | desktop pattern or any of the other
distractions that may be on screen.
| | 00:17 | So to begin let's go ahead and right-
click on our desktop and select Personalize
| | 00:23 | from the dropdown menu.
| | 00:25 | The first thing we want to set is our
theme and let's go ahead and scroll down
| | 00:29 | in the list of themes until you get
down to the basic and high contrast themes.
| | 00:35 | We'll go ahead and select the Windows 7 Basic.
| | 00:38 | The theme will reset and now we'll
have a much cleaner theme to work with.
| | 00:43 | The next theme we want to
set is our desktop background.
| | 00:46 | We want to have a nice smooth even color.
| | 00:48 | So go ahead and click on desktop
background and then in the picture location
| | 00:53 | click the dropdown menu and select Solid Colors.
| | 00:57 | A solid color is really nice your
screencast, because not only does it reduce
| | 01:01 | the distractions to the user but it
improves your life if you need to go in and
| | 01:05 | you need to edit your files, you don't
have a complicated background that may
| | 01:09 | make some of the editing
techniques a little more difficult.
| | 01:13 | For the solid color I like to choose
this nice dark blue that's here at the
| | 01:16 | end of the first row.
| | 01:18 | It gives a nice rich feel to my screen
and this blue is very identifiable as a
| | 01:23 | common blue that's found
on many Windows systems.
| | 01:26 | We'll go ahead and click the Save
Changes button at the bottom to accept
| | 01:30 | our background color.
| | 01:32 | Next, click on Sounds and in the window
that appears click the dropdown menu for
| | 01:37 | Sound Scheme and scroll
down until you find No Sounds.
| | 01:42 | Select No Sounds this way we won't
have any distracting sounds being produced
| | 01:47 | by our operating system and that way again
our users are able to focus on our content.
| | 01:52 | We'll go ahead and click the Apply
button and click OK to accept those changes.
| | 01:57 | The next thing we want to customize is
we want to clean up some of these icons
| | 02:01 | here in our desktop.
| | 02:02 | We can do that by clicking on the
link that says change desktop icons.
| | 02:06 | We'll uncheck the box next to Computer
and User's Files if that's appropriate
| | 02:12 | for your specific type of recording.
| | 02:14 | For the type of recording that I do I
don't like to see my Computer or my User's
| | 02:18 | Files on my desktop.
| | 02:20 | We can then go ahead and click the Apply
button and all those additional icons disappear.
| | 02:25 | We'll go ahead and click OK to close
that window our theme is now set to have a
| | 02:30 | nice clean look to it.
| | 02:32 | We can go ahead and close this window and
now let's turn our attention to the task bar.
| | 02:38 | A couple of things that we
want to clean up on the taskbar.
| | 02:41 | The first of which is to go ahead and
get rid of these icons that are here on
| | 02:45 | the left-hand side our taskbar.
| | 02:47 | We can do that by simply right-clicking
on each of the icons and selecting Unpin
| | 02:52 | this program from the taskbar.
| | 02:54 | By unpinning each of the programs from
the taskbar again our users will be able
| | 02:59 | to focus on the specific application
that we're working with while we're
| | 03:03 | working on it and not trying to figure
out what additional icons we may have on
| | 03:08 | our recording setup.
| | 03:10 | The same is true for over
here on the right-hand side.
| | 03:13 | Let's go ahead and right-click on the
right edge of our taskbar and we'll select
| | 03:17 | Properties over here and now
we'll get rid of our system icons.
| | 03:22 | We'll simply click the dropdown menu
for each of these items and turn them off.
| | 03:27 | For an item like the clock it can be
really distracting to a user to constantly
| | 03:31 | be looking to see what time a recording
was made or if you've edited multiple
| | 03:36 | files together, you may end up with
some inconsistencies in the time and date
| | 03:40 | that the files were recorded.
| | 03:42 | We'll go ahead and turn all of these
items off by selecting the dropdown menu
| | 03:46 | and choosing Off for each item.
| | 03:48 | Once you've selected that for all of
them go ahead click OK and that will get
| | 03:52 | rid of all those items.
| | 03:53 | Next, let's go ahead and hiding On on
our taskbar so even the taskbar is out of
| | 03:58 | the way and our users are
focusing on our content.
| | 04:01 | We can do this by right-clicking on our
taskbar itself and selecting properties.
| | 04:07 | Now we can check the box
that says Auto-hide the taskbar.
| | 04:11 | That way the taskbar will
automatically disappear.
| | 04:14 | Another thing that can be
distracting is to have notifications
| | 04:18 | constantly popping up.
| | 04:19 | We can turn off notifications by going
to the Notifications area and selecting
| | 04:24 | the Customize button.
| | 04:25 | Here we can click the dropdown menu for
each of the behaviors and make sure to Hide
| | 04:31 | icons and notifications.
| | 04:33 | We'll do that for each of our items as
well then we'll click OK so that all of
| | 04:39 | those items are turned off as well.
| | 04:41 | We'll click the Apply button and then
click OK and we'll notice that our taskbar
| | 04:46 | neatly hides out of our way.
| | 04:48 | There is another type of notification
that we may need to get rid of and those
| | 04:53 | we access from the Start menu and
Control Panels, then make sure you're in the
| | 04:59 | Icon view, and select Action Center.
| | 05:03 | From the Action Center you want to
look and see if you have any items in
| | 05:07 | Security or Maintenance that may have
an item underneath of it that says, Turn
| | 05:11 | off messages about a particular
topic, in this case Windows backup.
| | 05:17 | I'll go ahead and click that button
and now any maintenance warnings that
| | 05:21 | would've popped up will
automatically not appear and disrupt a recording.
| | 05:26 | Now that that's set we can
go ahead and close our window.
| | 05:29 | Now we had our Start window open just
a second ago, we notice that there were
| | 05:33 | lots of items here in our Start menu, we
can go ahead and clean these up as well
| | 05:38 | by simply right-clicking on each item
that's not necessary and select Remove
| | 05:42 | from this list, go through each of these
items and get rid of all the items that
| | 05:47 | are not necessary for the particular
recording that you're going to be making
| | 05:51 | that way users don't have to get
distracted by what applications you may have or
| | 05:56 | may have been recently using
on your particular machine.
| | 06:01 | And as you launch applications that you
are going to be teaching those will be the ones
| | 06:05 | that will appear right there inside of
your Start menu making it easier for you
| | 06:10 | while you're doing your recording to be able
to access the applications that you want to use.
| | 06:15 | Another thing to keep in mind while
you're doing your recordings is to keep an
| | 06:19 | eye on your recycle bin.
| | 06:21 | If you ever end up with any items
inside of your recycle bin it's a good idea
| | 06:25 | between recordings to go ahead and
right-click on your Recycle Bin and select
| | 06:30 | the option for Empty Recycle Bin.
| | 06:32 | That way there is not some distracting trash
that sitting there inside of your recycle bin.
| | 06:36 | There is one more thing to look at
and that is to make sure that our screen
| | 06:41 | resolution is set to the right resolution.
| | 06:43 | We can access this by right-clicking on
our desktop and selecting Screen resolution.
| | 06:49 | In the Resolution dropdown menu you
may have a lot of different options
| | 06:53 | for different screen resolutions that are
available to you for your particular system.
| | 06:58 | For most of the screen recordings that
you're going to do a good resolution to
| | 07:02 | choose is going to be
either 1280 x 720 or 1024 x 768.
| | 07:10 | Both of these two settings are very
common screen sizes and the content on
| | 07:14 | screen will not be so small that it
won't be visible in your final screen
| | 07:19 | recording, but it also won't be so
large that you won't have enough room within
| | 07:23 | your application in order
to work with all of your files.
| | 07:26 | You may need to choose a different
resolution depending on the specific content
| | 07:30 | that you're recording or
for your specific audience.
| | 07:33 | These are just some really
good rules of thumb to go by.
| | 07:36 | For this recording I'm going to go
ahead and leave mine set to 1280 x 720.
| | 07:41 | If you've made a change go ahead
and click Apply and then click OK to
| | 07:45 | accept that change.
| | 07:47 | Now if you're following along with the
exercise files you may want to go ahead
| | 07:50 | and copy your exercise files down onto
the desktop of this account so that you
| | 07:56 | have access to them while you're
working through the training so you don't have
| | 07:59 | to jump back over to your primary account.
| | 08:01 | Alright. Our Recording account is now
set up and properly configured.
| | 08:06 | Over time as you install additional
programs you may need to constantly monitor
| | 08:11 | what items reappear inside of your
Windows taskbar or in your system tray and
| | 08:17 | it's a good idea to periodically go
through and check over all your settings in
| | 08:21 | this account before you begin recording.
| | 08:23 | But in general you should have a
nice clean account to do all of your
| | 08:26 | recordings from now.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Choosing a microphone| 00:00 | Before we go any further we need to take
a few minutes and talk about microphones.
| | 00:05 | And let's talk about my first rule of
creating great screen casts, and that is
| | 00:10 | quite simply to never ever use the
built-in microphone included in your
| | 00:16 | computer, especially if
you're recording on a laptop.
| | 00:19 | While it may be convenient to have a
built-in microphone in your computer, the
| | 00:24 | placement of that microphone is not
ideal for capturing your voice cleanly.
| | 00:29 | Yes, it does work and in a pinch it will
get you by, but you're going to pick up
| | 00:34 | a lot more of the noise coming out
of your computer, the pounding of your
| | 00:38 | fingers on the keyboard, the fan built
into your computer, and your voice is not
| | 00:43 | going to sound as clear as it
is in an external microphone.
| | 00:48 | If all you have is the built-in mic in
your computer, then by all means it's
| | 00:52 | better than nothing, go ahead and
use it, but to really take your screen
| | 00:56 | recordings to the next level, go ahead
and invest a little bit of money and get
| | 01:00 | a good quality external USB microphone.
| | 01:04 | These can be picked up for anywhere
from 30 to a couple of hundred dollars.
| | 01:08 | There are two basic types of mics.
| | 01:11 | You have desktop mics and you have headset mics.
| | 01:15 | Let's start by looking at the desktop mics.
| | 01:17 | Desktop mics tend to be of a
much higher quality than their
| | 01:21 | headset counterparts.
| | 01:23 | They tend to offer more advanced
controls and options directly on the microphone
| | 01:28 | itself and sometimes in the software
that's included with the microphone.
| | 01:33 | They do require you to use a separate
set of headphones, and so you could look
| | 01:37 | at this as a disadvantage to having to
buy another piece of gear, but you could
| | 01:41 | also look at it as an advantage,
because you can use your really nice quality
| | 01:46 | headphones that you may
already have for listening to music.
| | 01:49 | On the disadvantage side, these mics
do tend to be a bit more expensive than
| | 01:54 | their headset counterparts,
but you do get what you pay for.
| | 01:58 | The last disadvantage to talk about is
mic placement, and this is not so much
| | 02:03 | a disadvantage, but a challenge, and
something that you really need to be aware of.
| | 02:07 | Because the desktop microphone is
stationary in front of you, you need to be
| | 02:11 | able to get in the habit of speaking
into the microphone, but not getting
| | 02:15 | too close that your audio gets
distorted, or getting too far away and your
| | 02:20 | audio getting diminished.
| | 02:22 | To get good mic placement a good rule
of thumb is to get the microphone to be
| | 02:27 | set anywhere from about 6-10 inches
away from your mouth when you're speaking,
| | 02:32 | and angled such that it's
pretty much pointed at your mouth.
| | 02:36 | To get a good placement on this, I like
to take and extend my little finger and
| | 02:40 | my thumb or my hand stretched out as
far as possible and place the microphone
| | 02:46 | so that it's about touching my little finger
and my mouth so it's about touching my thumb.
| | 02:50 | That gives me a nice gauge so that I
always know about how far my microphone is
| | 02:55 | from my mouth when I'm talking.
| | 02:57 | Now, on the headset microphone options, these
offer a really great quality to value ratio.
| | 03:04 | You can get a really good
headset for not a lot of money.
| | 03:08 | And the consistency of mic placement on
these headsets really increase their value.
| | 03:13 | Because the microphone is attached to
the headset which you're wearing on your
| | 03:17 | head, the mic is always at the same
consistent distance away from your mouth,
| | 03:23 | this way your recordings sound very consistent.
| | 03:26 | For the boom mic placement, I like to
set the boom so that it's pretty much
| | 03:30 | straight out in front of my mouth and then
bent in just a little bit towards my mouth.
| | 03:35 | Vertically, I'll either set the end of
the microphone so that it's just above
| | 03:40 | my top lip when my mouth is closed or just
below my bottom lip when my mouth is closed.
| | 03:46 | Any of these placements tend to give
me the best recordings when I'm using
| | 03:50 | one of these headsets.
| | 03:52 | You'll need to experiment with your
headset to find the optimal placement for
| | 03:56 | your mic with your
particular voice and how you speak.
| | 04:00 | The thing that I really love about the
headset mics is how portable they are.
| | 04:05 | I have my headset mic
with me nearly all the time.
| | 04:08 | I just throw it in my laptop bag and
that way anytime I need to do a screen
| | 04:13 | recording, all I need to do is
find a quiet room and I have my whole
| | 04:17 | recording studio with me.
| | 04:19 | Since this style of mic has integrated
headphones, you really have a complete
| | 04:24 | recording package all in one unit.
| | 04:27 | On the disadvantage or challenge side
for these headsets, it can be a little
| | 04:31 | bit of a challenge to find a
headset mic that you really like that is
| | 04:35 | comfortable for you.
| | 04:37 | The comfort level of the headset mics
varies greatly, so you're really going to
| | 04:41 | have to experiment and find one that you like.
| | 04:44 | And that brings us to our last
challenge with these headsets.
| | 04:47 | There really are too many options out there.
| | 04:50 | Every different vendor makes one.
| | 04:51 | You probably have one at your house already;
| | 04:54 | if you're a gamer you probably already have
a gaming headset, that will work just fine.
| | 04:59 | Again, the biggest key when you're
choosing a microphone is to get a good
| | 05:03 | quality microphone that
works for you in your setting.
| | 05:06 | USB is a great option;
| | 05:08 | you don't need to go through a lot
of expense in order to get a good
| | 05:12 | quality microphone.
| | 05:13 | Have consistent mic placement and tune
your microphone to your voice so that
| | 05:17 | your audio always sounds the same
when you're doing your recordings.
| | 05:21 | For the rest of this training title,
I'll be using the desktop USB Yeti
| | 05:27 | Microphone from Blue.
| | 05:28 | This is the microphone
that I use in my home studio.
| | 05:31 | But when I'm out on the road or I'm
in my office at work, I'll tend to go
| | 05:36 | with my Plantronics advanced DSP, USB
headset that I carry around with me all
| | 05:41 | the time.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Connecting a microphone| 00:00 | Let's go ahead and plug-in our USB
microphone and make sure that it's set up on
| | 00:05 | our computer properly.
| | 00:06 | Now, obviously you're not going to have
the exact same microphone that I do, so
| | 00:11 | your steps may be a little bit
different than exactly what I see on screen, but
| | 00:15 | the general process
should basically be the same.
| | 00:18 | The first thing you want to do
is plug in your USB microphone.
| | 00:23 | When your microphone is plugged in,
Windows should popup and let you know that
| | 00:28 | it's automatically trying to install
the Driver Software for your microphone.
| | 00:32 | You'll see a little status
window down here in the lower-right.
| | 00:35 | You can click on that window to see
some information about your microphone.
| | 00:40 | In this case, Windows has found my
microphone, identified it, and downloaded the
| | 00:44 | appropriate software automatically for me.
| | 00:48 | I can then go ahead and click the
Close button and my microphone has been set
| | 00:52 | up on my PC for me.
| | 00:53 | Let's go ahead and go into our
Control Panel and check and see that our
| | 00:57 | microphone is really selected there.
| | 01:00 | So in our Control Panel, I'm in the
Icon view, I'll go ahead down and select
| | 01:04 | Sound, and click on the tab for Recordings.
| | 01:08 | Now, I have two Microphone options;
| | 01:11 | the one that is checked is my Yeti Stereo
Microphone, which is the one that I want to have.
| | 01:16 | If your USB microphone is not
automatically selected with the checkbox next to
| | 01:21 | it, go ahead and select it and
then click Apply, and then OK.
| | 01:25 | Now we know that our microphone is
properly connected to our computer and we're
| | 01:29 | getting sound into our computer.
| | 01:31 | You may need to adjust the
Gain settings on your mic.
| | 01:35 | For my mic, I've got the Gain settings set
to the midpoint on the back of the microphone.
| | 01:40 | Now, of course headset mics are not
necessarily going to have this setting, but if
| | 01:44 | you've got a desktop mic,
that's a pretty good place to start.
| | 01:47 | When we go into starting to do our
recordings, we'll look at making sure that
| | 01:52 | our settings are correct by doing
some sound tests inside of Camtasia.
| | 01:56 | For right now, we're set
up to where we need to be.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Installing Camtasia Studio 8| 00:00 | Now that we have our recording account
set up and our microphone all configured,
| | 00:04 | the next step is to go ahead and
install Camtasia Studio 8, if you haven't
| | 00:09 | already installed it.
| | 00:10 | Now, there is a variety of ways you
can get a copy of Camtasia Studio 8, but
| | 00:14 | perhaps the easiest is to simply go
to techsmith.com and look for the Top
| | 00:19 | Downloads section, here you
should find a link to Camtasia Studio.
| | 00:23 | Go ahead and click on that link.
| | 00:24 | You'll need to enter in a valid
email address and then click the Start
| | 00:31 | Windows Download button.
| | 00:33 | A window may popup asking you
what you'd like to do with this file.
| | 00:37 | In this case we'll go ahead and click
the Save File button, and we'll wait for
| | 00:42 | the Camtasia Installer to
download to our computer.
| | 00:44 | Now, depending on your Internet
connection this may take a few minutes.
| | 00:49 | Once the download is complete, we
can either access the file by simply
| | 00:53 | double-clicking it in the Downloads
window or navigating to the Downloads folder
| | 00:58 | that's been specified within our browser.
| | 01:01 | I'll go ahead and close each of these
windows in the background so that they're
| | 01:05 | out of our way and now we can
focus on the installation process.
| | 01:09 | We'll go ahead and click the Run button
if we get the security warning, letting
| | 01:13 | Windows know that we do in
fact want to run this installer.
| | 01:17 | The installer should open up and we
can simply advance to the next screen by
| | 01:21 | clicking the Next button.
| | 01:22 | You'll next need to read the License
Agreement and select the option to accept
| | 01:27 | the License Agreement and
then click the Next button.
| | 01:30 | You can then choose whether or not
you want TechSmith to be able to collect
| | 01:34 | any data about your system while
you're running Camtasia Studio for
| | 01:38 | performance enhancements.
| | 01:39 | I'll go ahead and leave mine set to
Improve Camtasia Studio by collecting usage
| | 01:43 | data and then click the Next button.
| | 01:46 | Choose whether or not you want to
simply use the 30-day evaluation version, or
| | 01:51 | if you've purchased a copy of Camtasia,
go ahead and click the License option
| | 01:55 | and then type in your Name
and your License Key here.
| | 01:58 | So enter in your License Key
and then click the Next button.
| | 02:07 | Next, you can choose to install Camtasia
into a custom folder location or simply
| | 02:12 | accept the default location by
clicking the Next button again.
| | 02:15 | On the next screen we're asked if we
want to enable the Camtasia Studio add-in
| | 02:19 | for Microsoft PowerPoint.
| | 02:21 | Now, if you use PowerPoint as part of
your presentations, and many of us do,
| | 02:25 | then you want to make sure
that this box is checked.
| | 02:28 | Go ahead and click the Next button
and we're given a summary of all of the
| | 02:32 | different steps that we just stepped through.
| | 02:33 | We can go ahead and check the box
to start Camtasia Studio 8 after the
| | 02:37 | installation, that way everything
will all be completed in one step.
| | 02:41 | We'll go ahead and click the Next button.
| | 02:44 | You may periodically get a security
warning verifying if you want to in fact
| | 02:48 | install this software.
| | 02:50 | We'll go ahead and click the Yes
button and now installation should
| | 02:53 | happen automatically.
| | 02:56 | Once the setup process has
completed, you should come to this screen.
| | 03:00 | We can move on by clicking
the Finish button in the bottom.
| | 03:02 | Now, Camtasia will popup your web
browser and take you back to the TechSmith
| | 03:07 | site, thanking you for installing Camtasia.
| | 03:10 | Feel free to click around on this
site and have a look at some of the nice
| | 03:14 | resources that TechSmith has
put together for Camtasia Studio.
| | 03:17 | I'm going to go ahead and close my
browser window by clicking the X in the upper
| | 03:22 | right-hand corner, and if you've
entered in your serial number, you may get a
| | 03:27 | request to register your product online.
| | 03:29 | I've already gone ahead and
registered my copy of Camtasia, so I'll simply
| | 03:33 | close the window by clicking the X.
And once again, our browser window opens
| | 03:39 | right back up, thanking us for our purchase
and inviting us to register our Studio License.
| | 03:45 | I'll go ahead and close the window
and then we'll go ahead and double-click
| | 03:48 | Camtasia Studio 8 to open
it up for the first time.
| | 03:52 | The first-time Camtasia Studio opens
up, a sample project has already been
| | 03:56 | created and there will be a video that's
been created by Camtasia that will walk
| | 04:01 | you through many of the wonderful
features that are included in the program.
| | 04:05 | Feel free to take a few minutes and
play through that video on your own.
| | 04:09 | But now that we've got everything set up,
we can go ahead and close this window
| | 04:14 | and we know that Camtasia
Studio is properly set up.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding the interface| 00:00 | Now that the Camtasia Studio has been
fully installed on our system and we've
| | 00:04 | launched it for the first time, let's
go ahead and have a quick tour of the
| | 00:08 | interface, simply double-click on the
Camtasia Studio icon here on your Desktop
| | 00:13 | to launch Camtasia Studio.
| | 00:14 | So the first time that you open up
Camtasia Studio you may get this pop up
| | 00:22 | window that will appear asking you if
you would like Camtasia Studio Updater
| | 00:27 | to automatically run and constantly check to
make sure that Camtasia is always up-to-date.
| | 00:33 | If this pops up, go ahead and simply
click the Yes button in order to accept
| | 00:38 | that change and then go ahead and click
the Close button, and then you're taken
| | 00:42 | directly to the Camtasia Studio Welcome screen.
| | 00:46 | Now this Welcome screen will appear
anytime you start Camtasia Studio up by
| | 00:50 | itself. If you wanted to, from here
you're able to get directly to Recording
| | 00:56 | your screen, Importing any media you'll be able
see any Recent projects you've been working on.
| | 01:01 | There will be news directly from the
Camtasia Studio Community and there are
| | 01:06 | links to some Free Training that's
available on the TechSmith website that's
| | 01:11 | produced by Camtasia themselves.
| | 01:13 | And some of these trainings are
pretty good, although I encourage you to go
| | 01:17 | through the rest of this training here
at lynda.com and then use that as some
| | 01:20 | additional supplemental material.
| | 01:22 | Now, if you don't want to see this
pop up window appear every single time
| | 01:27 | you launch Camtasia Studio, simply go
ahead and deselect this checkbox that
| | 01:32 | says Shows this dialogue at start up,
and then from now on, when we go ahead
| | 01:37 | and click the Close button, from
then on you'll be taken directly into
| | 01:40 | Camtasia Studio and you'll be ready
to begin working and you won't have to
| | 01:45 | go through that dialog box.
| | 01:46 | Most of the things that you're going to
be doing inside of Camtasia Studio, you
| | 01:50 | can do from directly here
inside of Camtasia itself.
| | 01:55 | Let's go ahead and take a quick tour of the
various different areas of Camtasia Studio.
| | 02:00 | The most obvious portion is the viewer
of our window, which is up here in the
| | 02:04 | upper-right corner.
| | 02:06 | This is where we'll be previewing all
of the content that we're going to be
| | 02:10 | editing inside of Camtasia Studio.
| | 02:12 | Now, speaking of editing, the whole
bottom portion of your window is the
| | 02:18 | timeline and this is where all of
your content is going to be loaded in to,
| | 02:22 | so we'll be able to edit any of
the audio, video, overlays any of the
| | 02:27 | different tools that we're adding into our
Camtasia project are going to be done down in here.
| | 02:32 | Now over here on the left side,
this is where all of the various different
| | 02:37 | tools that we're going to
be working with are located.
| | 02:39 | We have item such as our Clip Bin, the
Library of all the different resources
| | 02:44 | that are available including
audio and video and animation clips.
| | 02:48 | A place for us to add Callouts,
Pan-n-Zoom, Audio features, work with
| | 02:54 | Transitions and there's a whole lot More,
we'll explore these in later movies.
| | 02:59 | At the top of our Camtasia window,
we have a link directly to our Camtasia
| | 03:03 | Recorder, we have another link to be
able to Import media and when we're
| | 03:08 | finished recording our project and
doing any editing that we may do to it, we
| | 03:13 | will use the Produce and share a section
here to be able to go in and package up
| | 03:18 | our Camtasia project and then post it
out on the Internet or Save it as a file
| | 03:24 | on to our local computer to
distribute to our learners, however that may be.
| | 03:29 | So, now that we've got everything
setup within our recording account, and now
| | 03:33 | we've had a nice tour of the general
interface for Camtasia Studio, the last
| | 03:39 | step in getting ourselves started to
record is to go ahead and calibrate our
| | 03:43 | microphone, and we'll do that in the next movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Calibrating a microphone| 00:00 | Perhaps the single most important thing
that you can do to greatly improve the quality
| | 00:06 | of your screencast is to make sure that your
microphone's input settings, placement and
| | 00:13 | the settings in your computer are all set up
for the particular room, your voice, your
| | 00:19 | mood at the time that
you're doing your recordings.
| | 00:22 | Now the process that I show
you should work for everyone.
| | 00:25 | However, the specific settings that I'm
going to choose are not necessarily going to be
| | 00:30 | the ones that are going to
give you the best results.
| | 00:33 | This is a process that you'll have to go through
and they'll be quite a bit of trial and error.
| | 00:38 | But if you go through it, over time, you'll
be able to hone down on your specific settings
| | 00:43 | that are going to work best for your setup,
and make sure that you go through the basic
| | 00:48 | process each time you do your recordings.
| | 00:51 | So, let's begin the process by going down
to our Start menu, clicking on All Programs
| | 00:58 | selecting TechSmith and finding
our Camtasia Recorder 8 application.
| | 01:03 | The Camtasia Recorder 8 application is the
portion of the Camtasia Studio that's responsible
| | 01:09 | for doing our audio and video recording.
| | 01:12 | We'll begin by clicking the drop-down menu
here for Audio on, and making sure our particular
| | 01:17 | Microphone is the one that is selected.
| | 01:20 | So in my case I'm using a Yeti Stereo
Microphone, so that's what selected yours is likely to
| | 01:27 | say something different, just make sure it's
your USB mic and not your built-in Audio Device.
| | 01:33 | Next, we'll go ahead and adjust the input
gain on your microphone itself if it has one.
| | 01:39 | For me my settings tend to work best with
my input gain set to about the midpoint and
| | 01:45 | this is a good place to begin at.
| | 01:47 | Now if you don't have an input gain on your
mic or if you're using a headset mic, don't
| | 01:51 | worry about it, go ahead and make sure
that your mic placement now is correct.
| | 01:56 | So, because I'm using a Desktop mic, I'm
going to go ahead and hold my hand up in between
| | 02:01 | my microphone and my mouth and extend my
little finger and my thumb and make sure that the
| | 02:05 | distance between my mouth and the microphone is
now going to be at about that consistent range.
| | 02:12 | Now if I'm using a headset mic I'm going to go
ahead to make sure that the boom is straight
| | 02:16 | out in front of me and bent a
little bit in towards the middle.
| | 02:19 | I then may adjust the angle of the boom, so
that the microphone itself is sitting either
| | 02:25 | just above my top lip or just below
my bottom lip when my mouth is closed.
| | 02:31 | Next, we will begin adjusting the input
gain that's setup in Camtasia Recorder itself,
| | 02:37 | and we'll do that with this small slider.
| | 02:39 | You can see mine is currently set to about the
midpoint, and this is a good place to begin at.
| | 02:44 | You can drag the slider to the right and
increase the amount of gain that's applied to your
| | 02:49 | microphone settings.
| | 02:51 | If you move this slider to far to the right,
you'll notice that a red indicator appears
| | 02:55 | showing that your audio maybe clipping or
you maybe losing some of the quality of the
| | 02:59 | audio that's going in.
| | 03:01 | You can then drag your input gain to
the left and reduce the amount of gain.
| | 03:05 | But now you may see that you're not
getting any indicators that are moving forward.
| | 03:10 | Let's go ahead and begin our process by
setting our indicator here to the midpoint, so that
| | 03:15 | way we have a nice middle point to start with,
and we can see whether or not we need to increase
| | 03:21 | or reduce the amount of
gain that's being applied.
| | 03:24 | We'll go ahead and click the Record button.
| | 03:26 | When we do, what will happen is first we'll
get a window that'll show us that F10 is the
| | 03:32 | key to stop recording, and
then we'll get a countdown.
| | 03:35 | After the countdown, Camtasia Recorder is
now recording our screen, all we need to do
| | 03:40 | is record a few seconds of audio and then press
the F10 key on your keyboard to stop the recording.
| | 03:49 | (audio playing)
| | 03:50 | A window will automatically open up for us and begin
replaying our video back to us that we just recorded.
| | 03:57 | You can preview your audio by simply
listening to it and that does an okay job of telling
| | 04:03 | you if you're even in the ballpark, but it
doesn't really give you any hard data to really
| | 04:08 | look at and that's what we want.
| | 04:09 | So what we're going to do is we're going to
come over and click on the Save and Edit button.
| | 04:13 | A window should pop up
allowing you to save this recording.
| | 04:17 | Now by default, Camtasia Studio should've
created a Camtasia Studio folder inside of
| | 04:22 | your My Documents folder for you automatically.
| | 04:26 | We'll go ahead and name this file Soundtest1
and we'll go ahead and click the Save button.
| | 04:32 | Next, Camtasia Studio should automatically
open up for us and open up that recording.
| | 04:41 | When the window opens up, we're asked
what editing dimensions that we want to use.
| | 04:45 | We'll deal with this in a later movie.
| | 04:48 | For right now, simply click OK to accept the
default settings and what we're interested
| | 04:53 | in looking at is the waveform.
| | 04:56 | This audio track right here and we can see
the peaks and the valleys that is describing the
| | 05:02 | waveform of our audio that we recorded.
| | 05:06 | What ideally we want to see is the top of
all of these peaks to be anywhere from the
| | 05:11 | midpoint of this track, up to
about the three-quarter mark.
| | 05:16 | In this particular recording, we can see
that our audio levels are set at a pretty good
| | 05:21 | range, we're not getting audio that's showing
up all the way up here at the top and we're
| | 05:26 | not getting audio that's showing up only down here
near the bottom, so this is a pretty good level.
| | 05:32 | Now we could go in and fine-tune this by
simply closing this window--we don't need to save
| | 05:38 | any changes to this project--and we'll go back to our
taskbar and click on the Camtasia Recorder again.
| | 05:46 | This time let's see what happens when we
increase our audio gain up quite a bit.
| | 05:51 | I'll move my audio gain up to about three-
quarters of the way; we can already see that
| | 05:56 | we're getting some clipping in here.
| | 05:58 | We'll go ahead and click the Record button and
record a few seconds just to see what it looks like.
| | 06:06 | And here is the few seconds of recording of
audio that's being done at an input level
| | 06:12 | gain that's set about three-quarters of the way up,
we're probably getting quite a bit of clipping.
| | 06:17 | We'll go ahead and press the F10 key
on our keyboard to stop the recording.
| | 06:22 | (audio playing)
| | 06:28 | Now when that audio is playing back, we can
already hear that the audio level is much
| | 06:32 | louder than it was before.
| | 06:34 | Let's go ahead and look at the hard data
though and see if we are getting any clipping.
| | 06:38 | We'll go ahead and click the Save and Edit button,
we'll call this Soundtest2 and go ahead and
| | 06:45 | click the Save button.
| | 06:47 | Once again, Camtasia Studio should automatically
open up for us and it's going to open up directly
| | 06:53 | into a project for us to
check our sound levels.
| | 06:57 | We'll once again click OK to accept the
default size of the video and now we can turn our
| | 07:05 | attention to the waveform, and right
away, we can see, here's the problem.
| | 07:10 | We've got audio peaks that are going all the
way up to the top of our audio track and they're
| | 07:14 | clipping off near the top, this
is not a good audio recording.
| | 07:19 | Likewise, let's go ahead and close the window--
we don't need to save any changes--we'll go
| | 07:25 | back to work taskbar, this time we'll set
our audio level down to a much lower level.
| | 07:31 | We'll do the same thing again by clicking
the Record button and now, without changing
| | 07:39 | the placement of our microphone or the distance
that we are away from it, we can record another
| | 07:44 | few seconds of audio and then
press the F10 key to stop recording.
| | 07:49 | (audio playing)
| | 07:52 | Already, just in the preview you can hear it;
the audio levels are much lower than they
| | 07:59 | were in the original recording.
| | 08:01 | Let's go ahead and click Save and Edit
and see what the waveform looks like.
| | 08:05 | We'll go ahead and name this Soundtest3,
click the Save button and when Camtasia Recorder
| | 08:15 | opens up, we'll go ahead and accept the default
settings for size and now look at our waveform,
| | 08:22 | it's all much lower than our 50% level.
| | 08:26 | We did not get a good capture of our
audio and the audio levels are not optimal.
| | 08:31 | So, we want to go through this process of
constantly recording a little bit of audio,
| | 08:38 | saving the recording, opening it up in
Camtasia Studio, and checking to see what the levels
| | 08:43 | are to make sure that they're hitting
that midpoint to three-quarters levels.
| | 08:47 | Let's go ahead and do one more recording and
set our input level back up to about the midpoint
| | 08:54 | level and we'll do one more recording to
check and see that our settings are correct.
| | 09:04 | Now I've recorded another sound test in order
to check my levels and make sure everything
| | 09:09 | is set up on my recording setup properly.
| | 09:12 | I'll press F10 one more time on my keyboard.
| | 09:16 | (audio playing)
| | 09:19 | Now that audio is
sounding much better this time.
| | 09:22 | We'll go ahead and click Save and Edit, I'm going
to call this Soundtest4, click the Save button.
| | 09:33 | I'll go ahead and accept my default size of my
window, and here we can see our audio levels
| | 09:38 | are showing up exactly where we want them.
| | 09:41 | They're showing up anywhere between the
halfway point and the three-quarters point.
| | 09:46 | We could even take and boost our gain up
just a little tiny bit in order to really tweak
| | 09:51 | and get our settings
exactly where we want them.
| | 09:54 | Like I said, it's an iterative process, it'll
take you a little while to get it down properly,
| | 10:01 | but once you do, your screencasts are going
to be so much better, because your audio is
| | 10:06 | going to be crisp and clear and your learners
will be able to hear clearly all the instructions
| | 10:12 | that you're giving them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Updating Camtasia Studio| 00:00 | Before we dive into Camtasia Studio,
there is one more thing that we want to go
| | 00:05 | ahead and look at, and that is how
to manually update Camtasia Studio.
| | 00:09 | TechSmith, the company that produces
Camtasia Studio does a great job of
| | 00:13 | responding to their customers anytime
that there is a bug that's identified
| | 00:18 | inside of the program.
| | 00:19 | And they work very hard to get those
bugs fixed, and they release updates.
| | 00:23 | And it's a good idea, every time you
launch Camtasia Studio, to go ahead and do
| | 00:27 | a quick check to see if
any updates are available.
| | 00:30 | Now, when you're watching this movie,
you may not find any updates that are
| | 00:33 | available, because you just finished
installing Camtasia in a previous movie.
| | 00:37 | However, at some point when you're using
Camtasia, one of these updates is going
| | 00:42 | to be available to you.
| | 00:43 | So I wanted to just show you how you
step through the process of finding and
| | 00:47 | updating your copy of Camtasia.
| | 00:49 | All you need to do is go ahead and
launch Camtasia Studio, and go up to the Help
| | 00:53 | menu, and go down to the
Option that says Check for Updates.
| | 00:58 | If an update is available, such as the
8.02 update, all you need to do is go
| | 01:03 | ahead and click the link
that does Download it now.
| | 01:06 | This should open up your browser
and take you to the Download Center on
| | 01:10 | the TechSmith website where you can find
some additional information about the update.
| | 01:15 | We'll go ahead and click the link
that says Download Camtasia Studio.
| | 01:18 | We may a get a little pop up from
Windows asking us, if we do in fact want to
| | 01:22 | run or if we want to save this file?
| | 01:25 | We'll go ahead and click the Run button.
| | 01:26 | And then I like to go ahead, and
click the View Downloads button.
| | 01:30 | So, the Downloads open up and then
we can go and see that file coming in.
| | 01:34 | Now, while this is going on in the
background, I like to go ahead, and simply
| | 01:38 | close Camtasia Studio.
| | 01:39 | So, I go ahead and click one time on it.
| | 01:41 | Now, I'll go ahead and Close the
update there, and I'll close this Window up
| | 01:45 | here as well and that will make sure
that the update will be will run smoothly
| | 01:49 | when it's finished downloading.
| | 01:51 | Once the download completes, the
installation process will start
| | 01:54 | automatically for you.
| | 01:56 | When you get to the Welcome Camtasia
Studio 8 Installation Wizard, at that
| | 02:00 | point you can go ahead and close these
additional windows that are open in the
| | 02:03 | background, just to clean up our screen to
make things a little bit easier to focus on.
| | 02:07 | Now we'll step through the installation
process just as we did in a previous movie.
| | 02:12 | So, we'll go ahead and click the Next button.
| | 02:14 | We'll read through the Software License
Agreement, and click the Accept button,
| | 02:18 | and then click Next.
| | 02:20 | We can choose whether or not we want
to send any data to Camtasia, we'll go
| | 02:23 | ahead and leave that set to allow
that and I'll hit the Next button.
| | 02:27 | We'll leave the default Installation
set where it is. We'll click Next.
| | 02:31 | We do want to have the PowerPoint Add-
In installed on our system, if we have a
| | 02:35 | copy of PowerPoint on our machine.
| | 02:37 | So, we'll go ahead and leave
that checked, and hit Next.
| | 02:40 | We don't need to start Camtasia Studio
automatically, but we leave the other
| | 02:44 | two options checked.
| | 02:45 | So we'll click the Next button.
| | 02:47 | Now, Windows may pop up a
warning asking us to verify that.
| | 02:50 | Yes, in fact, we do want to go
ahead and do this installation.
| | 02:53 | So we'll go ahead and say Yes.
| | 02:55 | And if you have any additional
windows open, such as here we've got Windows
| | 02:59 | Explorer open, we should be able just go
ahead and click the Automatically close this.
| | 03:03 | We'll go ahead and click the OK button.
| | 03:05 | Those applications should automatically
shutdown and installation process should continue.
| | 03:10 | Now, I will note that since we have
Camtasia and Camtasia Recorder already
| | 03:15 | installed on our system, I have
noticed that Automatically shut down those
| | 03:19 | applications does not work all the time.
| | 03:22 | So, you may want to manually go in
and close Camtasia Recorder and close Camtasia
| | 03:26 | Studio, if they're open and
then go ahead and proceed.
| | 03:30 | When Camtasia Studio Installation has
completed, we should be taken to this
| | 03:35 | page, and we'll go ahead and click the
Finish button, and then we're taken back
| | 03:39 | to the Thanks for Installation
page at TechSmith's website.
| | 03:41 | So, we'll go ahead and close that window.
| | 03:43 | And we will go ahead and
open up Camtasia Studio 8.
| | 03:49 | And now you know how to keep your
copy of Camtasia Studio always up-to-date
| | 03:53 | to the latest version.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Capturing Your ScreenIntroducing Camtasia Recorder| 00:00 | Let's have a look at the Camtasia Recorder.
| | 00:04 | Camtasia Recorder is a dedicated
application that's used to record your screen,
| | 00:08 | microphone, and other inputs
that you may have, such as a webcam.
| | 00:13 | To launch the Camtasia Recorder from
Camtasia Studio, all you need to do is
| | 00:17 | go up to the upper left corner of
your screen and click on the button that
| | 00:21 | says Record the Screen.
| | 00:23 | When you do, Camtasia Studio is
minimized down to your Taskbar, and the
| | 00:27 | application is automatically opened.
| | 00:29 | Now, here's one of those things
that I'm not crazy about this method.
| | 00:33 | And that is, if you go down to your
Taskbar you'll notice that Camtasia Studio
| | 00:37 | is still running in the background.
| | 00:39 | Well, there is another way to launch
the application, since it's a dedicated
| | 00:43 | standalone application.
| | 00:45 | So, let's go ahead and close Camtasia
Recorder, and also close Camtasia Studio.
| | 00:51 | And this time we'll simply go down to
our Taskbar, click on the Start Menu, and
| | 00:56 | we'll launch Camtasia
Recorder 8 directly from there.
| | 01:00 | Now, if we go back down our Taskbar,
we don't have the distraction of having
| | 01:05 | Camtasia Studio also running in the background.
| | 01:08 | Camtasia Recorder is a very simple
easy to use application that's incredibly
| | 01:13 | powerful for recording your screen.
| | 01:16 | Setting up the application is done
by simply working from left to right.
| | 01:20 | The left side of the application
allows you to select the area in which your
| | 01:24 | recording is going to take place.
| | 01:27 | Here, you can see the area that's
highlighted by looking at the small dashed green
| | 01:31 | lines that are located
around the outside of your screen.
| | 01:35 | Once you've selected the area that you
want to record, the next area of Camtasia
| | 01:39 | Recorder that we need to pay
attention to is the recorded inputs.
| | 01:44 | Here we can choose whether or not we want
to include the video coming from our webcam.
| | 01:49 | Whether or not we want to have our
audio recorded from our microphone, and any
| | 01:53 | custom settings for
microphone that we need to make.
| | 01:56 | If we decide that we don't want to have
one of these items selected, such as audio,
| | 02:01 | we can simply click one time on the
microphone and a red X will appear
| | 02:05 | indicating that that input
is not going to be recorded.
| | 02:09 | If we click on the input type again,
we can turn that input item back on, and
| | 02:13 | we'll see a green checkmark indicating
that that item is going to be recorded.
| | 02:18 | Finally, we have a record
button over on the right-hand side.
| | 02:23 | Now, when you click on the record
button a warning will pop up on screen,
| | 02:27 | letting you know that to stop the recording,
you can simply press F10 on your keyboard.
| | 02:32 | Then you get a countdown of 3, 2, 1,
and then Camtasia Recorder will begin
| | 02:39 | recording your screen, and any
of the selected recorded inputs.
| | 02:44 | Go ahead and click on the Record button.
| | 02:46 | We'll get our warning noting that F10
is our key to stop, we get our countdown
| | 02:50 | timer, and now Camtasia
Studio is recording our screen.
| | 02:55 | If we move our mouse around on
screen just a little bit, we'll be able to
| | 02:59 | capture that in the recording.
| | 03:00 | Press the F10 key on your keyboard to stop the recording.
(audio playing)
| | 03:06 | As soon as the recording stops,
Camtasia Studio automatically opens up a
| | 03:12 | preview of our recording.
| | 03:14 | Let's have a look at this Preview Window
in detail and explore some of its options.
| | 03:19 | To begin, we'll notice that there is a
Play, Restart and Jump to the End button
| | 03:25 | right here in the middle,
allowing us to navigate around our movie.
| | 03:29 | We can also navigate around our movie
by using the Time slider that's located
| | 03:34 | here underneath of our movie.
| | 03:36 | If we grab that slider, and we drag it
around on screen, we can see here's our
| | 03:40 | mouse that was moving around.
| | 03:42 | We can move to another portion of
our movie, and we'll notice over on the
| | 03:46 | left-hand side that we have a Time indicator.
| | 03:48 | The Time indicator indicates the
location of the playhead, and the total amount
| | 03:54 | of time of our recording.
| | 03:56 | The next option allows us to
Shrink our video to fit our screen.
| | 04:00 | If we click this button, you will notice
that now you can see your entire screen.
| | 04:05 | Don't worry that everything may not
be completely clear in the scaled view.
| | 04:09 | The scaled view simply allows you to
see the entire screen, and play back all of
| | 04:14 | your video to make sure you
captured what you thought you captured.
| | 04:17 | If you want to go back to view at
100%, simply click this button.
| | 04:22 | When you're at the 100% view, you
have additional sliders that you can drag
| | 04:26 | around in order to see all of the
different portions of your window.
| | 04:31 | Over on the right-hand side
you have a couple of options.
| | 04:35 | You have a Save and Edit button that if
you click on that, it will prompt you
| | 04:39 | to save your recording and then
automatically open that recording up in Camtasia Studio.
| | 04:45 | If you son't want to edit your video
immediately, you can simply click the small
| | 04:49 | dropdown menu here at the bottom
and select Save As, and then you'll be
| | 04:53 | prompted to simply save your
recording on your hard drive.
| | 04:57 | If you're not planning on editing
your video at all, and you just want to
| | 05:00 | publish your rough screencast directly
to the Internet, you can use the Produce
| | 05:05 | button to go through the process of
compressing this video, and making it ready for
| | 05:10 | display up on the web.
| | 05:12 | Finally, if after previewing your
recording, you realize that it's not something
| | 05:17 | that you want to keep, you can simply
click the Delete button and then verify
| | 05:21 | that Yes in fact you do
want to delete the recording.
| | 05:24 | We'll go ahead and delete this
recording, and you'll notice that we're
| | 05:27 | immediately taken right
back into Camtasia Recorder.
| | 05:31 | This way, if we wanted to make another
take of our video, we could do so right away.
| | 05:35 | I'm going to go ahead and close the
Camtasia Recorder, and that's the basics of
| | 05:40 | how to work with the Camtasia Recorder.
| | 05:42 | In the next movie, we'll look at some
of the ways that you can customize the
| | 05:45 | recorder to better match
your particular workflow.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring recording workflow options| 00:00 | Even though the Camtasia Recorder
application is a very simple and
| | 00:04 | straightforward application, there are
some options that are available to us
| | 00:08 | that we can customize to better improve
our own personal workflow depending on
| | 00:13 | the type of recording that
you're going to be doing.
| | 00:16 | Now all the options that we are going
to be looking at can be found here inside
| | 00:20 | the Tools menu under Options.
| | 00:21 | When the Options window opens up
we'll begin here on the General tab.
| | 00:28 | The first things we can customize
is whether or not we want to see any
| | 00:31 | tooltips and whether or not we want
to see the warning when the recorder is
| | 00:35 | about to begin recording.
| | 00:37 | I like to have these two options
turned on, especially when I'm first getting
| | 00:41 | started doing some recordings.
| | 00:43 | After I've been recording for a while
though, I'll tend to go in and uncheck
| | 00:47 | these options, so I am not
distracted by any tooltips or any warnings.
| | 00:53 | The next section allows us to
control how content is going to be captured
| | 00:57 | whether or not we want to Capture
layered windows, meaning additional windows
| | 01:01 | that may not be the front most
window that we may be working with.
| | 01:05 | Whether or not we want to
Capture the keyboard input.
| | 01:08 | Whether or not we want to
Disable the screensaver during capture.
| | 01:12 | This is a really important one to turn
on unless you're trying to specifically
| | 01:15 | show the screensaver as part of your recording.
| | 01:18 | This way if you end up talking for a
few minutes and your screensaver is set
| | 01:23 | to automatically come on within that time
period, it won't interrupt your recording.
| | 01:28 | Now since we created a dedicated
recording account and we set the default theme
| | 01:34 | to not use Windows Aero theme, we don't
need to worry about checking this box.
| | 01:39 | However, if as part of your setup,
you were not able to create a dedicated
| | 01:43 | recording account this is a really
good option to turn on so that when you go
| | 01:48 | into your recording you don't see any
distractions from the Aero user interface.
| | 01:53 | Next, we are able to set the
default format that we want Camtasia to
| | 01:57 | record in. There's two options here,
camrec and .avi we'll talk about these in
| | 02:03 | more detail in a later movie.
| | 02:05 | For now, just realize that camrec
allows you to edit your content directly in
| | 02:10 | Camtasia Studio, whereas if you're
planning on editing your content in another
| | 02:15 | editing application, such as Adobe
Premiere, Final Cut Pro or an Avid Video
| | 02:20 | system, you may want to select
the .avi format as the default.
| | 02:26 | Next, let's go over to the Inputs tab,
here we can set the frame rate that we
| | 02:31 | want to capture our video recording at.
| | 02:34 | The default is set to 30 frames, which
if you're trying to capture video or a
| | 02:39 | lot of animations, you may want to go
ahead and leave this frame rate set to a
| | 02:42 | high level such as 30 frames.
| | 02:45 | The challenge here is that your video
files will end up being quite large if
| | 02:49 | you do this and for most of your Screen
capture work, it's not going to be necessary.
| | 02:56 | So for most of my work, I tend to
record and only 15 or even 10 frames per
| | 03:01 | second, that will greatly reduce the
file size of my video files and it's
| | 03:06 | still a high enough frame rate that I
won't lose any of the action that I'm
| | 03:10 | trying to capture on-screen.
| | 03:12 | One place that I do like to adjust my
settings though is down here in the Audio
| | 03:16 | section, under the Audio settings button.
| | 03:19 | The default setting is to record in the
Format of PCM and record at a rate of 22
| | 03:26 | kHz at 16-Bit Mono I like to have my
Audio captured at a much higher rate.
| | 03:32 | So let's go ahead and click the dropdown
menu here and scroll down until you
| | 03:36 | find 44.100 kHz 16-Bit Mono setting, go head
and select that and then click the OK button.
| | 03:45 | This will capture our audio at a much better rate.
| | 03:48 | The next tab allows us to set the
Hotkeys that we are going to be using to
| | 03:53 | control Camtasia Recorder during our recording.
| | 03:56 | The default settings for Record/Pause,
Stop, Marker, and so forth, can be
| | 04:02 | seen by simply clicking on the
listing for it and you'll see the keyboard
| | 04:05 | commands listed out here.
| | 04:08 | The default settings generally work
for most applications, but you may find
| | 04:12 | yourself in a situation where say the
F10 key is already used as part of your
| | 04:17 | application and you need
to choose a different key.
| | 04:21 | Many times you can simply add a
modifier key such as Ctrl or Ctrl and Shift at
| | 04:26 | the same time in order to
get around these limitations.
| | 04:30 | I am going to ahead click the Restore
defaults to accept the default Hotkey settings.
| | 04:36 | Finally, let's go head over to the Program tab.
| | 04:39 | Here are a couple of options for
controlling things like Forcing all of the pop-up
| | 04:44 | windows or dialog boxes
into a particular region.
| | 04:47 | Now this region is the area of
our screen that is being recorded.
| | 04:50 | This is a nice option to have turned
on, so that any time a pop-up does
| | 04:55 | show up and you're trying to capture that, it's
forced to appear inside of your recording area.
| | 05:01 | You can also check the box to Force
region to multiples of 4, if you selected a
| | 05:06 | custom screen size and you want to make
sure that the recorded area is going to
| | 05:10 | show up properly aligned to
the pixels on your screen.
| | 05:14 | Next, in the Workflow area you can
choose whether or not you want to have the
| | 05:18 | countdown timer to appear every
time before you start recording.
| | 05:22 | When you are first getting started
doing screen recording, it's a good idea to
| | 05:26 | go ahead and leave this countdown
timer on, that way it gives you a couple of
| | 05:31 | extra seconds to get yourself
ready to get into the recording.
| | 05:35 | However, after you have been doing your
screen recording for while, you may find
| | 05:39 | that you don't need that extra
little help and to speed up your recording
| | 05:43 | process, you can come in
here and uncheck this box.
| | 05:47 | I'm going to go ahead and leave this
option Set for now for the purposes of
| | 05:52 | the training video.
| | 05:53 | The next option is a really nice thing,
because you can pause the recording in
| | 05:58 | the middle of your recording using the
F9 key and go ahead and make some changes
| | 06:03 | on screen by having this next option set.
| | 06:06 | When you restart the recording again,
using the F9 key, your mouse will
| | 06:11 | automatically pop back to the
last location of the recording.
| | 06:15 | This will greatly help
during the editing process.
| | 06:19 | So you don't have what we like to
call mouse pops where the mouse magically
| | 06:23 | jumps from one spot of the
screen to another, during an edit.
| | 06:27 | Finally, if you're recording
multiple screencast one after another, after
| | 06:32 | another, and you're not going to be
doing any editing inside of Camtasia Studio
| | 06:36 | itself, in between times, it's a
good idea to check this box and set the
| | 06:41 | drop-down menu to save, so that at the
end of each recording you can simply name
| | 06:46 | your file and then go back in to
doing another recording right away.
| | 06:51 | Since we'll be going in and doing a
bunch of editing as part of this training,
| | 06:55 | I'm going to go ahead and leave this option
unchecked for right now, but just know that it's here.
| | 07:00 | The last option is set is under the
Minimize section, and this will dictate
| | 07:05 | where the recorder is minimized to.
| | 07:08 | The first option allows us to choose
whether or not we want the recorder
| | 07:12 | minimized during recording or not I always
like to have it set to If the recorder
| | 07:17 | will be recorded, go ahead and minimize it.
| | 07:21 | Now where you want it to be minimized is
either to the Taskbar or to the System tray.
| | 07:26 | I prefer having it Minimized down to
the System tray which will tend to hide it
| | 07:31 | over in the lower right-hand corner
and it will be less likely to be a
| | 07:35 | distraction to any of my learners when
I'm going in and switching applications
| | 07:39 | inside my Taskbar, because if the focus
of my mouse is on the Taskbar, then at
| | 07:44 | least the recorder will be over in the
System tray. With these setting changes
| | 07:49 | complete, we'll go heading click the
OK button and now Camtasia Recorder is
| | 07:54 | customized to our particular
workflow that we are going to be using.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Selecting a file format| 00:00 | Let's take a minute and talk about
the video formats that we can record in
| | 00:05 | with Camtasia Recorder.
| | 00:07 | I've got to Camtasia Recorder already
opened up and there are two places where
| | 00:12 | we can choose what file format we want to use.
| | 00:15 | The first place is we go into the Tools
menu and select Options on the General
| | 00:21 | tab you'll find the Saving section
that allows us to choose whether or not we
| | 00:26 | want the .camrec or the .avi format.
| | 00:29 | You may be wondering what is a CAMREC
file? A CAMREC file is the default file
| | 00:35 | type that's created as part of Camtasia
Recorder. The CAMREC file includes the
| | 00:42 | AVI and some additional information
that can be captured by Camtasia Recorder.
| | 00:48 | And it's the primary file format that
you'll use if you are going to be doing
| | 00:52 | your editing inside of the
Camtasia Studio application.
| | 00:56 | If you are going to be doing your
editing in another application, such as Adobe
| | 00:59 | Premiere, Avid or even Final Cut Pro,
you may want to go ahead and select the
| | 01:05 | AVI format here inside of the Options
window, so that your workflow will be
| | 01:10 | sped up that much more and you don't
have to worry about an additional place in
| | 01:15 | order to change the format.
| | 01:17 | Other video applications other than
Camtasia Studio are not able to open
| | 01:22 | CAMREC files by default.
| | 01:24 | You can extract the AVI file out of
a CAMREC file if you need to, but that's
| | 01:29 | outside of the scope of this course.
| | 01:31 | We'll go ahead and leave this option by
default set to the .camrec file format.
| | 01:37 | We'll close the window in order to
choose the type of file that you want to save.
| | 01:42 | Let's go ahead and do a quick recording;
| | 01:44 | we'll go ahead and press the Record
button, we'll get our warning, we'll get our
| | 01:48 | countdown, and after a few seconds of
recording we'll simply press the F10 key to
| | 01:55 | get into the Preview stage
of our recording process.
| | 01:59 | (audio playing) Over in the Save and
Edit option, if you simply click Save and
| | 02:04 | Edit, you're going to be prompted to
save your file as the CAMREC format.
| | 02:09 | But at this point if you decide that
you still want to edit your file in
| | 02:13 | another application, all you need to
do is click the small dropdown menu at
| | 02:17 | the bottom, click Save As, and then you
can click the dropdown menu in Save As
| | 02:22 | type and choose whether or not you
want to still save your file as a .camrec
| | 02:27 | file or as an .avi.
| | 02:29 | If in the Options section of the
recorder you set the default file type to be
| | 02:36 | AVI, you'll only have the .avi
format here as an option, you'll no longer
| | 02:41 | have the .camrec format.
| | 02:43 | So to have the maximum amount of
flexibility in your file saving formats, go
| | 02:49 | ahead and always leave your recorder set
to CAMREC, unless you know you are only
| | 02:53 | going to be editing in another application.
| | 02:55 | We'll go ahead and Cancel this and we
can delete this temporary recording.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Choosing the screen area| 00:00 | Let's have a look at some of the
options that are available to us in
| | 00:03 | selecting the specific area of our screen that
we want to capture as part of Camtasia Recorder.
| | 00:09 | If you're following along, I've
got my Firefox web browser open to
| | 00:12 | explorecalifornia.org's Web site.
| | 00:15 | Next, let's go ahead and launch
Camtasia Recorder and make sure you've got Full
| | 00:22 | screen capture selected by simply
clicking on the button that says Full screen.
| | 00:26 | You can tell you're in the Full screen
mode by two ways, first of all is to look
| | 00:31 | just below the button, you will see a
small indicator light letting you know
| | 00:34 | that this is the option that's selected.
| | 00:37 | The second way that you know you're in
Full screen mode is by looking at the
| | 00:40 | dashed green line that completely
encompasses your entire monitor this is the
| | 00:46 | area of the screen that
Camtasia Recorder is going to capture.
| | 00:49 | If you'd like to select a custom
area of the screen, we can click on the
| | 00:53 | dropdown menu, next to the Custom
button and Select an area to record.
| | 00:58 | When this option is selected, our mouse
changes to a Selection tool and we get a
| | 01:04 | preview of the pixel by pixel
movement of our mouse on screen.
| | 01:09 | That way when we move our mouse up to
the upper-left corner of the browser
| | 01:13 | window and then click and drag a
selection we can get exactly the selection of
| | 01:19 | the screen that we want to capture.
| | 01:21 | You also noticed that in the middle of
this selection area you can see the pixel
| | 01:26 | dimensions of that selection that we've made.
| | 01:28 | And you'll also see that custom
highlight in the lower right-hand corner
| | 01:32 | indicating the exact pixels that we have
selected. To accept our selection all
| | 01:37 | we need to do is let go of the
mouse and now we have a Custom area of our
| | 01:41 | screen that's been selected.
| | 01:43 | If we want to go back and adjust that
selection, we can now simply grab any of
| | 01:47 | the selection handles on the
selection and drag them to a new position.
| | 01:52 | If you want to move the selected area,
you can move into the middle of the
| | 01:56 | selected area where the crosshairs icon
is and click and drag to reposition your
| | 02:02 | selection to a new location.
| | 02:04 | If when you're doing your recording,
you want to make sure that your recording
| | 02:08 | is set in a particular aspect ratio
you can click the dropdown menu next to
| | 02:13 | Custom and choose any of the
formats, such as Widescreen or Standard.
| | 02:19 | I'll go ahead and select a
Widescreen format of 854 x 480.
| | 02:25 | Now I know my selection is in the
Widescreen format that's going to match many
| | 02:30 | of the other files that I may be working with.
| | 02:33 | However, I'm not getting all of the screen area.
| | 02:35 | Next to the Dimensions area of
Camtasia Recorder, there is a small icon that
| | 02:41 | shows that the dimensions
are currently not linked.
| | 02:44 | If we click on that icon, we
can link the dimensions together.
| | 02:48 | So if we resize our selection, we
can see that our selection aspect ratio
| | 02:53 | remains constant, even though we may
be changing the specific selection area.
| | 02:59 | Once again, we can reposition our
selection to try and capture as much of our
| | 03:04 | browser window as we can.
| | 03:07 | However, our browser window is right now
set so that some of the area is falling
| | 03:12 | outside of our selected area, but we
don't want to change the Aspect Ratio.
| | 03:17 | Camtasia has a nice tool
for handling this as well.
| | 03:20 | If we click the dropdown menu one
more time, this time we can select Lock to
| | 03:25 | application, our Aspect Ratio and our
size that we've selected remains constant
| | 03:31 | and the application now snaps directly
inside of that selection area, ensuring
| | 03:36 | that we get a nice clean capture of the
application in the specific aspect ratio
| | 03:41 | that we are looking for.
| | 03:43 | Now sometimes making these Custom
selections is going to be exactly the right
| | 03:47 | thing you need to do in order to
capture a particular area of the screen.
| | 03:51 | However, most of the time you're going
to be recording in the Full screen mode
| | 03:55 | and you'll have your application set
out to Full screen mode as well, so that
| | 04:00 | you're capturing your entire
screen and the entire application.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Capturing audio| 00:00 | Let's take a minute and look at the
Audio capture settings that are available
| | 00:04 | inside of Camtasia Recorder.
| | 00:07 | Now in a previous movie we've already
gone through and set up and calibrated
| | 00:12 | our microphone, and if you skipped that
movie, I would encourage you to go back to
| | 00:17 | the Getting Started chapter and watch the
movies on setting up and calibrating your microphone.
| | 00:22 | It's such a crucial step that so many
people skip over when they're doing their
| | 00:27 | screen casting, and getting good
quality audio is really going to take your
| | 00:31 | videos to the next level.
| | 00:33 | With that said there are a couple of
options that we need to make sure that we
| | 00:37 | always check and set before we
go ahead and do our recording.
| | 00:43 | And we access those options by
clicking the dropdown menu next to the Audio
| | 00:48 | option inside of Camtasia Recorder.
| | 00:51 | The top section of this menu allows us
to select the specific microphone that
| | 00:56 | we're going to be using
as part of our recording.
| | 00:58 | And you may think, well, I just set
that when I was doing my calibration.
| | 01:01 | Yeah, but you may have gotten up and
walked away or you may be using your laptop
| | 01:06 | and you've closed the laptop, you've
gone to a new location, you've opened it
| | 01:09 | back up, and your Audio Input
settings may have gotten changed on you.
| | 01:14 | So it's a good idea to just take a
second and check and make sure that the
| | 01:18 | microphone that you're planning on
using to record with is the one that's
| | 01:21 | actually picking up the audio that's
going to be laid down on your audio track.
| | 01:26 | Sometimes when you're doing a recording
you don't want to capture any audio at
| | 01:30 | all and rather than sitting there
silent while you're going through your
| | 01:34 | training, you can simply
select the option for Audio off.
| | 01:38 | That way no audio will be captured and
your videos file size will be that much
| | 01:43 | smaller and easier to manage.
| | 01:45 | Let's go ahead and click the
dropdown menu and reselect our Microphone.
| | 01:51 | Then we'll go back into this setting,
we can choose whether or not we want to
| | 01:54 | Record system audio.
| | 01:57 | Sometimes when you're doing a recording
you don't want to have any of the sounds
| | 02:01 | that are going to be produced by an
application or by Windows to be captured at
| | 02:05 | all in your audio recording.
| | 02:06 | However, there are a lot of times when
you do want to have that audio captured.
| | 02:10 | So simply click on Record system
audio and then click the dropdown menu again
| | 02:15 | and make sure that there's a checkbox
next to Record system audio in order to
| | 02:20 | make sure you capture that
as part of your recording.
| | 02:22 | Finally, we can make one quick check
by clicking on Options and opening up
| | 02:27 | the Tools Options window to verify that
our Audio capture settings are set correctly.
| | 02:33 | Previously we set our Format to PCM and the
specific bit rate to 44.100 kHz 16-Bit Mono.
| | 02:43 | If you didn't make that setting before
go ahead and change the dropdown menu
| | 02:46 | here now, selecting this
option and then click OK.
| | 02:51 | That way your audio will be captured at a
nice high bit-rate and it will sound great.
| | 02:56 | Go ahead and click the OK
button to accept that change.
| | 03:01 | Now our audio is all set up, we've
calibrated our microphone and we're ready
| | 03:06 | for our next step.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a screen recording| 00:00 | In this movie I want to step through the
entire recording process from start to finish so
| | 00:05 | that you really get a feel for the entire process
that it takes to record a good quality screencast.
| | 00:11 | In this case we're going to be teaching our
learners about using the Tabs feature of the
| | 00:15 | Firefox web browser.
| | 00:17 | So I've got my Firefox browser opened up
and I'm at the explorecalifornia.org Web site.
| | 00:23 | To finish our setup, we'll need to scroll down
in the page a little bit, hold down the Ctrl+Shift
| | 00:29 | key on your keyboard,
and click on the link for Explorers.
| | 00:33 | That should open up that link in a new tab.
| | 00:36 | We'll go ahead and click Back on our Home
page and scroll back up to the top of the page.
| | 00:41 | Now we have both of our tabs set up and
they're both scrolled up to the proper spot.
| | 00:47 | The last setup that we need to do with our
browser is to maximize the view, so we'll
| | 00:52 | click the Maximize button in the upper right-
hand corner and now our browser is completely set up
| | 00:57 | and ready for us to record.
| | 00:59 | If you're following along, I've included a
file called Tabs in the Chapter 02 Exercise
| | 01:04 | Files which is the script that I'll
be using as part of the recording.
| | 01:09 | So you're welcome to follow along and
practice doing a full recording along with me.
| | 01:14 | Next, we'll go ahead and
launch our Camtasia Recorder.
| | 01:22 | When the Camtasia Recorder opens
up we'll do our final preflight.
| | 01:27 | This will include clicking on the button for
full screen to make sure that we're recording
| | 01:31 | the entire screen; we'll check and make
sure that our Webcam is turned off; we'll do a
| | 01:36 | quick check of our Audio.
| | 01:38 | We'll click the dropdown menu for our audio,
we'll see that our proper Microphone is set
| | 01:43 | as the recording microphone, and we'll
uncheck the box for Record system audio.
| | 01:48 | Since we've made a change, I'll go ahead
and click the dropdown menu one more time and
| | 01:52 | verify that that setting took.
| | 01:54 | We've previously calibrated our microphone
and we know that our audio levels are set
| | 01:58 | correctly and we've checked the distance from our
mic to make sure that everything is set ready to go.
| | 02:03 | All right, when we press the Record button
we'll get our warning letting us know that
| | 02:08 | the F10 key is the key to stop our
recording and we'll get our countdown.
| | 02:13 | I'll give a couple of seconds of silence
before I begin speaking, and then I'll just walk
| | 02:19 | through the recording process.
| | 02:21 | If I make any mistakes, you're going to see
the mistakes that I make, and we'll go ahead
| | 02:25 | and we'll clean those up in the
editing process at a later time.
| | 02:29 | So let's get started.
| | 02:31 | Press the Record button, here is our F10
warning, and our countdown, and we're ready to go.
| | 02:41 | In this movie we're going to explore
working with tabs in the Firefox web browser.
| | 02:47 | Tabs allow us to have multiple
web pages open at the same time.
| | 02:53 | And easily click back and
forth between the pages.
| | 03:00 | To open a new tab in your browser simply go
up to the File menu and select New Tab from
| | 03:07 | the dropdown menu.
| | 03:09 | A new tab is automatically
created for us and is selected.
| | 03:14 | To close a tab, click the X on
the right-hand side of the tab.
| | 03:20 | If you want to open a link in a new tab, all
you need to do is hold down the Ctrl key and
| | 03:27 | Shift key on your keyboard at the
same time while you click on a link.
| | 03:32 | Firefox will then automatically create a new
tab and load the linked page for you in that
| | 03:40 | tab, enabling you to keep
your current web page open.
| | 03:44 | By learning to master the tabs feature of
the Firefox web browser you will become a
| | 03:49 | much more efficient online researcher.
| | 03:55 | Press the F10 key on your
keyboard to stop recording.
| | 04:03 | (audio playing)
| | 04:06 | We can review our video if
we want at this point.
| | 04:09 | Everything is looking pretty good, and I'm
confident we got all the content that we needed.
| | 04:14 | Next, we'll go ahead and save this recording
and open it up in our Camtasia Studio editor.
| | 04:21 | To do this simply click
the Save and Edit button.
| | 04:25 | We're taken to a standard Save dialog box.
| | 04:29 | It's a good idea to keep your projects
organized by keeping them in a folder.
| | 04:33 | So I'll go ahead and click the New folder button,
and I'm going to name this folder Tabs Project.
| | 04:39 | Then I'll double-click on the Tabs Project
folder to go into the folder, then I'll change
| | 04:45 | the name of my File to be tabs.camrec.
| | 04:49 | Now a CAMREC file is the Camtasia Recorded file,
this is the file that's going to contain our video.
| | 04:56 | So we'll go ahead and we'll click the Save
button, Camtasia Studio then automatically
| | 05:05 | opens up and we're asked what
size we want our video to be.
| | 05:11 | I'll click the dropdown menu here
to look at some of my options.
| | 05:16 | I'll see that the default automatic setting of 854 x
480 is a really good choice for us for this video.
| | 05:23 | It's going to be appropriately sized to
distribute on the web and is going to be smaller
| | 05:27 | than our original size recording.
| | 05:30 | That way we'll be able to take advantage of
some of the additional features inside of
| | 05:33 | Camtasia Recorder.
| | 05:35 | With that option selected I'm going to make
sure that Keep aspect ratio is also checked
| | 05:40 | and then click the OK button.
| | 05:43 | Our Camtasia project is now created for us.
| | 05:47 | This is a great time to go ahead and save
the project so that we can continue working
| | 05:52 | on it at a later time.
| | 05:54 | To save the project, all we need to do is go
up to the File menu and select Save project.
| | 06:00 | We'll navigate to our Tabs
Project folder and open up that folder.
| | 06:07 | We'll then save our CAMPROJ file in that
location, and we'll name the file tabs.camproj.
| | 06:17 | Now a CAMPROJ file is the Camtasia Studio
project file that's going to be referencing
| | 06:24 | the CAMREC file that we
just saved and recorded.
| | 06:28 | The CAMREC file is containing the video; the
CAMPROJ file is containing all of our edits
| | 06:33 | and additional media that we may add.
| | 06:36 | So we'll go ahead and click the Save button
and we're given a warning that if we want
| | 06:40 | to share our video we're going
to need to produce our project.
| | 06:44 | We'll cover that in a later movie.
| | 06:46 | For now we'll go ahead and click the OK button,
and our project is fully created and ready to go.
| | 06:54 | Having a quick glance at our project, we
can see that the audio levels on our file are
| | 06:59 | showing up at the right level, so we got a
really good recording and in a later movie
| | 07:04 | we'll go through and we'll edit
this file and we'll clean it up.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Keys to a Successful RecordingPreparing to record| 00:00 | When you're preparing to record a
screencast, there's no one right or wrong way
| | 00:05 | in order to prepare.
| | 00:06 | It's really going to depend
on your particular situation.
| | 00:10 | In this movie we'll step through a
couple of the different methods that you can
| | 00:14 | use that may help you improve
the quality of your screencast.
| | 00:18 | Now the most basic way to prepare is to
simply open up the application that you
| | 00:23 | may be showing on screen that you want
to record and to simply step through each
| | 00:27 | of the different menu items and
different processes that you're going to be
| | 00:32 | using throughout the training.
| | 00:33 | Make sure that you're familiar with where
all of the items are and what they're called.
| | 00:38 | Everything on your screen has a
specific name, so make sure you learn what the
| | 00:43 | name of each of the different items are that
you're going to click on and how to describe them.
| | 00:47 | The next level of preparation that you
may want to do is to go ahead and draft
| | 00:52 | out all formal table of contents.
| | 00:54 | In this case, if I was recording a
series of movies about how to Master Web
| | 00:59 | Research, I may have one
particular movie called Working with Tabs.
| | 01:03 | This way we'll have a better idea as to
how our particular movie fits into the
| | 01:08 | overall context of the entire work.
| | 01:12 | Once you have an idea as to how your
movie fits into the overall project
| | 01:16 | that you may be recording for, the
next step would be to draft an outline of
| | 01:21 | your particular movie.
| | 01:23 | Now this is my favorite way to work.
| | 01:25 | When I prepare to record a movie,
I'll typically script out the first and
| | 01:29 | the last line that I'm going to use
as part of the movie and then create
| | 01:33 | bullet points in between for each of the key
points that I want to hit during the movie.
| | 01:39 | By doing this, I'm able to get myself
started in the movie and then I can hit
| | 01:43 | all of the key points that I need to,
and by having the last line scripted, I
| | 01:48 | know where I'm trying to get to, and I
know how to get myself out of the movie.
| | 01:52 | Sometimes there's simply no
substitute for fully scripting out your movie.
| | 01:57 | To do this, all you need to do is to
open up your favorite text editor and
| | 02:02 | simply type out all of the things
that you're going to say in the movie.
| | 02:05 | Here is a good tip for you.
| | 02:07 | Make sure you blow the font up to a
higher point size, say that 18 points and
| | 02:12 | print out your document.
| | 02:14 | That way you can easily shift your
eyes between your computer screen and your
| | 02:18 | script that may be printed out
on a copy stand in front of you.
| | 02:23 | For some projects, you need to go all
the way to drafting out a formal script
| | 02:28 | where you identify specific objectives,
how you're going to set up the movie and
| | 02:33 | then all of the actions that
accompany each line of text that you may be
| | 02:37 | recording throughout the movie.
| | 02:39 | On some projects it's necessary
to go to this level of detail.
| | 02:44 | It's a good idea to go through the
entire movie from start to finish at
| | 02:48 | least once--if not two or three times--
before you press the record button,
| | 02:53 | that way you get comfortable working
through all the different aspects of
| | 02:57 | the flow of your movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up a target application| 00:00 | Before you begin recording, it's always
a good idea to take a few minutes to go
| | 00:05 | ahead and step through whatever the
application, program, or tool that you're
| | 00:09 | going to be recording on-screen and make sure
that it's properly set up for your recording.
| | 00:15 | Now your screen is not
going to look exactly like mine.
| | 00:19 | All I want to show you in this movie
is the process which would go through in
| | 00:23 | order to customize your particular application.
| | 00:25 | Let's say we are going to record our
movie about how to use various different
| | 00:29 | tabs inside of our browser.
| | 00:31 | Well, if we look at my browser the way
that I've got it set up right now, there
| | 00:35 | is a lot of extra
information that we don't need.
| | 00:37 | First and foremost is the Bookmarks sidebar.
| | 00:40 | It's not something that's going to be
important for me to use inside of the training.
| | 00:43 | So I'm going to go head and close that sidebar.
| | 00:46 | Next, as we look around the top of
our browser we can see that I've got an
| | 00:49 | extra tab open from another session when I was
looking at the lynda.com online training library.
| | 00:55 | Now while that's a great website, it's
not something that's going to be relevant
| | 00:58 | to the particular topic that I'm training on.
| | 01:00 | So I'll go head and close that tab
by clicking the small X to the right-hand
| | 01:04 | side of the tab.
| | 01:06 | While we're looking at the top of our
browser, we will also notice that we still
| | 01:10 | have a toolbar that's open,
that's also not needed.
| | 01:12 | So I'll go up here to the View menu,
go down to Toolbars, and then select the
| | 01:17 | Bookmarks Toolbar to hide that out of our way.
| | 01:20 | We'll notice that over here on the
right-hand side in our Search bar, we have a
| | 01:24 | previous search that we were
conducting inside of our browser window.
| | 01:27 | We'll go ahead and clear that out by
clicking and dragging over top of the
| | 01:30 | search and then pressing the delete
key on our keyboard to clean that up.
| | 01:34 | The next thing to look at is, we have this
other window that's open over on the side.
| | 01:38 | When I click on that, I can see that
it's the Downloads window that's part of my
| | 01:42 | browser and I have a previous file
that I downloaded inside of my window.
| | 01:47 | That's something that's not needed to be
seen and if we go to download a file as
| | 01:51 | part of our movie, it would be
something that may distract our users.
| | 01:54 | So before closing the window, I'll
go head and clear the list of clicking
| | 01:58 | the Clear List button at the bottom
and now that the Downloads window is
| | 02:02 | cleared out, I'll go ahead and close that
window altogether by clicking the Close button.
| | 02:06 | Next, we'll take a second to look at the
page that we have loaded up in our application.
| | 02:12 | In this case I'll go ahead and start
scrolling down in my page and when I get
| | 02:16 | down to the featured Ojai Olive Oil
Company movie, I can see that the movie has
| | 02:20 | been previously played, and the
playhead has not been reset back to the
| | 02:24 | beginning of the movie.
| | 02:25 | Now if I'm recording this movie and I
want the playhead to be set here for when
| | 02:30 | I scroll down to the page, then I would go
ahead and move the playhead to this location.
| | 02:35 | But in this case I want the movie to be
able to start back at the beginning and
| | 02:38 | I don't want to have to fumble with
that while I'm doing the recording.
| | 02:41 | So I'll simply go ahead and either
grab the playhead and drag it back to
| | 02:45 | the left-hand side.
| | 02:46 | Or I'll click the Rewind button and
move my playhead all the way back to
| | 02:50 | the very beginning.
| | 02:51 | Now that my browser is set up, I'll go ahead
and scroll back up to the top of the page.
| | 02:55 | Things are starting to look much
better in my page, but one more thing that I
| | 02:59 | want to do: I want to make sure that my
users are able to focus entirely on the
| | 03:03 | content that I'm presenting.
| | 03:04 | So I don't need to have my Desktop in
the background and I might as well go
| | 03:08 | ahead and set my browser
window to be Full screen.
| | 03:12 | Now this choice is something that's
really going to depend on whether or not the
| | 03:15 | content that you're presenting is going
to be relevant to have the focus just on
| | 03:20 | the browser window, or if you're going
to be using files may be on your Desktop
| | 03:24 | or dragging files in or out of
whatever application that are you using.
| | 03:27 | So these are just some of the
considerations that you're going to want to step through.
| | 03:32 | Make sure that everything set up on
screen has a purpose to be there, and if it
| | 03:36 | doesn't have a purpose,
go ahead and get rid of it.
| | 03:38 | So your users are able to focus
specifically on the content that
| | 03:41 | you're presenting.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Managing mouse movements| 00:00 | One of the best things that you can do
in order to improve the overall quality
| | 00:04 | of your screen recording is to
learn how to properly manage your mouse.
| | 00:08 | You may think, "You know, I
use a mouse every single day.
| | 00:12 | What do I need to learn about managing my mouse?"
| | 00:14 | Well, there are a couple of things.
| | 00:16 | First of all is to make sure
that you're using the correct mouse.
| | 00:20 | Many of us these days are using our
laptops for more and more of our daily work,
| | 00:24 | which by default means that many of us
are using our trackpad to do all of our
| | 00:28 | mouse movements with.
| | 00:29 | And while this is a great way to work,
it's not necessarily always the best way
| | 00:34 | to record a screencast with.
| | 00:36 | So what I'd like to do is make sure
that I plug-in a good quality USB mouse and
| | 00:41 | pair that with a nice mouse pad.
| | 00:44 | The combination of a good quality
mouse and mouse pad will greatly improve
| | 00:49 | the smoothness of the movements of your
mouse as you're dragging it around on-screen.
| | 00:54 | It will also give you a little bit more
control over your mouse, than what you
| | 00:58 | typically have when using a trackpad.
| | 01:00 | Once you have your mouse set up, the next
thing you want to do is go down to your
| | 01:04 | Start menu, go over to Control Panel,
and make sure that in your Mouse control
| | 01:09 | panel everything is set up for your mouse
movements, the way that you like to work.
| | 01:13 | For instance, you may want to come up
and click on the Pointers tab and check
| | 01:17 | the Scheme that you're using.
| | 01:19 | And make sure it's the scheme that's
appropriate for the type of recording that
| | 01:23 | you're going to be doing.
| | 01:24 | In my case, I'm going to go ahead
and use the Windows Aero system scheme,
| | 01:29 | because it's going to give me
a nice standard looking mouse.
| | 01:32 | Depending on the type of recording that you're
doing, you might want to choose a different theme.
| | 01:35 | The next option I like to
set is under Pointer Options.
| | 01:38 | I want to make sure that my
pointer speed is set to something that's
| | 01:42 | appropriate on-screen.
| | 01:43 | When I'm working on my computer, I'll
typically have my pointer speed set to a
| | 01:47 | much faster rate, so that I'm able to
quickly move my mouse around on-screen in
| | 01:52 | order to get my work done.
| | 01:53 | However, when I'm doing a screen
recording, that rapid movement may not be
| | 01:57 | appropriate to get a learner to see
all the specific steps that I'm doing.
| | 02:01 | Likewise if I have my mouse set down
to Slow then my mouse movement often
| | 02:06 | times looks very lethargic, and it can
give a sense that the movie is tending
| | 02:09 | to drag a little bit.
| | 02:11 | So I found that the setting that works
best for me when I'm driving the mouse is
| | 02:15 | to have a setting that's
approximately in the middle of these two speeds.
| | 02:19 | Another thing to check is that
Visibility Display pointertrails is turned off.
| | 02:24 | If this item is selected and you move
your mouse, you'll end up getting this
| | 02:29 | trailing of mouse cursors
that will appear on-screen.
| | 02:33 | It's very distracting to be able to
see and once you have that recorded on
| | 02:37 | screen, there's no way
to really get rid of that.
| | 02:39 | So I'll go ahead and uncheck that box.
| | 02:41 | If you've made any other changes, go
ahead and click the Apply button and then
| | 02:45 | click the OK button, when you're
satisfied that all of your settings are the way
| | 02:49 | that you like to use your mouse.
| | 02:50 | We'll go ahead and close the
Control Panel window as well.
| | 02:53 | The next thing to focus on when you're
learning about your mouse movements is to
| | 02:57 | make sure that you practice making all
of the movements that you're going to be
| | 03:02 | making in your movie.
| | 03:03 | For instance, if in our movie we need
to go up to the View menu and go down
| | 03:07 | to Toolbars and select the Bookmarks
Toolbar to turn it on, we will want to
| | 03:12 | make sure that we can step through
that process several times, including,
| | 03:16 | going up and stepping through, to
make sure we know where we need our mouse
| | 03:20 | at each different location.
| | 03:22 | What you'll find when you go through
doing this is that there will be places
| | 03:26 | where you may be moving your mouse in
a spot that could cover up a particular
| | 03:30 | word or if you move your mouse over, it
may not highlight the item that you're
| | 03:34 | looking for properly.
| | 03:36 | So you want to make sure you
practice to know exactly where you want your
| | 03:40 | mouse to fall each time you click on
a menu and you want a submenu or some
| | 03:44 | other item to appear.
| | 03:47 | Now what happens if you make a mistake?
| | 03:49 | Let's say you're moving your mouse up
here to click on the File menu and you
| | 03:53 | move your mouse down to say Open File,
but instead, you say something else.
| | 03:58 | Well, the best thing to do in this case
is if you've gotten the mouse movement
| | 04:02 | correctly, go ahead and simply let go
of the mouse, pause, back up, and go
| | 04:08 | ahead and give the line again.
| | 04:09 | That way your mouse movement on-screen
as it's recording can be nice and smooth,
| | 04:15 | whereas, if you were to try and move the
mouse away and then go back, you're going
| | 04:19 | to have to figure out how to match your
screen, so that the mouse movement looks
| | 04:23 | smooth from one part of your movie to another.
| | 04:26 | Another tip that you can use is if you
can't get your mouse to appear back on-screen
| | 04:30 | to the same location before you
made your error, go ahead and move your
| | 04:34 | mouse off to the edge of your screen so
it disappears, pause, and then when you
| | 04:39 | begin to speak again, slowly
move your mouse back into the frame.
| | 04:44 | Now you don't necessarily always need
to move your mouse to the same location,
| | 04:48 | but it tends to be less distracting for
a user if they see the mouse moving in
| | 04:53 | from outside of the screen and back in,
rather than seeing an edit where the
| | 04:57 | mouse pops around from one location to another.
| | 05:01 | Another good tip for you about using
your mouse is to make sure that if you have
| | 05:05 | a window open and you grab the window
and you move it to a new location on-screen,
| | 05:09 | move it to that
location and park it there.
| | 05:12 | Don't pick the window up and constantly
move it back and forth and all over the place.
| | 05:17 | It'll make your life much harder when
you're trying to edit, because if you make
| | 05:20 | a mistake and you have to go back and
make an adjustment, your window location
| | 05:25 | may not be the same spot, and then
you're going to have a much harder time
| | 05:29 | getting your movie to
look like a finished product.
| | 05:32 | Also, don't grab your window and
shake it back and forth and talk with the
| | 05:36 | window as you're dragging it around.
| | 05:38 | It becomes very distracting to the user.
| | 05:40 | Likewise, don't simply move your
mouse around and shake it back and forth
| | 05:45 | while you're talking, so that it looks like
your mouse is just dancing around on-screen.
| | 05:49 | Instead, simply let go off
your mouse while you're talking.
| | 05:52 | That way the mouse pointer will
park on-screen and it will be less
| | 05:56 | distracting to your users.
| | 05:57 | By learning to manage your mouse
movements, you will greatly improve the overall
| | 06:02 | quality of your screen recordings and
make your final presentation much cleaner
| | 06:07 | for your users to be able to follow.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Handling mistakes| 00:00 | We all make mistakes, but by following
a few simple rules during our recording,
| | 00:05 | we can make it relatively easy to
fix those mistakes and end up with a
| | 00:08 | professional looking and sounding screencast.
| | 00:11 | The first thing you should always do
before even starting to record is to make
| | 00:16 | sure that you have a clean starting
state for your document, so that if you
| | 00:20 | need to start over, you can quickly and easily
get back to the starting state for your document.
| | 00:26 | For instance, I'll typically go into
my Documents folder, right-click, select
| | 00:31 | New and then Folder to create a
New Folder called Backup Documents.
| | 00:38 | I will then navigate on my hard drive to
the location of the file that I'm going
| | 00:42 | to be using as part of the training.
| | 00:44 | I'll then right-click on the document,
select Copy, close that window, then go
| | 00:50 | into my Backup Documents folder, right-
click and select Paste, to paste a clean
| | 00:55 | copy of my document in here.
| | 00:57 | Now if I make a mistake during the
recording and I need to start over, I can
| | 01:02 | quickly and easily get back to the
starting state for this document.
| | 01:05 | The next and perhaps most important
rule is that when you're recording, if
| | 01:10 | you make a simple mistake in what you're
saying, simply pause, and let go of the mouse.
| | 01:15 | Take a second to gather your thoughts and
back up in your script a few words or lines.
| | 01:20 | Take a deep breath and then simply start again.
| | 01:23 | Use the mouse movement tricks we
discussed in the last movie if need be.
| | 01:27 | By taking a second to pause and backup,
you'll give yourself a second to relax
| | 01:32 | and clearly think about the
line before you give it again.
| | 01:36 | By backing up a few words or lines,
you'll give yourself more options for where
| | 01:41 | to make an edit between the first take and
any additional takes that you need to make.
| | 01:46 | Another benefit to this method is
that by taking a second to pause before
| | 01:51 | continuing, you'll give yourself a
visual cue in the recording that will be
| | 01:55 | clearly visible in the audio
waveform of the recorded track.
| | 01:59 | For instance, I have the tabs.camproj
file open and if I click the zoom in
| | 02:05 | magnifying glass on my timeline a few
times, you can clearly see in the waveform
| | 02:11 | at the bottom, places where
I've paused during the recording.
| | 02:15 | More than likely there's a mistake
right here that I know I need to go in and
| | 02:19 | make some edits for.
| | 02:20 | We'll look at using this
visual cue in a later movie.
| | 02:23 | Another way to give yourself a visual
cue during the editing process is to pause
| | 02:28 | and say something like Rephrase, Edit or Oops!
| | 02:32 | pause again, and then give the line correctly.
| | 02:36 | Again, this will be clearly visible in
the audio waveform when you're editing
| | 02:40 | and by adding the audio cue, you'll be
much less likely to miss that mistake
| | 02:46 | during the editing process later on.
| | 02:48 | Sometimes you may need to pause for longer
than just a few seconds after making a mistake.
| | 02:53 | Camtasia Recorder makes this very easy
for you to do by simply pressing the F9
| | 02:59 | key on your keyboard to pause the recording.
| | 03:02 | You can then take the few seconds, re-
gather your thoughts, prepare for your
| | 03:07 | next line, and then when you're ready
to continue recording, go ahead and press
| | 03:11 | the F9 key on your keyboard and
your recording will continue.
| | 03:15 | Occasionally, a mistake is bad enough
that it will be easier to simply stop the
| | 03:19 | movie and start over again.
| | 03:21 | But don't just cancel the recording,
click the Save As button and save the
| | 03:27 | recording with a name such as tabs-bad take.
| | 03:32 | So you can go back and see exactly
how your screen was set up at the
| | 03:36 | beginning of your movie.
| | 03:38 | You may need to go back and reset your
application, Preferences, Tools or other
| | 03:43 | options to a previous state.
| | 03:45 | And that reference movie may
prove invaluable if you're recording a
| | 03:48 | complex application.
| | 03:50 | These are just a few tips
for dealing with mistakes.
| | 03:53 | But if you follow these general
rules, you'll be able to deal with the
| | 03:56 | inevitable mistakes when they
happen much more effectively.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Inviting students to learn| 00:00 | When you're recording an instructional
screencast, how you speak to your learners
| | 00:04 | is just as important as
what you're teaching them.
| | 00:07 | In most recording situations, you will
not be recording your screencast while in
| | 00:11 | front of your audience.
| | 00:13 | In fact, it's very likely that you'll
never even see the vast majority of the
| | 00:17 | learners who will watch your video.
| | 00:19 | Therefore, it's vitally important that you're
imagining that you're speaking to a real person.
| | 00:25 | Speak to that person as if you're
looking over there shoulder, guiding and
| | 00:29 | inviting them to take the
actions that you're doing on screen.
| | 00:32 | This is easier said than done for some of us.
| | 00:35 | Many people are great at teaching when
they're in front of a class and have the
| | 00:39 | visual feedback of their audience, but
have a difficult time sounding natural,
| | 00:44 | when they're recording a screencast.
| | 00:46 | Some of the tricks I've used with
authors have been to put a picture of a
| | 00:50 | person they're visualizing next to
their monitor, so they can talk more
| | 00:54 | directly to that person.
| | 00:55 | One author I worked with even set
up a couple of action figures next to
| | 01:00 | their monitor to talk to.
| | 01:02 | It may sound a bit crazy, but it
really helped them by having someone or
| | 01:07 | something in this case to talk to.
| | 01:09 | When speaking to your learner, it's
best to invite them to participate with
| | 01:13 | you, follow along with you and actively
engage in the same steps you are showing on screen.
| | 01:20 | Instead of saying things like "Watch me"
or "I do this, that or the other thing,"
| | 01:24 | try to get in a habit of giving
directions by saying "Move your mouse here, click
| | 01:29 | on this." It's phrases such as this that
invite your learner to participate and
| | 01:34 | it makes them feel like you're
speaking directly and personally to them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Focusing on content| 00:00 | We've already discussed the
importance of getting rid of extraneous user
| | 00:04 | interface elements and managing your
mouse movements in order to reduce visual
| | 00:08 | distractions in your movie.
| | 00:10 | In this movie, we're going to draw our
attention to the content--what you're
| | 00:13 | saying, doing and teaching--in order
to keep the focus of your movie on one
| | 00:18 | single concept, and by doing so
keeping your movie short and to the point.
| | 00:23 | So you may be wondering, is
there an ideal movie length for an
| | 00:26 | instructional screencast?
| | 00:28 | The answer is that there is probably no one
single number or formula for an ideal movie.
| | 00:34 | We can use the following rule of thumb though.
| | 00:36 | Target your movie to be between three
and nine minutes long with the sweet spot
| | 00:41 | in between five and seven minutes.
| | 00:44 | This generally gives you enough time
to thoroughly cover your subject matter,
| | 00:49 | but not lose your audience to distractions.
| | 00:51 | One of the biggest challenges you
will face when you begin creating your
| | 00:55 | instructional screencast is not going to
be figuring out what to say, but rather
| | 01:00 | figuring out what to leave out.
| | 01:02 | In other words, what is really
important for your viewers to know and what is
| | 01:07 | merely a distracting overload of information.
| | 01:10 | For example, let's say you're recording
a movie whose purpose is to teach your
| | 01:14 | users how to open a link in a new browser tab.
| | 01:18 | You probably don't need to begin this
movie by showing them how to go up to the
| | 01:22 | Tools menu, go down to Options, go
over to then Tabs menu and discuss all the
| | 01:27 | various different options
that are available for tabs.
| | 01:30 | Likewise, you also don't need to go to
the View menu, go down to the Toolbar
| | 01:35 | section and talk about how you can
rearrange the view of your tabs so that they
| | 01:39 | appear on the top of your browser
window rather than on the bottom.
| | 01:43 | All of that is extra extraneous
information that's not needed.
| | 01:47 | However, demonstrating how your users
could go up to the File menu and create a
| | 01:52 | new tab using the New Tab option in
the menu or using a keyboard command and
| | 01:58 | Ctrl+T on your keyboard to open up a new tab.
| | 02:01 | Or even going down and showing your
users how they could right click on a link
| | 02:06 | and select Open Link in New Tab
directly from the dropdown menu.
| | 02:10 | Those three items are all directly
related to the task at hand and thus would be
| | 02:15 | relevant, whereas, the other
information is just extraneous.
| | 02:18 | When laying out a movie, you will always
want to ask yourself, is this something
| | 02:22 | the user really must know in order
to master this particular concept?
| | 02:27 | Could this content be broken into
additional movies where each movie was more
| | 02:31 | focused on a single concept?
| | 02:33 | Is the information simply
interesting, but not essential?
| | 02:37 | If it's not essential, then cut it out,
or consider creating an additional movie
| | 02:42 | that focuses on that concept exclusively.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring SmartFocus| 00:00 | SmartFocus is a feature of the Camtasia Studio
that allows the program to automatically detect
| | 00:07 | specific areas of interest that you are
pointing out while you're doing your recording and
| | 00:12 | it will automatically zoom in
the screen to those areas.
| | 00:15 | In order to get SmartFocus to take effect,
you'll need to make sure that you're using
| | 00:19 | the Camtasia Recorder to record your screencast
and you save your files in the CAMREC
| | 00:24 | file format that we have been using thus far.
| | 00:27 | In this movie, I want to give you a couple
of tips that you can use in order to make
| | 00:32 | sure that your screen recordings will have the
best chance of having the SmartFocus applied to it.
| | 00:38 | The first thing you have to know is that you have to
make sure that your videos are longer than 30 seconds.
| | 00:44 | Any video shorter than 30 seconds will not
get a SmartFocus automatically applied to it.
| | 00:49 | The next place to focus is
how you move around on-screen.
| | 00:53 | Let me give you an example.
| | 00:54 | In this case, if we were going to show how to
open our browser, we begin by slowly moving
| | 00:58 | our mouse down here to our Taskbar,
and clicking one time on our Start menu.
| | 01:03 | We'll make sure that the menu clearly
appears and then we'll move up and park our mouse
| | 01:07 | in front of the
application that we want to open.
| | 01:09 | We'll then go ahead and click on the
application in order to get the app to open.
| | 01:14 | Now, notice for most of the time, the mouse has
been over here on the left-hand side of the screen.
| | 01:19 | Now, we'll go ahead and move our mouse up here
into the URL field and click inside of that field.
| | 01:25 | Now, when we go ahead and type-in the URL that
we want to go to www.explorecalifornia.org
| | 01:33 | and we hit Return, the Camtasia program is going
to recognize that we're typing in this region.
| | 01:39 | And it's going to try and create an automatic
SmartFocus effect by zooming into that area.
| | 01:44 | And as long as we don't move our mouse,
the focus will remain in that area.
| | 01:48 | Now, we'll go ahead and move our mouse over to
the right-hand side and begin taking another
| | 01:53 | action such as scrolling our window down.
| | 01:56 | As soon as we click and start dragging down,
that will give a cue to SmartFocus that some
| | 02:02 | other action is taking place on screen.
| | 02:04 | We then scroll our mouse down to the
location that we were interested in.
| | 02:09 | In this case, we are interested in this video
that's playing right here in the middle of our screen.
| | 02:14 | We would then go ahead and play that video
by pressing the Play button and then wait
| | 02:18 | for that video to complete.
| | 02:20 | I'll go ahead and play just a
few seconds of the video here.
| | 02:25 | (video playing)
| | 02:30 | Once the video had finished playing all the
way in its entirety, you could then go ahead
| | 02:35 | and move your mouse back over to
the scrollbar, and scroll back up.
| | 02:40 | This may draw the SmartFocus
back into the scrollbar area.
| | 02:44 | You then maybe want to move your mouse more
into the middle of the screen so that SmartFocus
| | 02:49 | knows that now you want to have
all of the screen displayed again.
| | 02:52 | When you're finished making your instructional video,
you would then stop your recording and preview it.
| | 02:58 | In a later movie, we'll go in and we'll look
at a video that I've recorded using this very
| | 03:03 | technique and we'll go ahead and look at
working with the SmartFocus effects that have been
| | 03:08 | applied to it in a later chapter.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Editing in Camtasia StudioUnderstanding the editing workflow| 00:00 | The real power of Camtasia Studio 8
lies in the built-in editor that empowers
| | 00:05 | you to take your screen
recordings to the next level.
| | 00:08 | In this movie, we'll take a high level
overview of the editing workflow that you
| | 00:12 | will use every time you want to
edit one of your Camtasia recordings.
| | 00:17 | Your editing workflow always begins
with opening up your Camtasia's CAMPROJ
| | 00:21 | file for your project.
| | 00:25 | Back in Chapter 2, we saw how to create a
CAMPROJ file at the end of our sample recording.
| | 00:31 | This time, we'll simply double-click on
the tabs.camproj file from our Windows
| | 00:36 | Explorer to automatically open up the
project file in the Camtasia Editor.
| | 00:40 | The Camtasia Editor is
divided into three main areas;
| | 00:46 | the canvas, the timeline,
and the Media and Effects tabs.
| | 00:51 | The canvas always shows your current
frame of the movie that is currently
| | 00:56 | selected in the timeline via the playhead.
| | 01:01 | The timeline shows you all of the
frames of your project including any
| | 01:05 | additional media and effects that have
currently been applied to your project.
| | 01:10 | You navigate the timeline by
moving the playhead to specific frames.
| | 01:14 | Notice that as you move the playhead, the
current frame is displayed in the canvas.
| | 01:19 | Media tabs such as the Clip Bin
and the Library contain all of the
| | 01:24 | additional images, audio and video
assets for your project that you will
| | 01:30 | want to add to your timeline.
| | 01:32 | The Effects tabs allow you to add
special effects to your timeline such as
| | 01:37 | Callouts, Pan and Zooms, and
many more types of effects.
| | 01:42 | To add an effect, you select the tab
for the type of effect that you want to
| | 01:46 | add, and then with your playhead
located on your timeline where you want the
| | 01:50 | effect to appear, you simply click on
the type of effect that you want to have
| | 01:54 | appear, and it will
appear down in your timeline.
| | 01:57 | You can then manipulate the
position of that effect on your canvas by
| | 02:02 | clicking-and-dragging the object.
| | 02:03 | You can adjust the rotation and the
scaling of the object by using the controls
| | 02:11 | that appear on the object inside of the canvas.
| | 02:14 | You can change the timing of any object by
manipulating the object in your timeline.
| | 02:19 | The most important concept that you
need to understand here is that the canvas
| | 02:24 | and the timeline are perpetually
linked together by the playhead.
| | 02:28 | The combination of the timeline and the
canvas allow you to control the objects
| | 02:33 | that are displayed on screen;
| | 02:35 | when they appear, where they
appear, and how they change over time.
| | 02:39 | Editing video is very much an iterative
process that allows you to fully unlock
| | 02:44 | your creativity in order to tell your story.
| | 02:47 | Learning to use the various tools
available to you in Camtasia will be the
| | 02:51 | focus of the rest of this chapter,
and you will likely need to invest a
| | 02:55 | significant amount of time practicing and using
these tools to truly master the editing process.
| | 03:02 | When you're happy with your edits, the
final step is to produce and share your
| | 03:07 | movie using these controls here.
| | 03:10 | Throughout the rest of this title, we'll
go into more depth on each of these steps.
| | 03:14 | But, for now, I hope this gives you a
good overview of the general workflow that
| | 03:18 | you will follow when
editing your Camtasia project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring the timeline| 00:00 | Let's take a few minutes to explore
the timeline for Camtasia Studio.
| | 00:05 | To begin, let's orient ourselves to the
major components of the timeline itself.
| | 00:10 | Starting at the top-left, we have our Zoom
and basic editing controls and then we have
| | 00:17 | our Undo, and Redo buttons; Cutting,
Splitting, Copying, and Pasting buttons.
| | 00:25 | Below these tools, we see the timeline itself.
| | 00:28 | And the most important tool
available to you, the playhead.
| | 00:32 | By clicking-and-dragging the playhead back-and-
forth along the timeline, we're able to quickly
| | 00:38 | skim through our video to find
a specific location to edit.
| | 00:42 | The small green widget on the left side of
the playhead allows us to select an In point
| | 00:48 | by clicking-and-dragging that
location to our desired In point.
| | 00:53 | The small red widget to the right of the
playhead allows us to set an Out point, and we can
| | 00:58 | click-and-drag that to its location.
| | 01:01 | By pressing the Spacebar on our keyboard, we can
preview the section of video that we've selected.
| | 01:08 | Press the Spacebar as many times as we need
to in order to watch that selection over and
| | 01:13 | over to make sure that we have the
correct section of our video selected.
| | 01:17 | If we wanted to edit out this portion of our
video, we can then simply click the Cut ool
| | 01:23 | or press Ctrl+X on our
keyboard to make our edit.
| | 01:27 | If we want to move our playhead to a specific
location on our timeline, we can simply double-click
| | 01:33 | on the timeline to get the
playhead to jump to that location.
| | 01:37 | We can then press the
Spacebar again to preview our edit.
| | 01:42 | (audio playing)
| | 01:46 | By pressing the Spacebar a second
time, we're able to stop our preview.
| | 01:50 | If you're unhappy with your edit, you can
press Ctrl+Z on your keyboard to undo the
| | 01:56 | edit, and return your movie
back to its previous state.
| | 02:00 | Below the timeline, we have all of the
individual tracks for our project in order for any object
| | 02:06 | to appear on our movie, it needs to be placed
on a track; such as this pointy arrow callout
| | 02:12 | that we see here on Track 2.
| | 02:14 | Camtasia Studio 8 allows for an unlimited
number of tracks, and tracks can have virtually
| | 02:20 | any kind of media on them.
| | 02:22 | What's important to note here is that objects
placed on a track that's above another track
| | 02:29 | will obscure objects on the tracks below
as we preview them here in the canvas.
| | 02:35 | With each track, you can choose to have the
tracks to be editable as both tracks 1 and
| | 02:41 | 2 are here, or you can lock a track from
being edited by simply clicking on the Lock icon
| | 02:47 | and now any edits made will not take effect
on that particular track until you unlock
| | 02:53 | that track for editing.
| | 02:55 | On Track 1, we can see some light
gray lines displayed on the track.
| | 03:00 | Those lines represent the audio track
that is attached to that video track.
| | 03:06 | The lines map directly to the audio waveform
for our audio track, and provide us with an amazingly
| | 03:12 | accurate tool for identifying our edit points.
| | 03:16 | Next, we can adjust the display of our tracks
using this slider here to adjust the height
| | 03:23 | that our tracks are being displayed at.
| | 03:25 | We can use this slider here to adjust the
location of our video that we're looking at.
| | 03:31 | On the bottom of Track 1, you may see some
additional information or you'll see this heavier gray bar.
| | 03:37 | By clicking on the gray bar, you can
open or close the animation tracks.
| | 03:42 | These tracks show the cursor animation effects
and clip animation effects, and the gray bar
| | 03:48 | is simply a toggle to
show or hide these tracks.
| | 03:51 | There is one more thing to know about the
timeline before we begin editing, and that
| | 03:56 | is that you can right-click on virtually any
object, or any area of the timeline, or any
| | 04:03 | of the various different areas of our tracks
to get contextual menus that have additional
| | 04:08 | options that are available to you for editing.
| | 04:12 | Now that you are oriented to the timeline,
in the next movie, we'll make some basic edits.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Basic timeline editing| 00:00 | Let's go ahead and make some
basic edits to our tabs.camproj file.
| | 00:04 | To begin, it's always a good idea to zoom
in on your timeline a little bit, so that
| | 00:09 | you are able to more clearly see the audio
waveforms and identify your edit points.
| | 00:14 | We'll zoom in by clicking on the
Zoom In tool a couple of times.
| | 00:18 | Now we can go ahead and scrub our video
track down to approximately 20 seconds in.
| | 00:25 | And then we'll double-click the timeline at that
location to move our playhead into the correct position.
| | 00:30 | Here, we can clearly see that there's a pause
in our audio track that we'll want to edit out.
| | 00:35 | We'll make this edit by grabbing the green In
point and dragging it until it's just after
| | 00:41 | the last of the audio that
appears here in Track 1.
| | 00:45 | Then we'll do the same thing with our Out
point by dragging it to the right, until it's
| | 00:50 | just before our audio picks back up again.
| | 00:54 | Now we'll check and make sure that we only
have the pause selected by pressing the Spacebar
| | 00:58 | on our keyboard to preview our selection.
| | 01:02 | We can see that the playhead is moving forward and
there's no audio that's selected in this section.
| | 01:08 | So we're good to go ahead and cut it out.
| | 01:10 | However we'll also note that our selection
is overlapping on top of this layer that has
| | 01:15 | the Pointy Arrow object on it.
| | 01:18 | If we go ahead and just simply make this
selection by pressing the Cut button, we'll notice that
| | 01:23 | the Pointy Arrow layer has also been
trimmed as well and our timeline has shifted over
| | 01:28 | to the left closing up the gap.
| | 01:31 | If we are not worried about having the
Pointy Arrow cut off, that's not a problem.
| | 01:35 | However, in this case we
don't want that to happen.
| | 01:37 | So we'll go ahead and click the Undo button
and then we'll come down here to the beginning
| | 01:41 | of Track 2 and we'll click the Lock icon
so we can lock the editing for Track 2.
| | 01:48 | Now when we go back up and we press Cut, this
time the Pointy Arrow object remains in place
| | 01:55 | and our media for Track 1 has
slid down to fill in the gap.
| | 01:59 | Let's go ahead and check to
see how this edit sounds.
| | 02:02 | We'll double-click on our timeline to move
the playhead up just prior to where our edit
| | 02:07 | point is and then we'll press the Spacebar
on our keyboard to start previewing our edit.
| | 02:12 | (video playing)
| | 02:16 | And that sounds much better without
having the big space left in the middle.
| | 02:20 | Now there is one more type of edit that I
would like to show you how to make and to
| | 02:23 | find the location, we'll go ahead and zoom out on our
timeline a little bit by clicking out a few times.
| | 02:29 | Now we can clearly see on our timeline
there are a few other large gaps that have been
| | 02:33 | left in our timeline where
we'll need to trim down the video.
| | 02:38 | I'll let you go ahead and do most of those
on your own, but in this case I want to focus
| | 02:42 | on the edit down here at the end.
| | 02:44 | So we'll double-click on the timeline down
near the end, and then we'll go ahead and
| | 02:47 | zoom in on our timeline at
that location a couple of times.
| | 02:51 | If we preview our video here--
| | 02:54 | (video playing)
| | 02:58 | We can see that where we have picked up
is a little bit of this training video.
| | 03:01 | We are going to want to go ahead
and trim all of this audio off.
| | 03:05 | Let's go ahead and make sure that this is the
end of our movie where we think it should be.
| | 03:09 | So I'll back my playhead back up to just prior
to that location and then I'll press the Spacebar
| | 03:14 | again to preview it.
| | 03:16 | (video playing)
| | 03:18 | Okay. That is the end of our movie.
| | 03:21 | So I am going to position my playhead to
about right here so it's just a little bit after,
| | 03:25 | so once I finished speaking, I've got a
nice little trailing off of dead airspace.
| | 03:30 | Now instead of making a selection of this
end portion of our video, we can simply click
| | 03:35 | one time on the video track to make sure that
it's selected and then we move our mouse down
| | 03:39 | to the very end of that video track.
| | 03:41 | You will notice that our cursor has
changed with double-headed arrow.
| | 03:45 | If we then click-and-drag to the left, we
can trim the end of our video right up to
| | 03:51 | the edge of our playhead and the
video will snap right to the playhead.
| | 03:55 | Now we'll back up our playhead a little bit
and we'll press the Spacebar to see how this
| | 03:59 | final edit sounds.
| | 04:02 | (video playing)
| | 04:05 | That sounds much better.
| | 04:07 | So just remember, if you need to make an
edit in the middle of a clip, you will want to
| | 04:12 | set your playhead in the location for the
edit, then you will set the In and Out points
| | 04:18 | for the edit, verify that it's the correct edit and
then hit the Cut button in order to get rid of it.
| | 04:25 | If you're making an edit at the end of a clip,
you can simply move your mouse cursor over
| | 04:29 | the end of that clip and drag it
into the left to make your edit.
| | 04:33 | In the next movie, we'll look at a
little bit more advanced editing techniques.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Advanced timeline editing| 00:00 | Now that we've seen how to make a basic cut
and trim edit, let's go ahead and look at
| | 00:04 | a technique to make a more complex edit.
| | 00:07 | If we remember that one of the tricks we
discussed in the last chapter was that if we make a
| | 00:12 | mistake, we should pause, regain our
composure, back up, and give the line again.
| | 00:17 | Let's look at our timeline in more detail to
see if we can visually identify an additional
| | 00:22 | edit point that we are going to need to make.
| | 00:24 | We will always begin by clicking on
the Zoom-in tool at least one time.
| | 00:28 | Now we can clearly see our timeline set up
here and we see a large pause that's here
| | 00:33 | around 32 seconds.
| | 00:35 | So, we'll double-click on our timeline to
move our playhead down to that location and
| | 00:40 | then we'll zoom in an additional level,
and scrub our timeline down to about here.
| | 00:45 | We will then go ahead and preview our video
by pressing the Spacebar on our keyboard so
| | 00:50 | we can see exactly what
kind of edit we need to make.
| | 00:57 | (audio playing)
| | 01:12 | Press the Spacebar again to stop the playback.
| | 01:15 | Now, there are a couple of things going on
in this clip and we are going to need to deal
| | 01:19 | with all of them at the same time.
| | 01:22 | The first thing to notice is that back here
at the beginning of our clip, we have some
| | 01:26 | dead airspace, and we already know how we can
make a selection, and cut that portion out.
| | 01:32 | However, if we scrub our timeline back up
into this location and we look up here in
| | 01:37 | the canvas, we can see at this location, our
mouse is still parked right here towards the
| | 01:42 | middle of the tab.
| | 01:43 | Then, as we scrub down a little bit on one
of our rephrases which we can clearly see
| | 01:49 | are rephrases because there is a blank space
left in between each one, we see that we move
| | 01:54 | our mouse just a little bit over here, so
it's moving into the next location for us
| | 01:59 | to give the final line of closing the tab.
| | 02:02 | As we scrub down a little bit further, we
can see that right in this location is where
| | 02:07 | we finally give the line correctly.
| | 02:09 | So, we need to be able to trim out all of
this audio, but we want to save a little small
| | 02:14 | section of video right in through here.
| | 02:16 | So, the best way to do this is instead of
cutting out the entire clip, it's to go ahead
| | 02:22 | and use the Split tool whose keyboard
shortcut is simply pressing the S key.
| | 02:27 | So, with our timeline selected at the bottom
in Track 1, we will go ahead and split the
| | 02:33 | video here at the location where
we finally give the correct line.
| | 02:37 | Let's go ahead and preview that by pressing the
Spacebar to make sure that we got the correct location.
| | 02:42 | (audio playing)
| | 02:46 | Okay. So we have that split correctly.
| | 02:50 | Now, we'll go ahead and scrub our timeline
back up here to the beginning of where we
| | 02:54 | know we need to make our overall edit.
| | 02:57 | And that's at approximately 31 seconds.
| | 03:00 | We're going to place our playhead just after
the audio waveform here, and we will go ahead
| | 03:04 | and do the same thing.
| | 03:05 | We'll make sure that Track 1 is selected,
and this time, we will simply press the S
| | 03:09 | key on our keyboard to split
the video at that playhead.
| | 03:13 | Now, we have this whole center section of
our clip that has our blank audio space and
| | 03:19 | our broken rephrases.
| | 03:21 | Let's go ahead and unlock Track 2 and then
simply drag this clip straight up, so it moves
| | 03:27 | up in our timeline.
| | 03:29 | Next, we'll go ahead and find that
portion of the video that we need to save.
| | 03:35 | We can do that by simply scrubbing our
playhead down, and we'll watch the canvas until our
| | 03:40 | mouse just starts to move; there.
| | 03:43 | So now we will just back up a little bit until
the mouse is in the last location before it moves.
| | 03:49 | And once again, we'll press the S key on our
keyboard to split the video at the playhead right there.
| | 03:54 | We will then scrub down on our timeline
until the mouse is in its final location, which
| | 04:00 | happens to be about right there.
| | 04:02 | We'll go ahead and click one time on our clip,
and once again press the S key on your keyboard
| | 04:09 | to split the video at the playhead again.
| | 04:11 | Now, we can go ahead and click one time on
this clip, and then hit the Delete key on
| | 04:17 | your keyboard to get rid of it.
| | 04:19 | We can click one time on this clip, and
we'll delete it by using the Cut tool.
| | 04:24 | Now, we can grab this clip that has our
video in it and we will drag it down until it's
| | 04:29 | just parked at the edge of this other clip.
| | 04:31 | And we'll drag our video track here all the way
down until it snaps directly into our timeline here.
| | 04:42 | Now, if we back up our playhead to just prior to
our edits and we play, we will see what we've got.
| | 04:50 | (audio playing)
| | 04:54 | All right! Now, what we have going on is we have
two tracks of audio that we need to get rid of
| | 05:00 | the track of audio from this top layer.
| | 05:02 | So we will click one time to select it and
we will right-click on that clip, and there
| | 05:07 | is an option here for Separate video and audio.
| | 05:10 | Go ahead and select that option and now we
can see that we have our audio track set here
| | 05:16 | and our video is set right here.
| | 05:18 | We will click one time on
the audio portion in Track 3.
| | 05:21 | We will go ahead and press the Delete key on
our keyboard to get rid of that audio track.
| | 05:26 | Now, when we back up our playhead, we can
see how well we've matched our video up, and
| | 05:32 | we can watch it up here in our preview.
| | 05:35 | So we will go ahead and press the Spacebar.
| | 05:41 | (audio playing)
| | 05:44 | We'll press the Spacebar to stop it.
| | 05:46 | That edit looks like it
worked just fine in that location.
| | 05:49 | Now, we have an edit where we've been able
to slide-in a piece of video on top of our
| | 05:54 | audio track, and get rid of the extra audio,
and all of the errors that we had inside of
| | 05:59 | our video.
| | 06:00 | So now we have a nice clean piece of
video that looks and presents professionally.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Canvas editing basics| 00:00 | Now let's turn our attention to the
upper-right region of our screen which
| | 00:04 | is called the canvas.
| | 00:05 | Imagine a beautiful
painting hanging on your wall.
| | 00:09 | The canvas that the paint is applied
to is represented by this box here, and
| | 00:13 | anything inside of this box will appear
in your final video as your work of art.
| | 00:19 | The area outside the box is merely
the wall that the canvas is hanging on.
| | 00:24 | The primary purpose of the canvas is to
provide you with a live preview of the
| | 00:29 | current frame of your movie that
the playhead is currently parked on.
| | 00:34 | Notice that there is a playhead right
here that you can adjust just like the
| | 00:38 | playhead we have been using
down here in the timeline.
| | 00:42 | In the lower-right of the canvas,
you can see the exact frame that your
| | 00:45 | playhead is located at.
| | 00:47 | These numbers represent the hours,
minutes, seconds, and frame numbers for the
| | 00:53 | current playhead location.
| | 00:56 | The second set of numbers indicates the
current time code for the last frame of your movie.
| | 01:03 | These controls here allow you to
quickly navigate to the next clip in your
| | 01:07 | timeline, the previous clip in your
timeline, or allow you to step forward in
| | 01:13 | your movie by pressing and holding this
button and moving frame by frame forward
| | 01:18 | or frame by frame backwards using this button.
| | 01:22 | The button in the middle allows
us to play and pause our video.
| | 01:26 | We've also seen this done in earlier
movies by simply pressing the Spacebar to
| | 01:30 | start and then stop our video
where we want to preview it.
| | 01:33 | In the upper-right portion of our screen,
this button here allows us to detach
| | 01:38 | our canvas from the rest of our Camtasia Editor.
| | 01:41 | Once detached, we can move
our video to a new location.
| | 01:45 | This is extremely helpful if we are
editing our project on a computer that's set
| | 01:50 | up with two monitors.
| | 01:51 | In this case, we could take our canvas,
and move it over to the second monitor.
| | 01:55 | If you want to add your canvas back
into your main project window, all you need
| | 02:00 | to do is grab the window, and drag it
over to the upper-right portion of your
| | 02:04 | screen and then release your mouse.
| | 02:06 | When you do, the canvas automatically snaps
back in as part of your main project window.
| | 02:12 | The next button here allows us to toggle
into Full Screen Mode by clicking on the button.
| | 02:18 | In full screen mode, all of the rest of
Camtasia disappears out of the way and
| | 02:24 | we are able to just focus on
the current frame of our movie.
| | 02:27 | This is great for when we're
previewing our movie to see exactly how
| | 02:31 | everything is going to look.
| | 02:33 | To get out of full screen mode, all you
need to do is press the Esc key on your
| | 02:38 | keyboard, and you're returned right back
to your normal Camtasia project editor.
| | 02:41 | If you need to see more details in the
objects on your canvas, you can adjust
| | 02:46 | the zoom using this dropdown menu here.
| | 02:49 | If you adjust the zoom to a higher
number such as 100%, it's similar to walking
| | 02:55 | up closer to the wall that
your painting is hanging on.
| | 02:58 | You're able to see more detail in the objects.
| | 03:02 | Likewise, if you set your zoom to a
lower value, it would be similar to stepping
| | 03:07 | further back away from the wall where
you're able to see more of the wall and
| | 03:11 | the overall view of your
canvas hanging on that wall.
| | 03:16 | If we zoom in to a higher value such
as 100%, and we want to move around
| | 03:21 | inside of our canvas, we can click on
this button here to enter into what's
| | 03:26 | called the Pan Mode.
| | 03:28 | Once we are in the Pan Mode, you'll notice
that your cursor changes into a hand icon.
| | 03:34 | By clicking and dragging now, we're
able to move around as if we we're walking
| | 03:39 | around close to the wall to look at
different regions of our painting.
| | 03:44 | If we want to see a view of our entire
canvas, we can always select Shrink to
| | 03:48 | Fit at the bottom of our Zoom menu.
| | 03:51 | And the canvas will fill the area so
that we can see the entire canvas again.
| | 03:55 | If we click again on the Pan Mode icon
to go out of Pan Mode, now when we click
| | 04:02 | on our objects, our cursor changes to a
four-headed arrow, this way, we can move
| | 04:07 | objects around on the screen.
| | 04:10 | You'll notice that as we move the
object around on the screen, we get
| | 04:13 | alignment guides which will let us
know when our object has snapped to
| | 04:17 | alignment with our canvas.
| | 04:19 | When an object is selected on-screen,
there are these small control circles that
| | 04:24 | appear around the outside edge of our object.
| | 04:28 | If we grab any of the control
circles that are located on the corners and
| | 04:32 | click and drag in, we will do what's called
uniformly scaling our video to a smaller size.
| | 04:38 | As we scale our video using these
corners, the video will remain in the
| | 04:43 | correct perspective.
| | 04:45 | However, if we grab any of the control
handles that are located on the edges,
| | 04:50 | and we drag those in, we can change the
size of our object, but it will skew the
| | 04:55 | perspective of our object.
| | 04:56 | If you want to undo any changes that
you've made you can always come down here
| | 05:01 | to your timeline, and click on the Undo
button or press Ctrl+Z on your keyboard.
| | 05:06 | At the center of a selected
object, you'll see two circles.
| | 05:11 | The first circle indicates the center of
rotation, and the circle that's just to
| | 05:16 | the right will indicate the angle of rotation.
| | 05:19 | When you move your mouse over top of
this circle, the circle will turn green.
| | 05:23 | If you click and drag on this circle,
you can rotate the object around
| | 05:27 | the center of rotation.
| | 05:29 | If you want to reposition your object,
you can simply click on the object, and
| | 05:33 | drag it into a new location.
| | 05:36 | This button here allows us to change
the size of our canvas so that it will
| | 05:39 | exactly match the size of
our targeted final movie.
| | 05:43 | This checkbox here ensures that any
new size that we set will keep the same
| | 05:49 | aspect ratio as our originally recorded video.
| | 05:53 | It's always a good idea to make sure
that this box is always checked unless you
| | 05:57 | are purposefully wanting to distort your video.
| | 06:01 | This option here allows us to set
the background color for our canvas.
| | 06:06 | The default color is usually set to black.
| | 06:09 | However, I like to change mine to white
for many projects that I'm working on.
| | 06:14 | That way, if I'm applying a special
effect such as a dropshadow which we'll
| | 06:18 | learn about in a later movie, that
dropshadow will appear on the objects much
| | 06:23 | cleaner and easier to see.
| | 06:25 | Now that we've gone ahead and made a
change to our background color, we can go
| | 06:29 | ahead and click the OK
button to accept that change.
| | 06:32 | Overall, the canvas is the most
important region of the Camtasia Editor for
| | 06:37 | you to know how to manage and
manipulate in order to get the best results out
| | 06:42 | of your work of art.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing visual properties| 00:00 | Before we leave this chapter on basic
editing techniques, there is one more set
| | 00:04 | of tools that you need to know and
that's how to edit the visual properties of
| | 00:08 | an object that's selected on your canvas.
| | 00:11 | Let's go ahead and use the jump to Next
clip button here in our timeline to jump
| | 00:16 | forward to this clip.
| | 00:17 | We'll then go ahead and click one
time on the object on our canvas and then
| | 00:23 | by clicking the More button here we'll
select Visual Properties from the dropdown menu.
| | 00:28 | The Visual Properties tab allows us
to have more precise control over the
| | 00:33 | specific parameters of our object.
| | 00:35 | For instance, we can use this slider
here to adjust the scale of the object.
| | 00:41 | That slider is exactly the same as
grabbing the handle on the corner of one of
| | 00:47 | our objects and adjusting the scale there.
| | 00:50 | We can also adjust the opacity
of any object using this slider.
| | 00:55 | That way if we want to have our
object to be partially see-through to see
| | 00:59 | to another object that may be on the
canvas, behind this primary object, we
| | 01:03 | can adjust that here.
| | 01:08 | Likewise, we can precisely adjust the
position of our object by using the X,
| | 01:12 | Y and Z values here.
| | 01:15 | We can use the Up and Down arrows to
manually adjust either one point at a time
| | 01:20 | or we can select the value and
simply type in that value such as 10.
| | 01:26 | Negative values in these fields
allow us to move an object in the
| | 01:30 | opposite direction.
| | 01:32 | So the X direction positive would be
moving to the right whereas if we make this
| | 01:37 | a -290, we can move the object
over to the left side of our screen.
| | 01:44 | For Rotation, we can rotate our
object in the Z dimension by clicking and
| | 01:50 | holding one of these objects.
| | 01:54 | We can rotate our object in the Y
dimension by adjusting this value here by
| | 02:00 | clicking and holding, or we can adjust
the rotation of our object around the X
| | 02:06 | axis by adjusting these values in here.
| | 02:12 | You can see by making some precise
adjustments to your object, you can get some
| | 02:16 | very interesting effects.
| | 02:18 | If we scroll down a little bit, we can
adjust some other visual properties such
| | 02:22 | as adding a drop shadow to our object.
| | 02:25 | With the Drop shadow checkbox selected,
we then get additional controls to
| | 02:29 | adjust the distance that the
drop shadow appears from our object.
| | 02:35 | We can adjust the direction that that drop
shadow appears by adjusting this slider here.
| | 02:41 | If we want to adjust the opacity
to make it so that that drop shadow
| | 02:45 | doesn't appear quite as harsh, we
can use this slider here or change the
| | 02:50 | value to something like 30.
| | 02:53 | The last slider allows us to
adjust the blur of our object.
| | 02:57 | If we increase the blur to the right, the
drop shadow will appear as a softer shadow.
| | 03:04 | If we drag the Blur slider to the left,
the drop shadow will not have any blur
| | 03:09 | applied to it and it will look
like a sharp-edged drop shadow.
| | 03:13 | I like to have the blur
set to a value around 15.
| | 03:17 | That way I get a nice
soft edge to my drop shadow.
| | 03:20 | Additional options that we have
available to us in the Visual effects area is
| | 03:25 | that we can colorize our object.
| | 03:27 | I'll go ahead and drag this object
back here into the middle so it's a little
| | 03:30 | bit easier to see and then we'll go
ahead and scroll down in the window.
| | 03:34 | When we colorize an object, we can
change the color that's being applied to it.
| | 03:39 | Say for instance, we would like to
have this nice dark red color applied.
| | 03:43 | Then we can adjust the slider to
adjust the amount of that color that's being
| | 03:49 | applied to our object.
| | 03:51 | This can allow us to get
some very interesting effects.
| | 03:56 | We'll go ahead and set this down to about 50%.
| | 03:59 | We can also add a border
around any object that's selected.
| | 04:03 | Here, we can change the border color
if we would like or we can adjust the
| | 04:08 | thickness of the border by dragging this
slider here or simply typing in a value such as 9.
| | 04:16 | With all of these different precise
visual effects properties that we can apply
| | 04:20 | to our individual objects, we have a
lot of creative control as to how we can
| | 04:25 | make our objects appear inside of our timeline.
| | 04:28 | In later movies, we'll show you how
to go ahead and animate some of these
| | 04:31 | effects so that any of these effects
can be changed over time automatically
| | 04:37 | as part of your movie.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using markers| 00:00 | Before we wrap up the editing chapter,
I want to talk about one more editing
| | 00:04 | feature that's built into Camtasia
Studio and that's the use of markers.
| | 00:08 | Markers are like sticky notes that you
can add to your timeline that will allow
| | 00:13 | you to quickly identify and then get
back to a particular point in your timeline
| | 00:18 | that you may want to apply an edit to.
| | 00:20 | To access the Markers feature, all we
need to do is click the dropdown menu
| | 00:24 | here with the gear in our timeline and select
Show Marker view or press Ctrl+M on your keyboard.
| | 00:33 | A new bar appears here above your
timeline for all of your markers.
| | 00:38 | Let's go ahead and zoom into our
timeline a couple of clicks so we can more
| | 00:42 | easily see the audio waveforms.
| | 00:44 | By looking at the audio waveforms we can
oftentimes identify points where we may
| | 00:49 | need to make an edit.
| | 00:52 | Here, we are able to see that there's
a large gap that's been left in between
| | 00:56 | some of our audio that may indicate that
there's a problem here or that there is
| | 01:01 | an edit that we need to be able to make.
| | 01:03 | We can easily remind ourselves of this
location by making sure that our playhead
| | 01:09 | is at that location and then simply
pressing the M key on our keyboard.
| | 01:13 | That will add a marker onto our
timeline at that particular point.
| | 01:18 | By default our markers are all named
sequentially, Marker 1, Marker 2 and so forth.
| | 01:24 | If that's a fine name for you, all you
need to do is simply hit the Return or
| | 01:28 | Enter key on your keyboard
in order to accept that name.
| | 01:33 | You can then move your playhead to a
new location, where you think that there
| | 01:37 | may be a need for an edit at that point.
| | 01:39 | You can then simply press the M key
again and accept another marker by
| | 01:43 | pressing Enter or Return.
| | 01:45 | As I look down on my timeline, I can
see a spot right here where I have got a
| | 01:50 | separation between two clips.
| | 01:51 | I'll go ahead and move my playhead
down to that location and then press the M
| | 01:56 | key again to create another marker.
| | 01:59 | Now if I decide that I want to make a
note about this particular marker here
| | 02:04 | because my text is already selected
and I know at this point I'm more than
| | 02:08 | likely going to need a transition, I'll
go ahead and simply type in Transition
| | 02:12 | and hit Enter or Return on my
keyboard to accept that change.
| | 02:18 | Now I've got a custom named Marker right here.
| | 02:22 | I can also create a marker by simply
moving my mouse just above the timeline
| | 02:26 | and just below the Markers line and click
my mouse to add another marker at that point.
| | 02:33 | Once again, I'll hit Enter or
Return to accept that change.
| | 02:37 | The nice part about markers is that
you're able to easily navigate around on
| | 02:41 | your timeline once you've added some markers.
| | 02:43 | For instance, if you hold down the
Ctrl key and you press the Left Bracket
| | 02:48 | Arrow, your playhead will
automatically jump back to the previous marker.
| | 02:53 | By pressing Ctrl+], your playhead will
jump automatically to the next marker.
| | 02:59 | This way, you can quickly go through your movie.
| | 03:03 | Make notations, add markers to the
points where you think you are going to need
| | 03:08 | to make some edits and then navigate
via your keyboard to those locations and
| | 03:12 | make your final edits.
| | 03:14 | By using markers in your editing process,
it will greatly speed up the time that
| | 03:19 | you spend going through doing your edits.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Working with AudioBasic audio editing| 00:00 | Let's explore some of the basic techniques
for editing audio inside of Camtasia Studio.
| | 00:06 | To begin I always like to go ahead and zoom
in to my timeline and if I am going to be focused
| | 00:11 | on audio I like to grab the small bar in
between Track 1 and Track 2 and click and drag that
| | 00:17 | up so that the audio waveforms are at their
maximum height, that way it's easy to see.
| | 00:24 | As we look at this movie we can see that
our audio levels for the first clip are quite
| | 00:28 | low, the audio levels for the second clip
are quite high, they are low again for the
| | 00:34 | third clip, and then in the fourth clip we
once again have very high audio levels and
| | 00:39 | we even have a little bit of audio
clipping that's going on here at the top of this.
| | 00:43 | Let's go ahead and preview this file
so we can hear what it sounds like.
| | 00:50 | (audio playing)
| | 01:21 | So we have a lot of things
to clean up in this audio.
| | 01:24 | Let's go ahead and scrub our timeline back to
the beginning and we will start by addressing
| | 01:28 | this first clip here.
| | 01:30 | We will go ahead and click one time on the
clip to select it, and then we will click
| | 01:35 | on the Audio tab here in the top.
| | 01:37 | Now the first thing we are going to want to
do is we want to make this audio level louder.
| | 01:42 | In an ideal world we would get the peak of
these waveforms to be about three-quarters
| | 01:46 | of the way up this line.
| | 01:48 | So we can do that by simply coming up here
to the top and with the clip selected we can
| | 01:53 | simply click the Volume up button.
| | 01:55 | Each time you click the Volume up button
the input gain will automatically be adjusted
| | 02:01 | on that audio clip.
| | 02:02 | As we continue to click the Volume up button
the volume will continue to raise until our
| | 02:08 | waveform reaches the proper height.
| | 02:10 | In this case, it's when our
audio level is maxed out.
| | 02:14 | Let's go ahead and preview a little bit of
this audio to see what it sounds like, we
| | 02:18 | can use the Spacebar on our
keyboard to start the playback.
| | 02:23 | (audio playing)
| | 02:30 | That sounds much better.
| | 02:31 | We have a very large breath that's taken right
here at the very beginning and we will address
| | 02:35 | that in a few minutes.
| | 02:37 | For now this sounds okay, so let's go on to
the next clip and click on the clip to select
| | 02:42 | it and then click in the timeline to make sure
that our playhead is centered inside of this clip.
| | 02:48 | We can then adjust the audio level down on
this clip by using the Volume down button
| | 02:53 | and clicking that level just a couple of times.
| | 02:56 | It looks like two clicks down brings the
level down a little bit too low, we will go ahead
| | 03:01 | and click it one click Volume up, that will
make the average of these peaks match the
| | 03:06 | average of these peaks.
| | 03:07 | We are looking at this visually to try and
make sure that we can get the peaks to all
| | 03:12 | line up roughly on our browser.
| | 03:14 | Let's go ahead and backup our playhead a little
bit into the previous clip and press the Spacebar
| | 03:19 | so we can hear how those
two clips now sound together.
| | 03:23 | (audio playing)
| | 03:28 | That sounds much better.
| | 03:29 | The two pieces of audio are
matching a whole lot more.
| | 03:33 | For this next clip where we have got to
raise the audio level again, we've already seen
| | 03:37 | where we can use the Volume up button, but
there's another way to adjust the audio level
| | 03:42 | on a clip and that's by simply clicking on
this green line and dragging it vertically.
| | 03:48 | We can adjust the audio levels then up
or down by simply dragging the line.
| | 03:53 | In this case we will go ahead and
drag the line almost all the way up.
| | 03:56 | But in this case because we have a couple
of the audio peaks that are showing up much
| | 04:00 | higher than the other ones we will go ahead and
not drag this level all the way up to the top.
| | 04:05 | Once again we will double-click on our playhead,
so it will play a little bit of the clip prior
| | 04:10 | and then we can listen to
it and see how we are doing.
| | 04:15 | (audio playing)
| | 04:18 | That again sounds much better.
| | 04:20 | Let's go ahead and look at this last clip.
| | 04:22 | We will go ahead and click on that clip, we
can simply grab the green volume level and
| | 04:26 | drag it down just a little bit until the
peak of this audio level is down low enough and
| | 04:33 | the other audio is matching at the same level.
| | 04:35 | We will go ahead and move our playhead
down and preview a little bit of that audio.
| | 04:41 | (audio playing)
| | 04:44 | Our audio levels are sounding a whole lot
better, let's go ahead and address that breath
| | 04:48 | at the beginning now.
| | 04:49 | We will go ahead and drag our playhead all
the way back to the beginning of our movie
| | 04:54 | and then zoom in to the maximum amount.
| | 04:57 | Here we can clearly see
the breath that we took.
| | 04:59 | We will go ahead and use our timeline Selector to
drag our selection down, so where it completely
| | 05:07 | encompass that breath right there.
| | 05:09 | To make sure that we've got the right piece
of audio selected we will simply preview it
| | 05:13 | by pressing the Spacebar.
| | 05:18 | Now in order to get rid of this audio we can
click the button for Silence and the audio
| | 05:24 | level is automatically drop down.
| | 05:26 | When we use the Silence tool we can see here
on our timeline that we have these new icons
| | 05:32 | that have appeared, there is a small
circle icon here and another one down here.
| | 05:37 | These circle icons are audio edit points, we
can drag an audio edit point either horizontally
| | 05:45 | along the timeline in order to change the
position in time in which that audio edit
| | 05:50 | point will occur or we can drag an audio edit
point vertically to adjust the volume of the
| | 05:57 | audio at that particular point.
| | 05:59 | In this case, we'll want to make sure that
our volume level is all the way up here near
| | 06:03 | the top and we want to slide it a little bit
over so that the time that the audio is at
| | 06:08 | its maximum amount corresponds to when
our audio waveform is beginning to start.
| | 06:14 | By using the Silence button it's also added
another audio edit point down here at the bottom.
| | 06:20 | If we click on that audio edit point and I
start dragging it up and then drag it over
| | 06:25 | to the left we can see that that breath of
audio is still in place, it hasn't been deleted,
| | 06:31 | it's just been removed by taking the audio
volume and reducing it down to zero at that point.
| | 06:37 | Let's go ahead and click and drag that edit
point back down in our timeline and you'll
| | 06:42 | notice that we have a slight slope
between the first point and the second point.
| | 06:47 | By adding this slope we can smoothly transition
from a time when we have silence in our audio
| | 06:53 | up until the volume level is up, this will
make the transition much easier on the ear
| | 06:58 | and make it easier for the user
to listen to that piece of audio.
| | 07:02 | Let's go ahead and back up our playhead to
the beginning of our movie and we will go
| | 07:06 | ahead and preview this
by pressing the Spacebar.
| | 07:09 | (audio playing)
| | 07:13 | That sounds much better, the breath has been
taken out and our audio is sounding much clearer.
| | 07:19 | Let's go ahead and jump to the next
transition between our clips and we will use the move
| | 07:23 | to Next clip button here in our canvas.
| | 07:28 | We can then back up our timeline just a little bit
so we can see where we need to make our next edit.
| | 07:34 | At this point because we've got two pieces of
audio that are coming in at different levels,
| | 07:39 | it would be a good idea to fade the audio
out of this first clip and then fade the audio
| | 07:44 | in on the second clip.
| | 07:46 | To do that we will go ahead and drag a
selection using our green In point of our playhead and
| | 07:52 | drag it back in time until it's just here at
the end of where our audio is dropping off.
| | 07:58 | We will then add a Fade out option and once
again we can see that those two edit points
| | 08:04 | have been added and they have been added
on that nice slope that we saw earlier.
| | 08:07 | Next, we will double-click on our timeline
to move the timeline forward into the next
| | 08:13 | clip and we will make a similar selection.
| | 08:16 | We will make a selection that will end just
as our audio is picking up for the new clip,
| | 08:21 | and then we will drag our In point
back to the beginning of that clip.
| | 08:24 | We will then add a Fade in command and we can
see that our audio level is going to fade in.
| | 08:31 | Let's go ahead and move our playhead back
just a little bit in our timeline and we will
| | 08:34 | preview that edit.
| | 08:36 | (audio playing)
| | 08:39 | Now those two pieces of audio are sounding
much smoother together and sounding like they
| | 08:44 | were always made to be the same level.
| | 08:47 | Let's go ahead and zoom out on our timeline
now and you can see that there's two more
| | 08:53 | clips here, that's two more points where you can go in
and practice adding a Fade out and a Fade in effect.
| | 09:00 | Go ahead and do that in both of those two
areas and play around with some of the audio
| | 09:04 | levels to make sure that you're
comfortable with how these different controls work.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Removing room noise| 00:00 | At some point when you record a screencast,
you are going to end up with some background
| | 00:05 | room noise in your recording that
you are going to want to get rid of.
| | 00:09 | Now many of us are not fortunate enough to
have our own private sound booth that we can
| | 00:13 | record all of our screencasts in.
| | 00:16 | It will be great, but it's just not
the reality that most of us live in.
| | 00:20 | We are going to be recording in a room where
we're going to have some level of background noise
| | 00:26 | and we may want to try and get rid of that.
| | 00:28 | Now Camtasia has some tools
built in, to help us do just that.
| | 00:33 | And I will warn you, before you embark on
trying to remove the background noise in your
| | 00:38 | recordings, your results are going to vary
greatly depending on the specific noise that
| | 00:43 | you're trying to get rid off.
| | 00:44 | I will step through the general process
in this movie with you, so you get a feel
| | 00:48 | for the process that you go through.
| | 00:51 | Before I begin doing anything like noise removal,
I always like to make a copy of my project,
| | 00:57 | so that I can always get back to my starting
state, if I begin working with the file and
| | 01:02 | I find out that I've made things
worse, rather than made things better.
| | 01:06 | So, let's begin by minimizing Camtasia Studio
and go and find the project folder that you
| | 01:13 | have for this project.
| | 01:15 | In this case I'm working in the Chapter 5 Exercise Files
and working in a folder called Room Noise Project 02.
| | 01:23 | To make a copy of this, I will simply select
the file, right-click on it and select Copy.
| | 01:29 | Then I will go out to my Desktop, right-
click on the Desktop and simply select Paste.
| | 01:37 | That way a copy of my project is saved in a
safe location for while I'm making these edits.
| | 01:43 | You may even want to open up the copy of that
project, rather than open up your original
| | 01:48 | to make your initial edits.
| | 01:51 | Once you've done that, I am going to go ahead
and open back up my Camtasia Studio project.
| | 01:57 | Once again, I'll go ahead and stretch out
Track 1, so I can clearly see the audio waveform
| | 02:02 | and I've also already zoomed
into my project quite a bit.
| | 02:07 | Now before we preview the audio clip, there
is one more note that I want to make, and
| | 02:11 | that is in order to do this level of editing,
you want to make sure that you have a really
| | 02:15 | good pair of audio headphones plugged into
your computer and you are not just listening
| | 02:20 | to your computer speakers.
| | 02:22 | Chances are, if you're just using the built-in
speakers for your computer, you probably won't
| | 02:27 | be able to hear the fine differences that we are
looking to clean up in this particular movie.
| | 02:32 | Also, it's going to depend on how good your
hearing is, as to whether you can hear the
| | 02:36 | specific frequencies that we
are trying to remove or not.
| | 02:40 | Let's go ahead and preview this audio
file to see if we can hear the room noise.
| | 02:44 | We will go ahead and press
Play and listen to the file.
| | 02:49 | (audio playing)
| | 02:54 | Already we should be able to hear a little
bit of a high pitch whine that's coming from
| | 02:59 | a fan and you can also hear the general air-
conditioning system that's playing in the room.
| | 03:04 | Let's go ahead and back that audio file
up and listen to it once more carefully.
| | 03:10 | (audio playing)
| | 03:14 | So we now know what we're listening for.
| | 03:16 | We can hear that audio by itself right in
this area and then it continues underneath
| | 03:23 | of the speaker throughout the rest of the time.
| | 03:27 | This brings up a really good point.
| | 03:29 | When you begin doing your recording, make
sure that you don't begin speaking right away,
| | 03:34 | make sure you leave a little bit of room noise at
the beginning and at the end of your recordings,
| | 03:39 | so that you will be able to apply the
techniques that we are going to be demonstrating here.
| | 03:43 | Let's begin by clicking on the Audio tab to
select the audio region for this clip, and
| | 03:50 |
in the audio tab, you'll see there's a section for an
Enable noise removal with an advanced dropdown menu.
| | 03:56 | Go ahead and click the triangle for the
advanced dropdown menu and let's look at some of the
| | 04:00 | options that we have.
| | 04:02 | The first option is to be able to adjust the
sensitivity for this particular filter, by
| | 04:08 | dragging the slider to the right, we will
be able to increase the effect of the filter
| | 04:13 | and by dragging it to the left, we
will be able to decrease the effect.
| | 04:16 | Next, there are two types of noise removal
training that we can apply; there is the Auto
| | 04:22 | Noise removal training, which is what is automatically
applied when we check this box to turn on the filter.
| | 04:28 | Alternatively, we can select a piece of room
noise that we want to tell Camtasia Studio
| | 04:35 | that this is the particular area of room
noise with no speakers speaking that we want to
| | 04:40 | try and select and remove.
| | 04:42 | We will look at that in just a second.
| | 04:44 | Next, there are two more options, remove
clipping, which will be looking for any places in our
| | 04:51 | audio file, where some clipping has occurred.
| | 04:54 | It'll also try to clip out some of the higher
frequencies that's most normally associated
| | 04:59 | with some of the types of
background noise that we will be removing.
| | 05:02 | Next, we could choose to remove any audio clicks or
pops that regularly happen throughout our recording.
| | 05:10 | And we can adjust the
sensitivity of that particular filter.
| | 05:14 | Let's go ahead and click on the Enable noise
removal option and we can see right away that
| | 05:19 | our audio waveform has changed to this more
yellow color, indicating that it's had the
| | 05:24 | filter applied to it.
| | 05:26 | Let's go ahead and back up our play head to
the beginning and listen to see what the audio
| | 05:31 | filter has done automatically for us.
| | 05:36 | (audio playing)
| | 05:40 | Now if your headphones are of a good enough quality,
you should be able to hear that difference right away.
| | 05:45 | Let's go ahead and back up the playhead and
uncheck the box, so we can listen to it one
| | 05:49 | more time without the filter applied.
| | 05:52 | (audio playing)
| | 05:55 | And we will back it up; check
the box to Enable the filter.
| | 06:00 | (audio playing)
| | 06:04 | Most of the background room noise has
already been removed, but there's a little bit of
| | 06:08 | a high pitch whine that's still in there.
| | 06:11 | Let's go ahead and try the manual noise
training to see if that makes a difference.
| | 06:15 | So what we will do is we will back up our
playhead, we will turn off the filter, so
| | 06:21 | we can be sure to hear all of the background
noise clearly and then we will use our Selection
| | 06:26 | tool to make a selection of some
of the initial audio room noise.
| | 06:30 | Go ahead and make that
selection there and then press Play. (audio playing)
| | 06:38 | Now we can hear that we just have that audio
selected that only has the room noise in it.
| | 06:43 | We will then click on the button that
says Manual noise training on selection.
| | 06:48 | Camtasia Studio has now analyzed the audio
in our selection and determined that that's
| | 06:53 | the room noise that it's
going to try and remove.
| | 06:55 | We will double-click on our timeline to back up
to the beginning and then play our video again.
| | 07:02 | (audio playing)
| | 07:08 | Now more of the audio--that is the room noise--
has been removed then what was initially removed
| | 07:13 | from the auto training.
| | 07:14 | So we have done a little bit
better job of the cleanup.
| | 07:17 | But if you listen closely, there's still a
little tiny bit of a high pitch whine that's
| | 07:22 | left over from a computer fan that
was in the room during the recording.
| | 07:27 | In order to get rid of this, let's go ahead
and check the box for Remove clipping and
| | 07:31 | see what effect that has.
| | 07:35 | (audio playing)
| | 07:41 | Now that high pitch whine is completely gone,
we can back up one more time and we can uncheck
| | 07:47 | the Enable noise filter and remove the
clipping to preview without those filters applied.
| | 07:54 | (audio playing)
| | 07:58 | Back up, check both of those boxes again to
reapply the manual training that we just did
| | 08:03 | and the clipping filter
and play it one more time.
| | 08:09 | (audio playing)
| | 08:15 | Now if you want to, you can go in and you
can adjust the sensitivity for the filter
| | 08:21 | and you can also try applying the remove clicks and
adjust that sensitivity to see if it makes any difference.
| | 08:28 | In this case, the settings that we have right now
seem to be working just fine for this audio clip.
| | 08:34 | Be sure when you go in to make any
adjustments like this that you make a copy of your file
| | 08:40 | and you work off of that copy as you
are testing out all of your settings.
| | 08:44 | Once you're sure that you have your settings
exactly right, go ahead and close the copy
| | 08:48 | that you made, and open up your original
project again and apply those specific settings.
| | 08:54 | With a little bit of practice you should be
able to remove the basic background audio
| | 08:58 | noise that occurs in most of our home
recordings when we are using Camtasia Studio and you'll
| | 09:04 | end up with a much more
professional sounding recording.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Leveling audio clips| 00:00 | Sometimes when you're editing a screencast,
you may have audio coming in from varying
| | 00:05 | different sources, those audio levels may not
match up evenly between the various different clips.
| | 00:11 | Let me show you an example.
| | 00:14 | In this particular file, I am going to go
ahead and jump my playhead down towards the
| | 00:17 | end of the first clip and then I'll go
ahead and preview a little bit of the audio.
| | 00:22 | (video playing)
| | 00:25 | Here, we can clearly see that there is a big jump in
audio between the first clip and the second clip.
| | 00:33 | It would be great to be able to easily level out
all of the audio between our various different
| | 00:39 | clips, all at the same time.
| | 00:41 | Camtasia Studio has a tool just for that,
but before we apply the tool, it's a good
| | 00:47 | idea any time you're trying out a technique
on a large patch of audio in your file to
| | 00:53 | go ahead and minimize Camtasia Studio, go
out to your Windows Explorer and make a copy
| | 01:00 | of your entire project file.
| | 01:02 | In this case I'm working in the
folder Leveling Audio Project 03.
| | 01:06 | So we'll go ahead and right click
on that folder and select Copy.
| | 01:10 | Then go out to a safe location, such as your Desktop,
simply right-click on your Desktop and select Paste.
| | 01:17 | It's always a good idea to make a copy of
your project before you apply any audio filters
| | 01:23 | to the overall project.
| | 01:25 | That way if you end up making your audio
files worse in your project, you can easily get
| | 01:30 | back to a previous state where
you know everything was okay.
| | 01:35 | Now that we have that taken care of, let's
go ahead and go back into Camtasia Studio.
| | 01:40 | We've already gone ahead and zoomed into
our project and we'll go ahead and adjust the
| | 01:44 | height of Track 1 here, so we can
clearly see all the audio waveforms.
| | 01:49 | Next, before we open up the Audio filter,
let's go ahead and press Ctrl+A on our keyboard
| | 01:55 | to select all of the clips.
| | 01:58 | Then we'll go ahead and click on the Audio
tab and in the top of the Audio tab, there
| | 02:02 | is a section here for Enable volume leveling.
| | 02:05 | Now I will warn you that your results are
going to vary greatly, and this filter may
| | 02:10 | make things better and it may not.
| | 02:13 | It's a good thing to go ahead and try it
and try some of the various different options
| | 02:16 | on your particular files to see how this
particular filter interacts with your files.
| | 02:22 | To apply the filter, all we need to do is
make sure that all of our clips are selected
| | 02:27 | and then check the box
for Enable volume leveling.
| | 02:30 | As soon as we do, we can see that in the
first and third clip, the audio levels have been
| | 02:36 | boosted up, and in the second and fourth clip, our
audio levels have been reduced down a little bit.
| | 02:43 | Let's go ahead and back up our playhead to
just before the end of the first clip and
| | 02:47 | listen to what this sounds like.
| | 02:50 | (video playing)
| | 02:55 | Already we can hear that this is much better.
| | 02:58 | But let's go ahead and see if
we can make this even better.
| | 03:00 | Underneath of the Volume leveling tool,
there is an option for Volume variation.
| | 03:05 | Here, there are a couple of options.
| | 03:08 | If we know that there's not much variation
between our clips, we can go ahead and select
| | 03:13 | Low volume variation.
| | 03:15 | We can see the effect immediately applied.
| | 03:19 | The first and third clip's audio levels were
not increased as much as they were before,
| | 03:25 | and our second and fourth audio
files were not decreased as much.
| | 03:29 | Let's go ahead and back up our playhead
and listen to the results from this filter.
| | 03:35 | (video playing)
| | 03:39 | There's still quite a bit of variation.
| | 03:41 | Let's go ahead and click the dropdown menu one more
time and this time we'll select High volume variation.
| | 03:47 | Here, we can see the
waveforms are much closer in height.
| | 03:51 | Let's go ahead and back up the playhead
and listen to see what that sounds like.
| | 03:56 | (video playing)
| | 04:01 | Now that is giving us a much better match
of our audio levels between the two clips.
| | 04:05 | We are getting a very pronounced breath right
here in between these two clips and we already
| | 04:11 | know how we could use the Fade in
option to be able to clean that up.
| | 04:15 | But for now, our audio levels are at
least a little bit better than they were.
| | 04:20 | You have also seen the technique in the first
movie of this chapter where you could go in
| | 04:24 | and manually adjust the audio
levels for each individual clip.
| | 04:28 | A combination between these two techniques
should give you a fairly good balance of your
| | 04:35 | audio when you mix in clips
from multiple different sources.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Advanced audio editing| 00:00 | Now that we've seen a lot of the basic
techniques for editing audio and editing our files in
| | 00:05 | general, let's go ahead and pull that together and do
some advanced techniques on our tabs.camproj file.
| | 00:13 | In this case, I've gone ahead and I've added a
bunch of markers to a bunch of different edit points.
| | 00:18 | One of the things that you'll likely run
into when you're editing your screen recordings
| | 00:22 | is you'll find individual gaps
that will need to be closed up.
| | 00:26 | You'll also find small single sounds that
you'll want to edit out; many of these sounds
| | 00:32 | happen just from the fact of us talking.
| | 00:35 | There will be things like lip smacks and deep
breaths that get taken in the middle or long
| | 00:40 | pauses where we're regathering our
thoughts and we need to tighten up our editing.
| | 00:44 | Let's begin by going ahead and zooming into
our project a couple of clicks so it's easier
| | 00:50 | to see and then we'll navigate to the
first marker by pressing Ctrl+Right Bracket.
| | 00:55 | We can then make a small selection of this
region of our file by simply selecting it
| | 01:00 | with our selection tools and then
pressing the Spacebar to preview it.
| | 01:05 | (video playing)
| | 01:07 | If you listen very closely, there's two small
little clicks right down in here and it will
| | 01:13 | be nice to be able to go
ahead and get rid of those.
| | 01:15 | Let's listen to that one more time.
| | 01:17 | (video playing)
| | 01:20 | Click, click right there.
| | 01:23 | To get rid of that, we'll simply double-
click again on our timeline to move our playhead
| | 01:28 | back in, and then we'll make our selection,
only this time we won't make our selection
| | 01:33 | quite as far, we'll just go ahead and select
most of the dead airspace right there in between.
| | 01:39 | Next, we'll go over to our Audio editing tab
and we'll go ahead and adjust the Volume down
| | 01:46 | By adjusting the volume down one click in
the middle of a clip, we get four audio edit
| | 01:52 | points automatically added for us.
| | 01:55 | This saves us a lot of time, instead of
having to right-click on our timeline and simply
| | 02:01 | add each edit point one by one.
| | 02:04 | If we add an edit point that we want to get
rid of, we can simply just use the Undo feature
| | 02:09 | to get rid of that.
| | 02:10 | Next, we'll go ahead and get rid of the
audio that's in between the selection by simply
| | 02:15 | grabbing the level and
dragging it down to the bottom.
| | 02:18 | Let's go ahead and expand our selection a
little bit and listen to see what this sounds like.
| | 02:24 | (video playing)
| | 02:26 | That's not so bad.
| | 02:30 | We may want to go ahead and make a slight
adjustment down here at the bottom and move
| | 02:34 | the selection handles in just a little bit, so we
get a little bit more of a fade effect in our audio.
| | 02:41 | Let's play that one more time.
| | 02:43 | (video playing)
| | 02:45 | Now we have a gap in our video, where we
have no audio going on here, and it's a little
| | 02:52 | bit of an awkward pause.
| | 02:54 | So we can go ahead and tighten that up by
once again double-clicking to bring our playhead
| | 02:59 | back in close, and then make a smaller
selection inside of our main selection.
| | 03:10 | Now we can simply use the Cut Tool to
get rid of some of that dead space.
| | 03:15 | We'll back up our playhead
and listen to it one more time.
| | 03:19 | (video playing)
| | 03:22 | Now we sound a little bit more natural in
our voice and we've tightened up our video
| | 03:27 | just a little bit.
| | 03:28 | Let's go ahead and jump to the next edit
point by pressing Ctrl+Right Bracket, and then
| | 03:33 | we'll go ahead and center our
timeline on that edit point.
| | 03:38 | Here we have two clips where
we've made an edit in between them.
| | 03:42 | Let's go ahead and make a small selection and
listen to the audio here and see what's going on.
| | 03:48 | (video playing)
| | 03:50 | It's not too bad, but there is a little
bit of an extra breath right in there.
| | 03:54 | So we'll go ahead and use the same technique, only
this time we'll use that technique across two clips.
| | 04:02 | So we'll make our selection inside of the
audio files, and then we'll use the Volume
| | 04:07 | down button, only this time we end up with
multiple edit points because we're at a clip barrier.
| | 04:15 | Now when we deselect by moving our playhead
out of the way, if we grab the left-hand side
| | 04:21 | and move that volume down, we can see that
it only moves part of the audio down, we've
| | 04:26 | to come over to the other side of the clip
and move that one down as well, and we can
| | 04:30 | adjust the handles ever so slightly to
make sure that we get a nice clean fade.
| | 04:38 | Now we'll preview that and see how it sounds.
| | 04:41 | (video playing)
| | 04:44 | We're still picking up a little
bit of that breath right in here.
| | 04:47 | So we'll go ahead and drag this downstream
just a little bit and maybe drag this edge
| | 04:51 | down just a little bit as well.
| | 04:55 | Let's play that one more time
and see if the breath is gone.
| | 04:59 | (video playing)
That's better.
| | 05:03 | Let's go ahead and jump to the next edit
point using Ctrl+Right Bracket, we'll make a
| | 05:07 | small selection and preview our audio.
| | 05:14 | (video playing)
| | 05:17 | So once again, we've got a little bit of a
gap and we've got a little bit of a tick.
| | 05:21 | You know how to go ahead and take care of this, so
go ahead and take care of that one on your own.
| | 05:25 | We'll go ahead and advance two of them
by pressing Command+Right Bracket twice.
| | 05:30 | Now we're down in between two more clips.
| | 05:34 | Let's go ahead and backup a
little bit and listen to this one.
| | 05:37 | (video playing)
| | 05:39 | Here, we can hear a small lip smack
right there; you can even see it.
| | 05:44 | Let's go ahead and use that
same technique to get rid of that.
| | 05:47 | So once again, we'll double-click, we'll make
a selection, we'll drop the audio Volume down
| | 05:55 | just a little bit to add all of
our edit points all at one time.
| | 05:59 | We'll deselect and then drag our audio levels
down and make the adjustments to our waveform.
| | 06:13 | Now we'll preview our work.
| | 06:15 | Backup our playhead and press the Play button.
| | 06:18 | (video playing)
| | 06:20 | We've cut off our audio just a little bit
too much, so move this handle in some and
| | 06:26 | we'll move the top part of
it just a little bit as well.
| | 06:28 | Let's preview that one more time.
| | 06:31 | (video playing)
| | 06:33 | We're still getting a little bit of a cut
off, so I'll move this in just a little bit
| | 06:37 | tighter, move this over a little bit more, backup
our playhead, once again hit the Spacebar to preview.
| | 06:44 | (video playing)
| | 06:47 | That sounds much smoother.
| | 06:49 | Let's go ahead and jump down to the next
marker by pressing Ctrl+Right Bracket. Now we'll
| | 06:56 | make a small selection here
and listen to this audio.
| | 07:00 | (video playing)
| | 07:04 | Here, we've got a little bit of a lip smack
and then a little bit of a breath that we
| | 07:09 | can hear right in there.
| | 07:11 | So let's once more make another selection,
use our Volume down button to get all of our
| | 07:20 | audio edit points, we'll go ahead and drop
that edit down, and make our adjustments,
| | 07:28 | and improve the artwork
by pressing the Spacebar.
| | 07:31 | (video playing)
| | 07:34 | We're still getting a little bit of that
breath right in there, so we'll adjust our audio
| | 07:39 | level over, we'll adjust the top over a
little bit and test it one more time.
| | 07:45 | (video playing)
| | 07:47 | That's better. Let's go ahead and
close up this gap a little bit.
| | 07:52 | We'll double-click in between and make a
smaller selection and crop out some of that audio.
| | 08:03 | Let's preview it one more time.
| | 08:05 | (video playing)
| | 08:09 | And that sounds much more natural.
| | 08:12 | There are a bunch of other markers
that have been added to this file.
| | 08:15 | With this basic technique of meticulously
going through your video file line by line
| | 08:21 | in order to make sure that you clean up any
audio abnormalities and tighten up any gaps
| | 08:26 | that have been left, your final
product will sound much more professional.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding background music| 00:00 | No chapter on editing audio would be complete
without being able to add a music track underneath
| | 00:06 | of our video to add additional interest and
excitement to our video and take it to the
| | 00:10 | next level, and Camtasia
Studio makes this extremely easy.
| | 00:14 | In fact, there's a bunch of royalty free
music that's already been included with your copy
| | 00:20 | of Camtasia, and it's located
here inside of the Library.
| | 00:23 | If you scroll all the way to the top, there's a whole
bunch of music selections that are available to you.
| | 00:29 | To preview some of them, all you need to
do is click on the small Plus sign next to
| | 00:32 | the folder and find one of the audio tracks that
you want to preview and simply double-click it.
| | 00:39 | (music playing)
| | 00:43 | After listening to a few bars, you can decide
if it's something that you might want to use.
| | 00:47 | Each of the different audio selections
that's been included with Camtasia also tells you
| | 00:52 | what's the duration of that track, so you can
closely match an audio track to the timeline,
| | 00:59 | because by clicking anywhere inside of your
timeline, you know the total length of time
| | 01:03 | that your file is.
| | 01:04 | So I've gone ahead and listened to a bunch
of these different audio files and I really
| | 01:09 | like this one here, the Music - Electropulse.
| | 01:12 | Well, go ahead and click on the Plus sign
next to that one, and then, because our overall
| | 01:17 | movie is 1 minute 4 seconds and 27 frames,
we'll need to select an audio file that's
| | 01:23 | long enough to cover up our entire track.
| | 01:25 | So we'll go ahead and select the Medium audio
file and we'll go ahead and preview it real
| | 01:29 | quick by simply double-clicking on it.
| | 01:33 | (music playing)
| | 01:39 | That's got a nice feel to it and
it should go great with our video.
| | 01:42 | So in order to add this music track
directly to our video, all we need to do is simply
| | 01:46 | drag the audio file down
here and drop it onto Track 2.
| | 01:51 | We can then adjust our track by dragging it
over here to the left-hand side to get it
| | 01:56 | to snap up to the left-hand edge.
| | 01:58 | We can go ahead and preview this and
see what it sounds like right now.
| | 02:02 | We'll do that by simply
pressing the Spacebar on our keyboard.
| | 02:06 | (video playing)
| | 02:11 | Now, that's pretty interesting, but there are
a couple of things going on here that are
| | 02:17 | going to make it a little bit
difficult for this to really work right here.
| | 02:21 | The first of which is that our video track does
not actually line up nicely with the theme music.
| | 02:27 | We can see in the audio waveform that there's
a bit of a crescendo right in this area and
| | 02:32 | it changes to a little bit different track.
| | 02:34 | Let's go ahead and move our playhead
down to that location and have a listen.
| | 02:39 | (music playing)
| | 02:44 | We're getting a lot more bass in at this point.
| | 02:46 | There's definitely a shift in the audio file.
| | 02:49 | So let's go ahead and make it so that when
we finish this first clip where we tell the
| | 02:53 | listener what they're going to hear and
then we begin talking about the tabs, which is
| | 02:57 | right here at this location, let's
get that to align up right here.
| | 03:00 | We'll do that by pressing Ctrl+A on our
keyboard to select all of our different audio tracks,
| | 03:06 | and then hold down the Shift key on your
keyboard and click on Track 2 to deselect it; that
| | 03:12 | way all of the clips on
Track 1 are still selected.
| | 03:16 | We'll go ahead and click and drag those clips
downstream until the first split of the first
| | 03:22 | clip aligns roughly with
this large peak right in here.
| | 03:27 | You can go ahead and back
your track up all the way.
| | 03:29 | I'm only going to back up a little bit and then
we'll go ahead and preview and see what it sounds like.
| | 03:33 | (music and video playing)
| | 03:48 | That's sounding much better.
| | 03:50 | The problem that we've got now is that our
music track is much louder than our speaking
| | 03:55 | voice and that will be pretty distracting.
| | 03:57 | So what we want to do is we want
to use a technique called ducking.
| | 04:01 | In order to do that all we need to do is go
ahead and select the music track; we'll turn
| | 04:07 | our Audio editing on by simply right-clicking
on the music track and selecting Edit audio.
| | 04:11 | Now, we can use the same tools and
techniques that we've already learned for editing our
| | 04:16 | audio tracks down here in our screencast.
| | 04:20 | The first thing we want to do is go ahead and add
an edit point right here at the transition point.
| | 04:26 | So we'll go ahead and right-click on the timeline
at that point and we'll select Add audio point.
| | 04:31 | We'll then move downstream just a little bit,
right-click, and add another audio point.
| | 04:37 | Now we have three audio points to work with.
| | 04:40 | We have the one that's at the beginning of
our timeline, we have the one at the end of
| | 04:44 | the intro, and then one just after the intro
starts as these basses are really starting to pick up.
| | 04:49 | Well, grab this last audio point and we'll
simply drag it down to lower the volume to
| | 04:55 | a very low level, maybe about 15% or 16%.
| | 04:59 | Then, we'll back up our playhead and
have a listen to what that sounds like.
| | 05:04 | (video playing)
| | 05:18 | That's sounding much better.
| | 05:20 | Our intro audio is still a little bit hot,
so we'll go ahead and pull this level down,
| | 05:26 | that way the audio starts at a higher level
and then it starts to decrescendo as it's
| | 05:30 | getting closer and closer to
the time when we begin speaking.
| | 05:33 | It may take a little bit of adjustment to
get these levels exactly right, but with a
| | 05:38 | little bit of playing around with it, you'll be
able to get it to work, just the way you want it.
| | 05:41 | Let's go ahead and back it up and play it
one more time to see what it sounds like.
| | 05:45 | (video playing)
| | 05:59 | That's much better.
| | 06:00 | This area here where we've lowered the volume
down to a very low level is that ducking effect.
| | 06:06 | We're essentially dropping this level of
audio down to a low enough level that this other
| | 06:11 | audio here is the predominant
audio in the track at that point.
| | 06:15 | Now, as we move our attention down here
towards the end, we'll simply double-click on the
| | 06:20 | timeline to move our playhead down, and then
we'll go ahead and zoom in on the timeline
| | 06:24 | down there a little bit so we can get a
little bit closer look as to what's going on.
| | 06:28 | Once we're finished speaking, there's no
reason why we can't start to bring that audio track
| | 06:32 | up for the outro of our video.
| | 06:34 | Before we're finished, we'll go ahead and
we'll add a title slide that will end up down
| | 06:39 | here in a later movie.
| | 06:41 | But for now, we'll go ahead and add a new
edit point right here where we stop speaking.
| | 06:47 | So once again, we'll right-
click and click Add audio point.
| | 06:51 | We'll right-click on it again and add another
audio point, so we've got our two points to
| | 06:55 | add a nice crescendo.
| | 06:56 | We'll grab the second point and drag that
audio level up, and we can even drag it downstream
| | 07:02 | a little bit, so we get our audio to show
up at the right point where we want it.
| | 07:06 | Let's go ahead and back that
up and see what it sounds like.
| | 07:12 | (video playing)
| | 07:18 | And right in here we have a nice cymbal that's
coming in and it's really changing the tone.
| | 07:23 | But we can go ahead and
end our video at that point.
| | 07:26 | So we'll go ahead and drag our
timeline right into that location.
| | 07:30 | We'll go ahead and use the Split tool to
split that audio track right at that point.
| | 07:35 | We can then click one time on the end of our
music file and simply press the Delete key
| | 07:39 | on our keyboard to get rid of it.
| | 07:41 | We'll go ahead and scrub our timeline back
just a little bit and have one more listen.
| | 07:47 | (video playing)
| | 07:50 | Now, we'll go ahead and add an
audio fade right here at the end.
| | 07:57 | So in order to do that with our playhead
right there at the end, we'll go ahead and drag
| | 08:01 | up the In point and then we'll use our Fade
out tool to create a nice fade effect there
| | 08:06 | at the end, and let's
preview that one more time.
| | 08:10 | We'll double-click to back up our
timeline and we'll see what it sounds like.
| | 08:16 | (video playing)
| | 08:20 | It's sounding great!
| | 08:24 | And now you have a nice music
track as a backer to your video.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Working with Media and EffectsImporting media| 00:00 | There are many times when you want to
incorporate your own media files, either images, audio,
| | 00:05 | or video into your Camtasia project.
| | 00:08 | In this movie we'll show you how to import
those three types of media directly into Camtasia
| | 00:13 | Studio so you can use them
inside of your projects.
| | 00:16 | To begin, make sure that you have your Clip
Bin selected and then go up to the top and
| | 00:22 | click on the button that says Import media.
| | 00:25 | If you're following along, in the Chapter06>
01 Import Media Project folder you should find
| | 00:30 | some additional files in there.
| | 00:33 | The first one that we'll
import is the logo.png.
| | 00:37 | All we need to do is click one time on the
logo.png file and then click the Open button.
| | 00:42 | The PNG file is automatically imported directly
into our Clip Bin and a new category has been
| | 00:49 | created for us for all of our images.
| | 00:51 | Now, when it comes to importing images, you can
import bitmap images using the .bmp file extension.
| | 00:59 | You can import GIF images with the .gif
file extension, JPEGs with .jpg, and PNG files
| | 01:07 | with the .png file extension.
| | 01:10 | Next, let's go ahead and import an audio file.
| | 01:13 | To do this all we need to do is go up to the
Import media button again and this time we'll
| | 01:19 | select Clapping.mp3.
| | 01:20 | We'll then click the Open button, and if we
scroll down in our Clip Bin, we can see that
| | 01:26 | the audio file Clapping.mp3 has
been imported into our project.
| | 01:32 | The types of audio files that you're able to
incorporate inside of your Camtasia project
| | 01:36 | are WAV files, MP3s, and WMAs.
| | 01:40 | Next, let's go ahead and import a little
piece of video that we may want to include.
| | 01:46 | Before we do you'll need to make sure that you
have the QuickTime plug-in installed on your system.
| | 01:52 | If you don't have a copy of QuickTime, all
you need to do is open up your browser, go
| | 01:56 | to www.apple.com/quicktime and
download the free QuickTime plug-in.
| | 02:03 | After you've finished installing the plug-in, you'll
need to restart Windows before this import will work.
| | 02:09 | After you've done that, go ahead up
and click on the Import media button.
| | 02:13 | Then simply select the EC_Intro.mov
file and click the Open button.
| | 02:20 | Once again, if we scroll down in our Clip
Bin, we can see the EC_Intro.mov file has
| | 02:26 | been added to our Clip Bin.
| | 02:28 | Now, when it comes to importing video files, there
is a wide array of different options that you have.
| | 02:34 | You can of course import CAMREC files, which
is the native video file format that Camtasia
| | 02:38 | Recorder records in; you can also import AVIs, MP4s,
MPGs, MPEGs, WMVs, MOVs, and SWFs or SWF files.
| | 02:51 | Now, two things to note, first of all about
the MOV files or the QuickTime files; Camtasia
| | 02:57 | Studio will only support QuickTime files that have
two tracks; the video track and the audio track.
| | 03:03 | So if you have a QuickTime file that has
multiple tracks, you may need to make sure that you
| | 03:08 | re-export that file so that
it only has two tracks in it.
| | 03:11 | Secondly, when it comes to SWF files or Flash
files, only SWF files that have been created
| | 03:16 | from Jing or from a previous version of Camtasia
Studio can be imported directly into Camtasia Studio.
| | 03:23 | So if you create a project inside of Flash
and I want to export it out as a SWF and then
| | 03:28 | import it back into Camtasia, you may run
into difficulties and it may not work for you.
| | 03:33 | We can preview any of these files by simply
double-clicking on it right in our Clip Bin.
| | 03:37 | (clip playing)
| | 03:41 | The media file will preview
over here in our main window.
| | 03:45 | If you want to listen to what the audio file
sounds like, just go ahead and double-click on it.
| | 03:50 | (clip playing)
| | 03:54 | And if we scroll up, we can double-click on
the logo.png and we can see that the logo
| | 03:59 | has appeared here in our screen.
| | 04:01 | Let's go ahead and add this logo directly
onto our timeline so it can act as a watermark
| | 04:07 | throughout our entire movie.
| | 04:09 | To do this all we need to do is drag the
image down into our timeline on its own track and
| | 04:15 | then position it where we want it in our movie,
and grab the right-hand edge of it and stretch
| | 04:20 | it out to the full length of our movie.
| | 04:23 | Then, we position the logo on-screen to
where we want it to appear throughout our movie.
| | 04:28 | In this case we'll go ahead and simply drag it down
here into the lower left-hand corner of our video.
| | 04:35 | Now our logo will appear throughput our
entire video and will be overlaid on top of any of
| | 04:40 | our video content.
| | 04:42 | If you want to add a little additional
interest to your logo, you can go ahead and click one
| | 04:46 | time on it, click the More Menu
and select Visual Properties.
| | 04:50 | Go ahead and scroll down and
check the box for Drop shadow.
| | 04:54 | A nice drop shadow effect will be applied
to your logo, and when you deselect, it will
| | 04:59 | make the logo stand right
off our video a little bit.
| | 05:02 | So when you're going through importing your
files, all you need to do is make sure you
| | 05:06 | go up to the Import media button and you can
import your own images, audio, and video files
| | 05:10 | to incorporate in your project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Backing up media and restoring project files| 00:00 | In the last movie we imported a variety
of different media files directly into
| | 00:05 | our Camtasia project.
| | 00:07 | And as you continue working on your
project, you're going to be adding a lot
| | 00:11 | more media effects and edits to your
project and it will be a good idea to know
| | 00:15 | how to make a backup of your entire
project, including all the media that you've
| | 00:19 | added, and then re-import that
project back into Camtasia Studio in case
| | 00:24 | anything ever happens to your project.
| | 00:26 | So in this movie I want to step through
that process with you before we get any
| | 00:30 | further into working with media.
| | 00:31 | To begin, all you need to do is make
sure that you have your Camtasia project
| | 00:35 | open, and here we can see in our Clip
Bin that we've imported those three pieces
| | 00:39 | of media from the last movie.
| | 00:40 | Next, all we need to do is go up here to the
File menu and select Export project as zip.
| | 00:47 | The Export Project As Zip window will
appear and it will ask us where do we want
| | 00:52 | to save our project.
| | 00:53 | Well, go ahead and click the Folder icon
so that we can navigate on our computer
| | 00:57 | to the appropriate
location for us to save our file.
| | 00:59 | In this case, I've navigated to my
Chapter06>02 Zip Media Project folder.
| | 01:04 | We can then give our project a name;
| | 01:07 | I'll go ahead and accept
the default name of tabs.zip.
| | 01:10 | Go ahead and click the Save button and
then make sure that this button right
| | 01:14 | here is checked, Include all
files from Clip Bin in zip.
| | 01:17 | That way any media that we've imported
into our project will get included as
| | 01:21 | part of this zip file.
| | 01:23 | Go ahead and click the OK button and
Camtasia will go ahead and package up your project.
| | 01:29 | Next, let's go ahead and open up a brand
-new Camtasia project that doesn't have
| | 01:34 | any files in it and then we
can import that project in.
| | 01:37 | To do that, we'll simply go up to
the File menu and select New project.
| | 01:40 | If we're given a warning about saving
any changes, we haven't made any changes
| | 01:44 | to this document, so we can simply
say No to close that document out.
| | 01:48 | Now we have a brand-new Camtasia
project that has no files located here in our
| | 01:54 | Clip Bin and nothing on our timeline.
| | 01:56 | Let's go ahead and import that
zip file that we just created.
| | 01:59 | We do that by going back up here to
the File Menu and go down near the
| | 02:03 | bottom and there is an option for Import
zipped project, go ahead and click on that object.
| | 02:08 | Then, we need to navigate to the
zip file that we want to import.
| | 02:12 | We do that by simply clicking on the
Folder icon here, we navigate to our
| | 02:16 | Chapter06>02 Zip Media Project, or
whichever folder that you created your zip
| | 02:21 | file in, and select the tabs.zip
file that we just created.
| | 02:25 | Then, go ahead and click the Open button.
| | 02:27 | If you want to import your project into a
specific directory, you can select that here;
| | 02:32 | I'll go ahead and accept the default,
and make sure that you have the checkbox
| | 02:36 | set for Open project after import.
| | 02:38 | We'll go ahead and click the OK button.
| | 02:40 | Our project is imported and now we
have our project back from our backup,
| | 02:45 | including all the media files
that we added in the previous movie.
| | 02:49 | It's a good idea to periodically make a
zipped backup of your project and save
| | 02:53 | it in a safe place, that way if
anything happens, you're able to get your work
| | 02:57 | back quickly and easily and continue working.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Clip Bin| 00:00 | We've already seen how we can import
media directly into our Clip Bin and then
| | 00:05 | add that media down into our timeline.
| | 00:07 | In this movie I want to take a few
minutes to just go ahead and look at some
| | 00:12 | of the other options that you have
with working with the media inside of your
| | 00:16 | Clip Bin so that you can be a little bit
more efficient at how you work with those files.
| | 00:21 | And the first thing to look at is, if
you move your mouse inside of the Clip Bin
| | 00:25 | area and simply right-click, you
can see that one of the options that's
| | 00:28 | generally selected by default is Show in groups.
| | 00:30 | Now, if yours isn't already selected,
then you're going to have the other
| | 00:34 | view that we're going to be going
to, but for right now I am going to
| | 00:38 | deselect Show in groups, and now
instead of having all those nice groups set
| | 00:42 | up for each different type of media,
now all of our files for our Clip Bin
| | 00:46 | are all in one view.
| | 00:47 | This makes it a little bit easier to
find all of our files if we only have a few
| | 00:50 | files in our Clip Bin and we don't need
to worry about them being separated out
| | 00:53 | into different groups.
| | 00:55 | Next, we can look at how to
change the view of our Clip Bin.
| | 00:58 | We can do that by once again right-
clicking inside of our Clip Bin and this time
| | 01:03 | we'll go down to the View menu.
| | 01:05 | The default is generally set to
Thumbnails, which is what we're seeing right
| | 01:09 | now, but if we select the other option,
Details, the preview icons for our
| | 01:13 | clips disappear and now we have a little bit
more information about each of the different files.
| | 01:18 | We can see the difference between movie
files, audio files, and image files, and
| | 01:24 | we have all of those types
set out over here on the right.
| | 01:26 | Once you're in the Detail view, you can
of course do all the things that you can
| | 01:30 | normally do in Windows, like click on
the top of a column in order to sort all
| | 01:35 | of the information by that type of data.
| | 01:37 | If you prefer working in this mode,
go ahead and leave it like that.
| | 01:40 | I am going to go ahead and
change mine back to the Icon view.
| | 01:43 | I'll go ahead and right-click in the
Clip Bin and then come back to View and
| | 01:47 | select Thumbnails again.
| | 01:48 | I prefer to work in this view,
because it gives me a preview of my files.
| | 01:52 | Next, we can see some additional
information if we right-click on an item in our
| | 01:56 | Clip Bin and then select
Properties from the dropdown menu.
| | 02:00 | A Properties window will appear and
give us detailed information about
| | 02:04 | that particular clip.
| | 02:06 | Here we can see the length of time that
this particular movie is, the size, the
| | 02:11 | date and time it was last modified and a
whole wealth of additional information.
| | 02:15 | Sometimes this is very helpful when
you're trying to find just the right piece
| | 02:19 | of media that you want to add into your project.
| | 02:21 | Finally, you can clean up your Clip
Bin by removing any extraneous files that
| | 02:27 | you're not currently using within your project.
| | 02:29 | Right now we have our logo.png file
added into our project, but we haven't added
| | 02:35 | Clapping.mp3 or our EC_Intro movie file.
| | 02:39 | We can go ahead and clean up our Clip
Bin automatically by right-clicking in the
| | 02:43 | Clip Bin and selecting Remove unused clips.
| | 02:46 | This will get rid of any of those
clips that we haven't used and it will keep
| | 02:50 | our project file nice and clean and easy to use.
| | 02:53 | The Clip Bin is a great tool for keeping
all of your project files organized and
| | 02:58 | ready for you to use and
incorporate into your project at any time.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with callouts| 00:00 | If you want to draw your user's attention
to a particular portion of your screen or
| | 00:05 | highlight some piece of information on
your screen, then callouts is the way to go.
| | 00:10 | In this movie we'll step through the basic
process of adding a callout and configuring
| | 00:14 | it to highlight a
particular area of your screen.
| | 00:17 | If you're following along, I've got the 04
Callout Project open and I've gone ahead and
| | 00:22 | added some markers to help us easily
identify the locations to add our callouts.
| | 00:26 | We'll go ahead and use the Ctrl+Right
Bracket key on our keyboard to jump to the first
| | 00:31 | callout location, and then we'll go ahead
and zoom in on our timeline a few times to
| | 00:37 | make sure that we can clearly see the
area that we're going to be working.
| | 00:40 | The Callouts tab is located right here, and
when the tab opens up, you can see a couple
| | 00:45 | of shapes that are available for us to add.
| | 00:47 | To add a shape all you need to do is simply
click one time on the shape and that shape
| | 00:51 | gets added directly to your timeline.
| | 00:54 | To get rid of a callout, all you need to do
is make sure that callout is selected on your
| | 00:58 | timeline and then press the Delete
key on your keyboard to get rid of it.
| | 01:02 | To see some of the additional callouts, you
can either scroll down row by row or you can
| | 01:07 | click this small widget right here and pop
open a larger window that shows you all of
| | 01:12 | the available callouts that
are built into Camtasia Studio.
| | 01:16 | For this first callout, I'd like to go
ahead and just use this simple rectangle.
| | 01:20 | So go ahead and click one time on the simple
rectangle and you'll see that it appears here
| | 01:24 | in our timeline and it
appears here on our canvas.
| | 01:28 | The next thing we're going to want to do is to go
ahead and add some configuration to this callout.
| | 01:32 | I would like to begin by clicking the
dropdown menu for Fill and selecting No fill; that
| | 01:38 | way we'll just end up with a rectangular box
that we'll be able to use to highlight over
| | 01:42 | top of our menu item that we're selecting.
| | 01:45 | Next, let's treat the border.
| | 01:47 | We'll go over and click the dropdown menu for
Border, and by default the No border option
| | 01:53 | has been selected.
| | 01:54 | So we'll click that option so that the
border of our rectangle will be displayed.
| | 01:58 | Next, we'll change the color.
| | 02:00 | So go ahead and click the dropdown menu once
more on the Border and I would like to select
| | 02:05 | this orange primary color over here on the
right-hand side, go ahead and click one time
| | 02:10 | on that to color the border orange.
| | 02:12 | Next, let's go back to the Border dropdown
menu and at the bottom of the menu there's
| | 02:17 | an option for Width.
| | 02:19 | I would like to set the Width to about 3 pixels,
that way the border appears a little bit brighter.
| | 02:25 | Now, let's go ahead and
move our border into place.
| | 02:28 | We'll do that by simply dragging the
rectangle on our canvas to the approximate location.
| | 02:34 | We'll then use the adjustment handles to
appropriately size the rectangular box, to get it approximately
| | 02:39 | over top of the area that we want to work in.
| | 02:41 | Now, in order to make sure that our callout
is in the exact right location, we'll click
| | 02:47 | the dropdown menu that says, Shrink to fit
and we'll increase the zoom level to 200%.
| | 02:52 | Now, in order to get up to the location
where our callout is, we'll need to change over
| | 02:57 | to the Pan Mode till we get the Hand icon,
and then we can click and drag until we're
| | 03:02 | able to see the area that we want to work in.
| | 03:04 | Now, we'll toggle back to our Pointer tool
and we can make our final adjustments to make
| | 03:09 | sure that our callout is
aligned exactly where we want it.
| | 03:13 | The next step is to make sure that the callout appears
on screen until the right location in our timeline.
| | 03:19 | We can do that by starting off by dragging
our playhead along our timeline, until we
| | 03:26 | see the menu item disappear, then we can use
the Left and Right arrow keys on our keyboard
| | 03:31 | to nudge our playhead frame by frame until we get
to the exact location where the menu disappears.
| | 03:37 | What I found works best to make it so that
the border will snap in properly is find this
| | 03:43 | location and then press one time on the Right
arrow key to jump until the menu just disappears.
| | 03:50 | Now we'll go ahead and trim up
our callout to the proper length.
| | 03:53 | Well, come down here to the right-hand edge,
and just as we saw that we could edit video
| | 03:58 | like this, we'll click on the end of the
clip and simply drag it right up until it snaps
| | 04:02 | into our timeline.
| | 04:04 | Now we can back up and press
the Spacebar to preview our work.
| | 04:10 | (video playing)
That looks great!
| | 04:14 | Let's go ahead and press Ctrl+Right Bracket
and jump to the next location for our callout.
| | 04:19 | We can go ahead and preview a little bit
of the audio to see what's going on here.
| | 04:23 | (video playing)
| | 04:25 | So we've got a new tab that's been created.
| | 04:28 | Let's go ahead and press Ctrl+Left Bracket to
jump back to the insertion point, and we'll
| | 04:34 | switch over to our Pan tool once again, and
drag our screen over to the correct location.
| | 04:40 | Next, we'll go ahead and instead of having
to rebuild that callout again, we'll simply
| | 04:45 | click one time on the Simple Rectangle 1 and
press Ctrl+C on your keyboard in order to copy it.
| | 04:51 | Next, we'll come down here and click right
underneath of where our playhead is and press
| | 04:55 | Ctrl+V on our keyboard to paste in
that same callout that we just used.
| | 05:00 | Since our Hand tool is still selected, we may
need to move our screen over just a little bit.
| | 05:06 | Toggle back into our Pointer tool and drag that
copied callout over top of our new tab location.
| | 05:12 | You may need to jump back and forth between
your Hand tool and your Pointer tool in order
| | 05:16 | to get your screen set up just right.
| | 05:18 | We'll go ahead and adjust our callout so
that it fully selects the New Tab location and
| | 05:23 | now, we'll go ahead and preview our video to know how
long we need to have our rectangle appear on screen.
| | 05:29 | (video playing)
| | 05:33 | Right there sounds like a
good location for it to end at.
| | 05:36 | We can go ahead and zoom out on
our project just a little bit.
| | 05:39 | We can see clearly in our
timeline where the audio file drops off.
| | 05:43 | So we'll adjust our playhead just a little
bit, grab the end of our second callout, and
| | 05:48 | drag it down into the desired location.
| | 05:50 | Let's go ahead and back
that up and preview our work.
| | 05:55 | (video playing)
| | 06:01 | That's looking great!
| | 06:02 | You can repeat this process over
and over using this basic technique.
| | 06:06 | I've gone ahead and created some additional
markers for you to find some additional locations
| | 06:11 | where you may want to add some callouts.
| | 06:13 | Let's go ahead and use the Ctrl+Right
Bracket arrow to jump to the next location and
| | 06:17 | then press Ctrl+Right Bracket again.
| | 06:20 | At our new location, at approximately 37
seconds in, we'll need a different type of callout.
| | 06:26 | Let's go ahead and zoom our project back out
to Shrink to fit so we can see the overall
| | 06:30 | screen, and then press the Spacebar in order
to preview what's going on at this location.
| | 06:37 | (video playing)
| | 06:41 | So at this location we want to let the users
know what the keyboard commands that we're
| | 06:46 | calling out are, so that they can see them
on screen, and we'll use a different type
| | 06:50 | of callout for that.
| | 06:51 | So let's use the Ctrl+Left Bracket on our
keyboard to jump back to that insertion point,
| | 06:56 | and in the Callouts tab, we'll once again
click the dropdown menu here in order to see
| | 07:01 | all of our different options.
| | 07:03 | Down near the bottom there's some
special callouts that we can use.
| | 07:06 | One of which is the Gray Keystrokes.
| | 07:07 | Go ahead and click one time on that and a Gray
Keystroke will be inserted directly into our movie.
| | 07:14 | We can then use the text field here on our
Callouts window in order to create the keyboard
| | 07:20 | command that we want to have appear on screen.
| | 07:22 | To do that, simply click inside the Enter
keystroke or combination and press and hold
| | 07:27 | your Ctrl+Shift key down on your keyboard.
| | 07:30 | Move your mouse over the top
of the graphic and click on it.
| | 07:33 | That will activate that keystroke and
make it so that the keys appear in place.
| | 07:37 | Now we can go ahead and click again to select
our callout and use one of the corner handles
| | 07:42 | to shrink up our callout so that it appears
at a more appropriate size, and we can move
| | 07:47 | it into a more desirable location.
| | 07:49 | You can use the Snapping Guides to identify
when your callout is centered on your page.
| | 07:54 | The next thing we need to do now is to make
sure that our keystroke is appearing on screen
| | 07:58 | at the right time.
| | 08:00 | We can do that grabbing the left-hand side
of our callout and dragging it in until it
| | 08:05 | snaps right to our insertion marker.
| | 08:08 | We can then preview by pressing the Spacebar and
figure out where we need to stop the keystroke.
| | 08:13 | (video playing)
| | 08:21 | So it will be great to have that keystroke appear
all the way up until we've clicked on the links.
| | 08:25 | So we'll simply grab the right-hand edge
now and drag that part down until it overlaps
| | 08:30 | about right there.
| | 08:31 | Now, let's preview it one more time
and make sure we've got it right.
| | 08:35 | We'll back up our playhead, press the
Spacebar, and see what it looks like.
| | 08:38 | (video playing)
That looks great!
| | 08:48 | Now you have the tools you need to be able
to add callouts into your project and direct
| | 08:52 | your users to the specific points in your
project where you want them to pay attention to.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Animating visual properties| 00:00 | Another way to add visual interest and draw
your learner's attention to the action on
| | 00:04 | screen is by using animations of your
objects that you have on your canvas.
| | 00:10 | In this movie, we'll step through the process of
creating animations inside of Camtasia Studio.
| | 00:15 | To begin go ahead and press the Ctrl+
Right Bracket key in the 05 Animate Project
| | 00:21 | in order to jump to the first marker.
| | 00:23 | Then go ahead and zoom in a couple of clicks
on the zoom in tool and center our project.
| | 00:28 | So we can clearly see
this area in our timeline.
| | 00:30 | We'll next want to go ahead and zoom in on our
canvas by clicking the zoom tool and selecting 100%.
| | 00:37 | We'll then use the Pan tool to reposition our
screen and jump back to our selection arrow.
| | 00:43 | Let's go ahead and preview this section of
video to see what's going on so we know exactly,
| | 00:48 | what we're trying to animate.
| | 00:49 | We'll go ahead and press the Spacebar on our
keyboard to go ahead and preview this section of video.
| | 00:54 | (video playing)
| | 01:01 | So in this area, we want to have the arrows
so that it's following the mouse as the mouse
| | 01:06 | is clicking on these two different tabs, so
we wanted to rotate from this left hand angle
| | 01:11 | over to the right hand side and
then rotate back over to the left.
| | 01:15 | At all of the appropriate times.
| | 01:17 | We'll go ahead and back up our playhead to the
beginning and then slowly scrub our playhead
| | 01:22 | forward until we see the mouse
in the location of the new tab.
| | 01:27 | We then note that we have our playhead set
at the ending point for our animation and
| | 01:33 | we're ready to begin.
| | 01:34 | We'll go ahead and click one time on the
object that we want to animate and then, click the
| | 01:39 | More dropdown menu and
select Visual Properties.
| | 01:43 | Any of the items inside of the Visual
Properties tab including any of the physical movements
| | 01:48 | of an object that's selected
on screen can be animated.
| | 01:51 | To create the animation all we need to
do is click the Add animation button.
| | 01:56 | A new visual animations bar will appear underneath
of the object in the track that we have selected.
| | 02:03 | The ending point of the
animation is located right here.
| | 02:08 | So what we'll need to do next is to set the
end state of our object in the animation.
| | 02:13 | So we'll come up to the object we'll use
the rotate control handle to rotate our arrow
| | 02:18 | over, so that it's
pointing to the right-hand tab.
| | 02:21 | You'll notice that as we did this rotation
over here in the Visual Properties window,
| | 02:27 | the Z axis rotation has changed to 74 indicating the
amount of rotation that we've applied to this object.
| | 02:35 | Now we can back up our playhead until we see the
location and time when we want our animation to start.
| | 02:42 | To get a fine tune adjustment, we can click
on our playhead one time and then use the
| | 02:48 | left and right arrows on our keyboard to
move the timeline one frame at a time, until we
| | 02:53 | just see the mouse begin to move.
| | 02:56 | Then we can move back one
click with the left arrow.
| | 02:59 | Now we have our starting point for animation.
| | 03:03 | In order to set the timing for animation all
we do is we grab the left hand grabber handle
| | 03:09 | of our animation icon and drag it over to
the right, so that it snaps in place right
| | 03:15 | at the edge of our playhead.
| | 03:17 | We'll go ahead and back up our playhead a little
bit and press the Spacebar to preview our animation.
| | 03:22 | (video playing)
| | 03:25 | That looked really good.
| | 03:27 | Now we want to scrub our playhead down a
little bit further in our timeline in order to find
| | 03:32 | the location of the next animation.
| | 03:34 | We'll go ahead and scrub down to about right
here when we can see that the cursor has moved
| | 03:39 | over to the next tab is
about ready to begin clicking.
| | 03:43 | Now that we know that this is the ending
point of our animation, we can go ahead and once
| | 03:47 | again click the Add animation button to add
the animation icon, down here to our timeline.
| | 03:54 | We'll set the ending state of our objects
rotation by clicking the rotate button and
| | 03:59 | dragging it over to the left.
| | 04:01 | Once again, you can see that as we rotate
the object we're getting an update in the
| | 04:06 | values over here on the left-hand side.
| | 04:08 | Now that we have our rotation set correctly.
| | 04:11 | We can adjust the timing
for the rotation to start.
| | 04:14 | We'll backup our playhead just a little bit
until we see the arrow begin to move, just
| | 04:19 | about right there.
| | 04:20 | So once again we'll come down and we'll
adjust the timing for the total animation to snap
| | 04:25 | right to our playhead.
| | 04:26 | Let's go ahead and back-up just
a little bit and see how we did.
| | 04:29 | Go ahead and press the
Spacebar to preview the animation.
| | 04:32 | (video playing)
| | 04:38 | That's looking pretty good.
| | 04:39 | Let's get one more preview
and preview the entire project.
| | 04:42 | We can jump back to the beginning of our clip by
pressing the Ctrl+Left Bracket on our Keyboard
| | 04:47 | to jump back to that marker that we have set
and then we'll preview by pressing the Spacebar
| | 04:52 | and see how this animation
looks with everything altogether.
| | 04:57 | (video playing)
That looks great.
| | 05:04 | Our user's attention will be drawn directly
to the action that we're showing on screen.
| | 05:09 | And now with these basic skills you're able
to animate any object that appears on screen.
| | 05:14 | Know that you can animate any of these parameters
that you find over here in the Visual Properties section.
| | 05:20 | You can even animate any movements that you
create by simply dragging objects around or
| | 05:25 | rotating them directly on the canvas.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating Zoom-n-Pan effects| 00:00 | Another, way to really draw your learner's
attention to a particular action that's taking
| | 00:05 | place on screen, is to
use a Zoom-n-Pan affect.
| | 00:09 | The Zoom effect allows us to zoom
into a particular area of the screen.
| | 00:14 | The Pan effect allows us to move that
zoomed area to another location on the screen.
| | 00:20 | The combination of these two effects are very
powerful when you're creating an instructional video.
| | 00:26 | If you're following along I'm in the 06 Zoom-
Pan Project and we're going to jump to the first
| | 00:31 | marker that we've got on screen by
pressing the Ctrl+Right Bracket key.
| | 00:36 | Then let's go ahead and preview the action
so we can see exactly, the type of zoom and
| | 00:40 | pan that we're going to want
to use here in this situation.
| | 00:43 | Notice that there are
three markers set up on screen.
| | 00:45 | Let's go ahead and press the
Spacebar to preview the action.
| | 00:48 | (video playing)
| | 01:04 | So in this case at the first marker, we're
going to want to create a Zoom effect to zoom
| | 01:09 | in to this region of the screen, so that
when we have the drop-down menu selected, only
| | 01:14 | this area of the screen is showing to really
draw our learner's attention to that section.
| | 01:18 | Then, at the next marker we're focused
on the new tab that's just been created.
| | 01:23 | So we'll create a Pan effect to
move the screen over to this area.
| | 01:27 | Finally, at the last marker when we close
the tab we want to have our screen zoom back
| | 01:33 | out to our full view of our video.
| | 01:36 | Let's go ahead and press the Ctrl+Left Bracket
a few times, so we can jump back to the first
| | 01:40 | marker and begin
creating our Zoom-n-Pan effect.
| | 01:44 | We'll do this by simply
clicking on the Zoom-n-Pan tab.
| | 01:47 | The Zoom-n-Pan tab gives a very
easy way to create this effect.
| | 01:52 | All we need to do is make sure that our
playhead is at the location for our first effect and
| | 01:57 | then we simply resize this
initial window right here.
| | 02:02 | We'll go ahead and zoom in to about that location;
that's all there is to creating that first Zoom effect.
| | 02:08 | We can then move our playhead down to the
next location where we need to have our Pan
| | 02:13 | effect take place.
| | 02:15 | We'll simply move our cursor inside of the
selected area and drag it over into the desired
| | 02:21 | location for the Pan effect.
| | 02:23 | Finally, we'll move our playhead down
to the location of the third marker.
| | 02:28 | At this point we want our screen to
zoom back out to our full screen view.
| | 02:32 | We can do this by either dragging the handles
back out to their full size or we can scroll
| | 02:39 | down a little bit in the window and click on
the button to Scale media to fit entire canvas.
| | 02:45 | We then may need to make a slight adjustment to make
sure that our campus is centered properly on our screen.
| | 02:51 | Once that's done we have all
three effects ready to go.
| | 02:55 | Let's go ahead and backup our playhead to
just before the first marker and we'll go
| | 02:59 | ahead and press the Spacebar to
preview all of our Zoom-n-Pan effects.
| | 03:04 | (video playing)
| | 03:23 | And now we have our Zoom-n-Pan
effects and they look great.
| | 03:27 | Anytime you want to create one of these
effects, just make sure that you set your playhead
| | 03:31 | at the location that you
want the effect to take place.
| | 03:34 | Go to the Zoom-n-Pan tab and then adjust the
settings in order to make your desired effect.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using SmartFocus| 00:00 | In an earlier movie, we talked about using
various different techniques for applying the effect
| | 00:06 | of SmartFocus within our movie.
| | 00:08 | In this movie, were going to open up the file
that I went in and recorded and look at the
| | 00:13 | effect of SmartFocus on this particular movie.
| | 00:16 | Now the only thing that I've done to this
movie is I've added a couple of markers in
| | 00:20 | here to assist us with our editing portions,
otherwise this is the straight raw CAMREC
| | 00:25 | and CAMPROJ file that were
created from the recording.
| | 00:28 | I'm going to go ahead and click on the
small widget right here at the bottom of Track 2
| | 00:32 | to open up and show us our animations.
| | 00:36 | These small animation icons which we've
seen before are the SmartFocus animations that
| | 00:41 | have automatically been added in to
our timeline for us by Camtasia Studio.
| | 00:46 | Let's go ahead and play the video and see how
Camtasia has applied SmartFocus to this video.
| | 00:53 | You can watch the timeline as it moves along
to see the locations where it synchronizes to
| | 00:57 | the various different animations. We'll
go ahead and press Play and watch the video.
| | 01:03 | (video playing)
| | 03:02 | We will go ahead and stop the video and back
up to the beginning and look at the various
| | 03:07 | different SmartFocus effects that got created
and we'll go through and edit a few of them
| | 03:11 | to improve the overall quality of our video.
| | 03:14 | In general, Camtasia Studio did a fairly good
job of going in and identifying those locations
| | 03:19 | where a user may be interested in paying
attention to the specific actions on screen.
| | 03:25 | Back here at the beginning though there's
a SmartFocus animation that got created.
| | 03:28 | However, it doesn't really do much at this
location, so we'll simply double-click on
| | 03:33 | that animation to bring up
the Visual Properties window.
| | 03:36 | Here we can negate the entire action of
whatever got created with this particular SmartFocus
| | 03:42 | effect by simply hitting
the Reset button right here.
| | 03:46 | By clicking the Reset button it
effectively turns off that navigation.
| | 03:50 | If you wanted to, you could even click one
time on navigation and then press the Delete
| | 03:54 | key on your keyboard to
get rid of it altogether.
| | 03:57 | Let's use the Ctrl+Right Bracket key on
our keyboard to be able to jump to the first
| | 04:00 | marker where our first animation took place.
| | 04:03 | This animation came off just fine.
| | 04:06 | What Camtasia did was it
zoomed in to 100% of our view.
| | 04:11 | We can tell that over here, in our Visual
Properties window because we can see the scale
| | 04:15 | got set back up to 100%.
| | 04:18 | Let's go ahead and move forward
and look at the next animation.
| | 04:21 | I didn't set a marker at this location.
| | 04:23 | But we can go ahead and scrub our
playhead right up to the animation.
| | 04:26 | At this particular animation Camtasia seem
to be having a little bit of difficulty in
| | 04:32 | identifying exactly, what was the most
important feature for this portion of the video.
| | 04:37 | If we scroll back a little bit, we can see
that we started off where we've typed in the
| | 04:41 | URL and then it tried to figure out
exactly, where we were wanting to go.
| | 04:46 | So it zoomed in over on where we
were moving our mouse on the scrollbar.
| | 04:50 | We can get rid of this particular animation.
| | 04:52 | By once again double-clicking on it to select
it and then hit the Reset button in our Visual
| | 04:58 | Properties window, that will
reset that particular animation.
| | 05:02 | Now where we have the next marker that we
can access by pressing Ctrl+Right Bracket
| | 05:06 | is the location where we
want to begin playing the video.
| | 05:10 | This would be a great place to be
zoomed in tightly on the video.
| | 05:13 | In order to do that we'll go ahead and create
a custom Zoom and Pan effect like we saw how
| | 05:19 | to do in the last movie.
| | 05:20 | We'll simply come over to the Zoom-n-Pan tab
and then we'll use the selection handles to
| | 05:25 | drag in a selection that will highlight the
video on screen, we may need to move the window
| | 05:31 | around a bit just to get the video
exactly the way that we want it.
| | 05:35 | Now our video should be able to play and fill
most of our screen for a user to be able to watch.
| | 05:41 | Let's go ahead and use the Ctrl+Right Bracket
arrow to jump down to the last marker.
| | 05:46 | Here Camtasia correctly identified a place
where we would want to change our zoom a little
| | 05:51 | bit, but it zoomed out
not quite to full screen.
| | 05:55 | So we can go ahead and reset this zoom
effect by simply double-clicking on the animation
| | 06:00 | and press the Reset button.
| | 06:02 | Now we can back up just a little bit and
see what that animation looks like in place.
| | 06:07 | I'll back up and press the
Spacebar to play the animation.
| | 06:10 | (video playing)
| | 06:18 | And that's the effect that we're looking for.
| | 06:20 | So with just a little bit of practice and
paying attention during our recording process
| | 06:25 | SmartFocus can be applied to our videos and
greatly help us when we're doing our editing
| | 06:31 | process, to be able to identify those locations
where a user may want to look at a tighter
| | 06:36 | view of our screen by zooming
into it or apply a Pan effect.
| | 06:41 | With a little bit of editing we can go in
and tweak those effects to make sure that
| | 06:46 | they show exactly the
information that we're interested in showing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using cursor effects| 00:00 | Another great feature of the Camtasia Studio is
the ability to add cursor effects to your project.
| | 00:07 | If you record your screen cast using the Camtasia
Recorder and then save your project in the CAMREC format.
| | 00:13 | You can then take advantage of the cursor
animations that are built-in to Camtasia Studio.
| | 00:19 | In this case we're in project 08 Cursor Project
which is using the same video that we used
| | 00:24 | in the last movie for the SmartFocus project.
| | 00:26 | In this case, if we click the open and
close animation view, we can see that there's a
| | 00:31 | second track located
here for cursor animations.
| | 00:34 | This way, we know that Camtasia Recorder recorded the
cursor movements and so we can apply the cursor effects.
| | 00:42 | To apply cursor effects all we need to do is click
the dropdown menu for More and select Cursor Effects.
| | 00:48 | Now we need to simply come up here, and
click on the button that says Add animation.
| | 00:53 | As soon as we do, we'll get a small icon that's
located right down here at the very beginning
| | 00:59 | of our timeline at the top of the cursor
animation track, letting us know that cursor
| | 01:05 | animation has been turned on.
| | 01:06 | Now we're able to go in
and set up our preferences.
| | 01:10 | We can see our cursor here on-screen and it
will give us a live preview of any of the
| | 01:15 | settings that we set over here on the left.
| | 01:18 | The first setting that we may want to
adjust is the overall size of the cursor.
| | 01:22 | We can adjust the size of the
cursor by simply dragging the slider.
| | 01:26 | This way we can make the cursor much larger
so that's very clearly visible, that may be
| | 01:31 | a bit large right there.
| | 01:33 | So we'll go ahead and adjust the size down
by typing in the value of 2.00 into the text
| | 01:39 | box and the press Enter or Return on our keyboard that
will make our mouse cursor a nice comfortable size to see.
| | 01:46 | Next, we can choose what type of Highlighting effect
that we want to have; the default effect is set to None.
| | 01:52 | We'll go ahead and click the dropdown menu here
and we can preview the various different effects.
| | 01:57 | The first effect Highlight will put a yellow
circle around the mouse so that's very easy
| | 02:03 | for the user's attention to be drawn
directly to where the mouse is located.
| | 02:07 | We could also choose from the dropdown menu
Spotlight which would gray out the rest of
| | 02:12 | the screen and then focus the attention of the user
directly on the area in which the mouse is located.
| | 02:19 | We could also choose to magnify which would
allow the area underneath of the mouse to
| | 02:23 | be magnified as shown here
in a little preview window.
| | 02:27 | Of all of these effects perhaps the Highlight
or None is going to work best in our situation.
| | 02:33 | We'll go ahead and leave the Highlight
effect on so we can clearly see the movements.
| | 02:36 | The next option allows us to set what
happens when we use the left mouse button to click.
| | 02:42 | We've a couple of different options.
| | 02:44 | The first is Rings, we'll go ahead and click
on Rings and here we can see in the preview
| | 02:49 | window what happens when you click the mouse.
| | 02:53 | We could also choose Warp, which looks
like our screen is warping in and out.
| | 02:57 | Go ahead and click on that
preview again, to see the effect.
| | 03:01 | Lastly, we could choose Ripple and Ripple
creates a nice rippling effect on the screen
| | 03:07 | that looks like you you've just
dropped a pebble in a smooth pond of water.
| | 03:11 | I tend to like the Rings
view a little bit better.
| | 03:14 | So we'll go ahead and leave that on, I like
how the rings come out in a nice red color,
| | 03:18 | so it highlights our
attention to that location.
| | 03:21 | In our particular video that we're working
on right here, we didn't right-click at all.
| | 03:25 | But here we could set a different effect to
take place, if we were going to right-click.
| | 03:31 | We'll go ahead and leave
that set to None for now.
| | 03:33 | Finally, we can choose the sound effects that
we want to use and these again, we can choose
| | 03:38 | for both the left-click and the right-
click and have two independent sounds.
| | 03:42 | I'll go ahead and select the left click sound
and we'll go ahead and select the mouse click.
| | 03:47 | If we click this small speaker icon we can
preview what the sound effect would sound like.
| | 03:52 | It's a very simple click, but it's going to
have the desired effect that we're looking for.
| | 03:57 | With these parameters set, we're ready to go ahead
and preview what our video is going to look like.
| | 04:02 | We can come down here and simply hit the
play button and watch a few frames of our video
| | 04:06 | to see how it's going to look.
| | 04:08 | (video playing)
| | 04:22 | We'll go ahead and pause the video.
| | 04:23 | I think the effect is looking pretty good.
| | 04:26 | But I think the yellow circle
around it is a little bit much.
| | 04:29 | Since we've already blown up the size of our mouse
we don't need to draw any additional attention.
| | 04:33 | So we'll go ahead and change the
effect Highlight from Highlight to None.
| | 04:38 | Now we're only applying the
rings when a click takes place.
| | 04:40 | We'll also apply a sound and we've got our
cursor increased in size just a little bit.
| | 04:46 | Let's go ahead and continue
previewing to see how this looks.
| | 04:49 | (video playing)
| | 05:06 | With these mouse effects it's going to add
just a little bit more interest and excitement
| | 05:11 | for our users to want to pay attention to
the content that we've prepared for them to watch.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding transitions| 00:00 | A great way to really polish off your video
is to make sure that you add transitions
| | 00:05 | between key clips in your video.
| | 00:07 | In this case, we've got our explore California
intro video that we added in an earlier project,
| | 00:14 | and right here we switch over to our normal
tabs project that we've been working with.
| | 00:18 | The transition though is a little rough, it
just simply jumps from one scene to another.
| | 00:24 | Let's go ahead and add a transition into
here to clean this up a little bit. We'll begin
| | 00:28 | by zooming in on our timeline a couple of
clicks and make sure that we can see the transition
| | 00:32 | between the first and second clips, then
we'll simply click on the Transitions tab.
| | 00:37 | The Transitions tab shows us a preview of
all of the different transitions that ship
| | 00:42 | with Camtasia Studio and that we're
able to add into any of our clips.
| | 00:46 | To add a transition all you need to do is
simply select one of the transitions and click
| | 00:52 | and drag that transition.
| | 00:54 | As soon as you do, any location where you
can apply the transition highlights in yellow.
| | 00:59 | All you need to do is drag that transition
down directly over top of the yellow region
| | 01:04 | and release your mouse.
| | 01:06 | The transition is dropped into place
and is automatically created for you.
| | 01:10 | You can move your playhead up in to
position and then, go ahead and press the Spacebar
| | 01:14 | to preview your work.
| | 01:15 | (video playing)
| | 01:19 | Now that looks pretty good.
| | 01:21 | Some of the controls that you have over the
transition can be accessed by simply clicking
| | 01:26 | on the transition itself and expanding the
time that the transition is taking place on
| | 01:30 | your timeline by simply clicking and
dragging either end of the transition.
| | 01:35 | When you do, you can see that the
transition stretches out in both directions.
| | 01:39 | If you back up your playhead you can see the
result of the change that you just made, by
| | 01:43 | simply pressing the Spacebar.
| | 01:45 | (video playing)
| | 01:50 | Now the transition is
taking just a little bit longer.
| | 01:53 | If you don't like that transition, you can
apply a different effect by simply right-clicking
| | 01:57 | on the transition itself and selecting Delete.
| | 02:00 | The transition goes away and you're free to
go find another transition, click it, drag
| | 02:05 | it, and drop it directly
in to the same location.
| | 02:08 | The transitions default timing
is automatically set for us.
| | 02:12 | In this case our duration is set for 1 second.
| | 02:15 | If you want to change the default timing,
all you need to do is go up to your Tools
| | 02:19 | menu and go down to select Options, then on the
lower right-hand side under default durations,
| | 02:25 | you can change the default transition time
from 1 second to say 1.2 seconds, that gives
| | 02:31 | just a little bit more time for our
transition to take place, but not too much.
| | 02:35 | We'll go ahead and select
that as our default and say OK.
| | 02:39 | Let's go ahead and
preview this circle transition.
| | 02:42 | It still going to have the 1 second timing
that was already set for us, before we made
| | 02:46 | that change, but we'll go ahead and
preview this and see what it looks like.
| | 02:51 | (video playing)
| | 02:54 | That looks pretty good.
| | 02:55 | But let's try a few others, let's go ahead
and once more right-click on the transition
| | 03:00 | and select Delete.
| | 03:01 | We can then scroll down and find a
different effect that we may want to apply.
| | 03:06 | Let's go ahead and try the Flip
effect and see what that looks like.
| | 03:08 | We'll go ahead and select Flip and drag it down
here into our timeline and drop it in place.
| | 03:14 | Now when we keep our mouse hovered over top,
we can see that the duration has now been
| | 03:18 | set to one second and six frames, which is the 1.2
seconds time that we set up in our options.
| | 03:24 | Let's go ahead and back up our
playhead and preview this selection.
| | 03:28 | (video playing)
| | 03:32 | That's a pretty cool effect right there.
| | 03:34 | We'll go ahead and leave that one.
| | 03:36 | Another option that we have for controlling our
transitions can be access when we right-click
| | 03:41 | on the transition itself, there's an option here
that's set for Use trimmed content in transition.
| | 03:47 | Now this is on by default on my system
and it should be on your system as well.
| | 03:51 | If not you'll want to check this
box to make sure that it's turned on.
| | 03:55 | When we have Use trimmed content in
transition turned on Camtasia will automatically select
| | 04:01 | those frames that we've trimmed off in a
previous edit and try and use those frames when it
| | 04:06 | builds the transition; rather than the frames
that we've already cropped our video down to.
| | 04:12 | Applying transitions to your videos is very
easy, just make sure you find the effect that
| | 04:16 | works well for your content and drag it down
into the region in between your clips to apply
| | 04:21 | the transition.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Working with PowerPointConfiguring the PowerPoint Add-In| 00:00 | We can use Camtasia Studio to record a
PowerPoint presentation, and then edit it
| | 00:05 | inside of Camtasia Studio, but before
we do that, we need to first check and
| | 00:11 | make sure that your Camtasia Studio
PowerPoint add-in has been properly
| | 00:15 | configured inside of Camtasia Studio.
| | 00:18 | To do that, simply go up to the Tools
menu of Camtasia Studio, and select Options.
| | 00:24 | When your Options window opens up,
you'll want to select the second tab,
| | 00:28 | which is PowerPoint.
| | 00:29 | And in the PowerPoint Add-in section,
you'll want to make sure that the Enable
| | 00:33 | Powerpoint Add-in checkbox has been checked.
| | 00:37 | If not, go ahead and check that box.
| | 00:39 | This should automatically be done for
you at the time your Camtasia Studio was
| | 00:44 | installed on your system, but it's a
good idea to go in here, and just check and
| | 00:48 | make sure that that's set.
| | 00:49 | Then simply go down to the
bottom, and click the OK button.
| | 00:52 | Now we're finished inside of Camtasia
Studio, and we can go configure the add-in
| | 00:58 | inside of PowerPoint.
| | 01:00 | Go ahead and open up your copy of
PowerPoint, and look for the Add-Ins tab over
| | 01:04 | here on the right-hand side.
| | 01:07 | Click one time on that tab; you should
be able to find the Camtasia toolbar.
| | 01:11 | The toolbar is pretty simple to use.
| | 01:14 | The first button here is what we'll use
when we're ready to record our presentation.
| | 01:19 | Next we can make sure that the audio
coming out of our microphone is going to
| | 01:23 | be captured by making sure
that this option is set to on.
| | 01:27 | The next option allows us to use a
webcam if we have one attached to our
| | 01:32 | computer to capture a
live shot of our presenter.
| | 01:36 | This is great for creating picture-
in-picture, or doing lecture capture.
| | 01:40 | The next option allows us to see a
preview of our camera, so that we can make
| | 01:44 | sure that our shot is set up
correctly if we're using a webcam to capture.
| | 01:49 | The next option is the one that we want
to go into now, and that's the Camtasia
| | 01:53 | Studio recording options.
| | 01:55 | Click one time on that button in
order to open up the options window.
| | 01:59 | We'll go through each of these items.
| | 02:01 | We'll talk about a setup
that should work for you.
| | 02:03 | The first option here is Start
recording paused; this is a really good idea.
| | 02:08 | When you press the Record button, your
presentation is going to go full screen,
| | 02:13 | and Camtasia Studio will start off in
a paused state, so that you can take a
| | 02:19 | moment to gather your thoughts, prepare
to do your presentation, and then when
| | 02:22 | you're ready, either press the start
recording button, or use the key sequence of
| | 02:27 | Control+Shift+F9 to begin recording.
| | 02:31 | To the right, we're able to choose
whether or not we want to include a watermark.
| | 02:36 | Now, if you check this box, you can
enter the watermark preferences by clicking
| | 02:41 | on the Watermark button.
| | 02:43 | Here the Watermark Options window will
open up, and you could choose a custom
| | 02:48 | image that you can have as a watermark.
| | 02:51 | Down at the bottom of the window, you can
see a preview as to what your watermark
| | 02:56 | will look like onscreen.
| | 02:58 | You can apply various different effects,
such as adjusting the Opacity of the
| | 03:02 | watermark, or adjust the Scaling.
| | 03:05 | You can choose to preserve the normal
image size, or you can choose to scale the
| | 03:10 | image to any size that's
appropriate for your particular presentation.
| | 03:15 | Finally, you can choose where
you want the watermark to appear.
| | 03:19 | By default it should show up
here in the lower right-hand corner,
| | 03:22 | but if you would rather have it appear
in the upper left, upper right, maybe in
| | 03:27 | the center, or any of these particular
locations, you simply click on the button,
| | 03:31 | and it will show you how the watermark
is going to look on your first slide.
| | 03:35 | When you're happy with your settings,
you can click the OK button if you want to
| | 03:39 | include the watermark.
| | 03:40 | I'm going to go ahead and click
the Cancel button, and not include a
| | 03:44 | watermark for this training.
| | 03:46 | Next you can choose whether or not
you want the mouse cursor to be recorded
| | 03:50 | during the presentation.
| | 03:52 | This is a personal preference.
| | 03:53 | If you want to have your mouse recorded,
go ahead and leave the box checked.
| | 03:57 | For my purposes, I'm going to go ahead
and uncheck the Record mouse cursor, so
| | 04:01 | that the mouse does not appear as a
distraction to my viewers that may be
| | 04:05 | watching this particular presentation.
| | 04:08 | We can then choose whether or not
we want Camtasia Studio to open up
| | 04:11 | our CAMREC file, and create our
CAMPROJ file, so we can edit the file
| | 04:16 | inside of Camtasia Studio.
| | 04:17 | We'll go ahead and leave this option
checked, so we can then go directly into editing.
| | 04:23 | At the end of our presentation, we
can set a preference to say how we want
| | 04:27 | Camtasia Studio to react.
| | 04:29 | The dropdown menu gives us three options.
| | 04:32 | The first is to just simply continue recording.
| | 04:35 | This is a very good option if you're
going to intersperse PowerPoint slides with
| | 04:40 | work in another application on your
machine, and you want to continue recording
| | 04:45 | between PowerPoint, and some other application.
| | 04:48 | You can choose to have Camtasia Studio
prompt you as to whether or not you want
| | 04:52 | to continue recording, or end recording,
or you can simply stop recording at the
| | 04:58 | end of the presentation.
| | 04:59 | For our purposes, we're going to ahead
and select Stop recording, so that as
| | 05:04 | soon as we're finished, the recording
will go ahead and automatically end.
| | 05:08 | The two options that I prefer
here are either Stop recording or
| | 05:11 | Continue recording.
| | 05:12 | I rarely want to be prompted to
choose whether or not I want to continue
| | 05:17 | recording or not, simply because it
tends to break the flow up of your work.
| | 05:22 | The next section allows us to choose
some of the audio and video preferences
| | 05:27 | that we may want to use during our
recording, and the first is the Video frame rate.
| | 05:32 | Now, if you have a PowerPoint
presentation that has a lot of animations, and
| | 05:36 | a lot of movement in it, you may want
to have a frame rate set up as high as
| | 05:40 | 30 frames per second.
| | 05:42 | However, in our presentation that
we're working with, it's a fairly simple
| | 05:46 | presentation, so 15 frames per
second should more than suffice.
| | 05:51 | By setting our frame rate to a lower
rate, it will help us maintain a smaller
| | 05:55 | file size for our CAMREC file.
| | 05:58 | Here we can choose whether or not we
want to record audio, and we can select our
| | 06:01 | microphone input source.
| | 06:03 | In my case, I'm going to be using my
Yeti Stereo Microphone that I've been using
| | 06:07 | throughout this training.
| | 06:08 | You may have a different option
here for your setting, so go ahead and
| | 06:12 | select your microphone.
| | 06:13 | If you need to, you can adjust the
Volume setting here for your microphone, and
| | 06:17 | you see a preview of your audio levels.
| | 06:20 | Next, we can choose whether or not
we want to have system audio captured.
| | 06:23 | In this particular presentation, there is
no other additional audio that's present.
| | 06:28 | However, in some presentations you may
have audio that's included as part of
| | 06:32 | your PowerPoint presentation, and
you would want to capture that.
| | 06:35 | If that's the case, leave this box checked.
| | 06:38 | In my case, I'm going to go
ahead and uncheck this box for now.
| | 06:41 | Since I'm not recording a camera,
I don't need to worry about the
| | 06:44 | picture-in-picture, or
recording a video from the camera.
| | 06:47 | Finally, we can set up our Recording hotkeys.
| | 06:51 | The default settings are for Ctrl+Shift+F9
to act as our record and pause
| | 06:57 | keyboard command, and
Ctrl+Shift+F10 to stop our recording.
| | 07:03 | If you want to change these keyboard
commands here, you can do so by simply
| | 07:07 | clicking the dropdown menu, and
change to one of the other options.
| | 07:10 | Just be sure not to set your keyboard
command to something that's already used
| | 07:14 | inside of your application.
| | 07:16 | When you're happy with your settings,
go ahead and click the OK button,
| | 07:20 | and in the next movie,s we'll step
through making sure that your PowerPoint
| | 07:24 | presentation itself is optimized
for capture by Camtasia Studio.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Optimizing a PowerPoint file| 00:00 | The Camtasia Studio PowerPoint add-in
will record pretty much any PowerPoint
| | 00:04 | presentation, but we can greatly
improve the overall quality of our finished
| | 00:09 | recording by paying attention
to a couple of key settings.
| | 00:12 | Let's begin inside of our EC_PowerPoint
file by going over to slide 2, and let's
| | 00:19 | apply some of these settings.
| | 00:20 | And the first is to make sure that
we're using a nice sans serif font.
| | 00:24 | A great choice for our fonts is to
go ahead and use the font face Arial.
| | 00:29 | To do this, we'll go ahead and first
click one time on our slide heading, and
| | 00:34 | then triple-click in order
to select all of the text.
| | 00:38 | Now, you can either access the pop-up
window right here to change the font by
| | 00:43 | clicking the dropdown menu, and
choosing a different font, or you can come up
| | 00:47 | here to the Home ribbon, and click the
dropdown menu for the Font, and find the
| | 00:51 | font that you want to use.
| | 00:52 | In this case, we'll scroll up to the
top, and select the font face Arial.
| | 00:56 | We'll do the same thing for our bulleted text.
| | 01:00 | Again, we'll click one time on the text
to select the box, and then triple-click
| | 01:04 | inside of that box to select all of the text.
| | 01:07 | We'll then click the dropdown menu
here, and change our font face to Arial.
| | 01:13 | The next setting with our font is
to make sure that the font size is
| | 01:17 | an appropriate size.
| | 01:18 | Now, for best reproduction inside of
your video, it's good to choose a font face
| | 01:23 | that's at least 32 points.
| | 01:25 | Your other font sizes will be captured,
but it's a good idea to use a little
| | 01:29 | bit larger font size.
| | 01:30 | So we'll go ahead and we'll click
the dropdown menu here, and we'll change
| | 01:33 | our font size to 32.
| | 01:35 | Now our fonts are looking good.
| | 01:38 | The next thing that we want to pay
attention to is we want to make sure that we
| | 01:42 | have an appropriate background to our slide.
| | 01:45 | You want something that's got a nice
contrast between any graphics, or images, and
| | 01:49 | any text on your page.
| | 01:51 | A white background would be just fine
for us to use in this situation, but I'd
| | 01:56 | like to go ahead and apply a
little bit different background.
| | 02:00 | So we'll go ahead and click on the
Design tab, and then go over here to the
| | 02:04 | right-hand side,
and click on Background Styles.
| | 02:07 | We have a variety of different styles we
could choose from, and as you move your
| | 02:11 | mouse over top of the various different
styles, you can see some of them would
| | 02:15 | work better than others.
| | 02:16 | In this case, this particular style
wouldn't do very good, because it would
| | 02:20 | change our text to be white text with a
lighter background, not having very much contrast.
| | 02:25 | If we come down here and we select
this style, we can see that we have a nice
| | 02:30 | contrast between our text, and our
background, and it applies a nice look and feel
| | 02:35 | to our overall slide.
| | 02:36 | We only want to apply this background
to this one particular slide, so we'll
| | 02:40 | simply right-click on this style, and then
select the option to Apply to Selected Slides.
| | 02:47 | Now that background is applied to
this one slide, and our presentation is
| | 02:51 | starting to take shape.
| | 02:53 | The next thing we want to address
is down here in the Notes field.
| | 02:56 | The Notes field is typically used
for speaker notes inside of PowerPoint.
| | 03:01 | However, when we bring our
presentation directly into Camtasia Studio, we'll
| | 03:05 | have the ability to take this Notes
field, and apply it as text overlays
| | 03:09 | directly to our video.
| | 03:11 | So we'll go ahead and use some text
that's appropriate to this particular video.
| | 03:15 | Well, go ahead and type in Follow in
the steps of John Muir, and walk the same
| | 03:20 | trails he helped blaze.
| | 03:24 | When you're finished typing your text,
now that we have our Notes field set up,
| | 03:28 | the next thing to apply is to apply
transitions between all of our slides
| | 03:33 | inside of PowerPoint.
| | 03:35 | Now, we could apply transitions in
between our slides inside of Camtasia Studio,
| | 03:39 | but the effect will work much better if
it's applied here in PowerPoint, and then
| | 03:44 | transferred into Camtasia Studio.
| | 03:46 | So to apply a transition to all of our
slides, we'll first click one time on the
| | 03:51 | slide over on our left-hand side, and
then press Control+A on your keyboard to
| | 03:55 | select all of the various different slides.
| | 03:58 | We can then go up to the
Transitions tab, and we can choose a simple
| | 04:02 | transition. In this case, I'd like to use
the Fade transition, which will create
| | 04:07 | a nice cross dissolve fade between
slides as we move from one slide, into the
| | 04:12 | next, into the next.
| | 04:13 | We can see that this transition has
been applied to all slides, because over on
| | 04:18 | the left-hand side of each of the
slides, we can see this small star icon
| | 04:22 | indicating that we have a
transition that has been applied.
| | 04:26 | You'll want to then make sure you do all
of the typical things that you would do
| | 04:30 | before any presentation, such as
checking the spell check of your presentation,
| | 04:33 | and walking through your presentation
several times before you're ready to begin
| | 04:37 | doing your recording.
| | 04:39 | To do your recording, we'll go over to
the Add-Ins tab, and in the next movie,
| | 04:43 | we'll step through doing the recording.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Recording a presentation| 00:00 | Now that we have Camtasia Studio's
PowerPoint add-in fully configured, and we've
| | 00:05 | stepped through our PowerPoint
presentation itself to make sure that all of our
| | 00:09 | settings are optimized;
| | 00:10 | we're ready to begin recording our
PowerPoint presentation using Camtasia Studio.
| | 00:16 | To do this, make sure your
presentation is queued up on the first slide, and
| | 00:20 | then go up to the Add-Ins tab. Make
one more check to make sure that your
| | 00:24 | microphone is set to record,
and then click the Record button.
| | 00:29 | When you do this, your presentation
should open up in Full screen mode, and you
| | 00:34 | should see the Camtasia Studio
recording window, with the indicator that the
| | 00:38 | recording is currently paused, giving
you a few minutes to go ahead and make
| | 00:42 | any final preparations.
| | 00:44 | You can also check your microphone
input levels, and make an adjustment using
| | 00:48 | this slider here if you need to.
| | 00:50 | My level seems to be going in pretty well.
| | 00:53 | When you're ready to begin recording, you
can click the button to begin recording,
| | 00:57 | or use the keyboard command
Control+Shift+F9.
| | 01:01 | If you need to pause at any time
during your recording, you can press
| | 01:05 | Control+Shift+F9 to pause, and then use the
same keyboard command to restart your recording.
| | 01:11 | When you're finished, you can either
press Control+Shift+F10, or simply press the
| | 01:17 | Escape key to end your recording. Let's
go ahead and get started. Go ahead and
| | 01:22 | click the button, and let's start.
| | 01:24 | Explore California is running
three special tours for the summer.
| | 01:30 | First, from our Backpack California
collection, we have the In the Steps of John Muir tour.
| | 01:36 | Follow in the steps of John Muir, and
walk the same trails he helped blaze.
| | 01:42 | Next, from our Taste of California
collection, we have a special Napa Wine Country Tour.
| | 01:48 | Enjoy a two night stay at
the exclusive Napa winery.
| | 01:53 | For you nature lovers out there,
we're running a special on our Big Sur
| | 01:58 | Endangered Species Tour.
| | 02:00 | Big Sur is home to some of the
world's most endangered species.
| | 02:05 | Be sure to check out our other tours
online at www.explorecalifornia.org.
| | 02:14 | Press the Escape key when you're
finished, and you will be prompted to go ahead
| | 02:18 | and save your recording.
| | 02:19 | Now notice, it's going to save the
CAMREC file. This is very similar to the
| | 02:23 | process we've been going
through with Camtasia Recorder.
| | 02:27 | We can save our recording
into a convenient location.
| | 02:29 | I'm going to go ahead and click on my
Desktop, and save the recording there, but
| | 02:34 | I'll first create a new folder called
Explore California, then double-click on
| | 02:43 | that folder, and simply
click the Save button.
| | 02:47 | Now the PowerPoint add-in should next open up
a window asking us what we'd like to do next.
| | 02:52 | If we're happy with our recording, we
can simply choose to produce our recording,
| | 02:57 | and have it prepared to upload to our
final location, or we can select the
| | 03:02 | option here to edit our
recording using Camtasia Studio.
| | 03:06 | Let's go ahead and select that
option, and then click the OK button.
| | 03:10 | When Camtasia Studio opens up, we'll
be asked if we want to Import PowerPoint
| | 03:17 | Slide Notes directly into our presentation
as captions. Let's go ahead and click
| | 03:22 | the Yes button to import
all of those captions.
| | 03:27 | We're next given the option to set
the particular size that we want to use
| | 03:31 | for our presentation.
| | 03:32 | The default dimensions for me came up as
854 by 480, and again, I'll go ahead and
| | 03:38 | select that option with Keep aspect
ratio turned on, and click the OK button.
| | 03:43 | Now that our project is opened up inside
of Camtasia editor, it's a good idea to
| | 03:47 | go ahead and save our project. We'll do
that by simply going up to the File menu,
| | 03:51 | and selecting Save project.
| | 03:53 | We'll then navigate out to our Desktop,
and to the same Explore California folder
| | 03:59 | that we saved our CAMREC file in.
| | 04:01 | We'll change the File name to Explore California
Project, and then click the Save button.
| | 04:10 | Now, before we wrap up this movie, I
want to look at a couple of the things that
| | 04:15 | the Camtasia Studio PowerPoint add-in
did for us, and the first thing that we
| | 04:18 | notice is that we have another track here.
| | 04:21 | Track 2 is showing us the notes that are
attached to each of our individual slides.
| | 04:25 | If we move our playhead down in our
timeline, we can see that those notes have
| | 04:30 | appeared as a text overlay.
| | 04:33 | Another thing for us to note is that
we have markers inserted at each of the
| | 04:36 | different slide locations.
| | 04:38 | If you click the dropdown menu, and
select Show Marker view, you can see that
| | 04:43 | each slide has its own marker, and the title
for that slide is the title for that marker.
| | 04:48 | This will come into play later on, when we
export our project, and we can use these
| | 04:53 | slide markers as our table of contents.
| | 04:57 | In the next movie, we'll look at
some of the other ways that we can use
| | 05:00 | these slide markers.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using PowerPoint markers| 00:00 | Let's take a few minutes and look
at some of the things that we can do
| | 00:04 | with these markers that were created for us
using the Camtasia Studio PowerPoint add-in.
| | 00:08 | The first thing we want to do is we
want to click this dropdown menu here, and
| | 00:12 | select Show Marker view. That way we
can see all the markers that were created.
| | 00:17 | I want to look at a couple of things here.
| | 00:19 | First of all, all of our markers have
automatically been named for us, but where
| | 00:24 | did these names come from?
| | 00:25 | If we jump back to our PowerPoint
presentation, it's pretty clear to see where
| | 00:29 | some of the markers came from.
| | 00:31 | They are the titles of each of our slides.
| | 00:33 | But what about the markers for the
first and last slide? They are only listing
| | 00:37 | California, but our name is
clearly Explore California.
| | 00:41 | Well, if we look a little bit closer,
and we click on the word Explore, we can
| | 00:45 | see that the word Explore is a separate
text box, and the word California is the
| | 00:51 | actual title for the slide.
| | 00:52 | The same thing occurs in our final
slide, where Explore is one text box, and
| | 00:58 | California is the actual title for the slide.
| | 01:01 | Let's go ahead and jump back over to
Camtasia Studio, and we can see that
| | 01:06 | reflected here as well.
| | 01:07 | Let's go ahead and fix this
problem by renaming our marker.
| | 01:11 | We can do that by right-clicking
on the marker, and selecting Rename.
| | 01:16 | Now we can simply type in Explore,
and now our marker is named properly.
| | 01:22 | We can do the same thing for the last slide;
| | 01:24 | we can right-click on it, and select
Rename, we can use the left arrow key to
| | 01:29 | jump to the beginning of our
text, and then type in Explore there.
| | 01:34 | Now each of our markers are named properly
for the corresponding portion of the video.
| | 01:40 | Why is this important?
| | 01:42 | Well, when we go to produce and
share our final video, Camtasia Studio is
| | 01:47 | going to use these marker names to
name our chapters, and create a clickable
| | 01:52 | index for our presentation,
| | 01:54 | so it's important to make sure
that your markers are named properly.
| | 01:58 | The next thing that we can do with our
markers is, if we were going in to do some
| | 02:02 | more editing on our project, we could
use each of our markers to go ahead and
| | 02:07 | split our final video clips down
here at the location of those markers.
| | 02:12 | This can be very helpful if we are
going to go in and maybe swap out a
| | 02:17 | particular slide, or we need
to do some detailed editing.
| | 02:19 | In order to split the video at each of
the markers, all you need to do is go up
| | 02:24 | to the Edit menu, go down to Markers,
and then select Split at all markers.
| | 02:33 | Now you can see that our timeline
has been split into individual clips at
| | 02:37 | each marker location, and if we needed to,
we could go in and edit those individually.
| | 02:42 | Speaking of editing, let's do
just a little bit of clean up.
| | 02:46 | Here at the beginning, we'll need to
trim off a little bit of our audio.
| | 02:49 | So let's go ahead and zoom in to our
timeline here, and then using our in
| | 02:53 | and out points, we'll make a selection
that will start our video just before
| | 02:58 | our audio comes in.
| | 03:00 | After making that selection, we'll simply use
the Cut tool to get rid of that bit of audio.
| | 03:05 | We can then scrub our timeline down to
the end by dragging this slider, and then
| | 03:10 | using the selection handles, select
the ending of our video, and go ahead and
| | 03:16 | use the Cut tool to get
rid of that audio as well.
| | 03:20 | Now our video is looking in good shape.
| | 03:22 | Our markers are all in place, and our
video has been edited down to the proper size.
| | 03:28 | In the next movie, we'll go ahead and
export this video out, and create our table
| | 03:33 | of contents,s and look at our finished product.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a table of contents| 00:00 | Let's go ahead and step through the process
of making sure that our file is in its final
| | 00:04 | format in order to create a properly formed table
of contents when we produce and share this video.
| | 00:11 | To begin, make sure you click the
dropdown menu here to show all of your markers.
| | 00:17 | We can see all the markers for each of the
different slides that we have created in our
| | 00:20 | presentation directly out of our PowerPoint.
| | 00:23 | However, when we made the edit in a previous
movie to trim off the beginning of the video,
| | 00:29 | we cut out the initial marker.
| | 00:31 | Let's go ahead and add that marker back.
| | 00:33 | Make sure the playhead is at the very
beginning of your movie, and then simply press the M
| | 00:37 | key on your keyboard to create a new marker.
| | 00:40 | The new marker is created, the text is
automatically selected, so all we need to do is type in
| | 00:45 | Explore California, and simply hit the
Enter or Return key to accept that change.
| | 00:52 | Now we have a marker for each of
the key stages of our presentation.
| | 00:57 | Let's go ahead and export this presentation in
a format that will create a table of contents.
| | 01:02 | To do that, start off by going up to
the File menu, and selecting Save project.
| | 01:07 | It's always a good idea to save your project
before you step through the production process.
| | 01:12 | Now go ahead and click the
Produce and share button.
| | 01:16 | When the Production Wizard window opens up,
simply click the dropdown menu to select the
| | 01:21 | format that we want to save to.
| | 01:23 | Not all formats that you can select will
have a table of contents associated with them.
| | 01:28 | In our case, we're going to go ahead and select
the MP4 with video player (up to 720p) option.
| | 01:36 | With that option selected, we can see here
in the detailed Description section that this
| | 01:41 | has interactive features,
such as a table of contents.
| | 01:44 | We'll go ahead down to the
bottom, and click the Next button.
| | 01:48 | Now we want to change our production name
to the file name that our file is going to
| | 01:53 | have, and it's a good idea to not have any spaces
or special characters in this production name.
| | 01:59 | So I'll go ahead and rename
my file to be EC_Project.
| | 02:05 | Then we can choose the location of the
folder that we want our project to go to.
| | 02:09 | I've got mine set to the Desktop. If you want
to change that location, you can simply click
| | 02:14 | the folder icon here, and navigate to
the location that you want to use.
| | 02:20 | You will want to make sure that the Organize
produced files all go into sub-folders option
| | 02:25 | is checked, so we'll go ahead and make sure
that that is checked, and make sure that both
| | 02:30 | Show production results, and Play the
video after production is also checked.
| | 02:34 | We'll then come down to the
bottom and click the Finish button.
| | 02:39 | Camtasia Studio will then
begin rendering out our project.
| | 02:43 | It will create a folder out on our Desktop
for the EC_Project, and put all of the rendered
| | 02:49 | files and any associated necessary files for us
to upload directly into that EC_Project folder.
| | 02:56 | When Camtasia Studio has finished rendering out
the file, the video project should automatically
| | 03:02 | open up in your default browser,
and appear up onscreen for you.
| | 03:06 | You can then check your work by simply coming
over and clicking the Play button on the project.
| | 03:13 | (video playing)
| | 03:19 | We can then control the playback
using the playback controls onscreen.
| | 03:24 | Let's look at a couple of these options to
see what came in as part of our project.
| | 03:29 | If we move our mouse over to the right-hand
side, we can click on the Table of Contents
| | 03:33 | button, and expose the table
of contents for our project.
| | 03:37 | Our users could then navigate around inside of
our project by simply clicking on the various
| | 03:42 | different areas of our table of contents.
| | 03:45 | You'll notice that the names of each of these
items is the names from the markers that we've
| | 03:50 | set up inside of our Camtasia project.
| | 03:53 | Another thing that we're able to do is down here in
the bottom, we can turn on the Closed Captions track.
| | 03:59 | If we do that, then our notes that we created
as part of our PowerPoint file appear as our
| | 04:04 | Closed Caption track, letting any user that
may have difficulties listening to our video
| | 04:10 | to be able to read the text that
we've included as part of the file.
| | 04:14 | When you're finished previewing your project,
you can simply close your browser window, and
| | 04:19 | you can review the production result
that Camtasia Studio also created for us.
| | 04:24 | Here we can get a detailed view of all
the different files that were created.
| | 04:29 | When you're finished reviewing this content,
you can come down to the bottom, and simply
| | 04:32 | click the Finish button.
| | 04:33 | It will return you back to Camtasia Studio.
| | 04:36 | Let's have a quick look to
see what files got created.
| | 04:39 | I'll go ahead and minimize my Camtasia Studio,
and here on the Desktop we can see the EC_Project
| | 04:45 | folder that got created for us.
| | 04:46 | Go ahead and double-click inside of that
project, and you can see all the various different
| | 04:50 | files that Camtasia Studio created
for us in our final project export.
| | 04:55 | If you want to include this whole project
inside of a Web site, all you need to do is
| | 04:59 | upload this entire EC_Project folder, and create a link
from your Web site directly to the EC_Project.html file.
| | 05:09 | All the rest of the files will automatically
begin working as long as you don't move the
| | 05:13 | location of any of these particular files.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Working with CaptionsUsing Speech-to-Text| 00:00 | One of the best things about Camtasia Studio
is they've added in the ability to make all
| | 00:05 | of your movies ADA compliant.
| | 00:07 | Now, ADA is the Americans with Disabilities
Act, and it pertains to making sure that all
| | 00:13 | content that's published out on the
Web is made accessible to all users.
| | 00:18 | This is very easy to do, and in this chapter
we're going to step through a variety of different
| | 00:23 | methods for making your movies accessible
to users who need to use screen readers in
| | 00:28 | order to access all of your content.
| | 00:31 | The way you do this is to simply click on the
More tab, and select the Captions option.
| | 00:37 | Throughout the rest of this chapter, we're going
to be using this Captions tab extensively,
| | 00:41 | so for the rest of the following movies,
please make sure you open up the Captions tab.
| | 00:46 | To start off with, we're going to use the
Speech-to-text option by simply clicking on
| | 00:50 | the Speech-to-Text button in order to create
a closed caption track for our entire movie.
| | 00:55 | Now, the first time you open up the Speech-to-Text
section, you'll need to step through the training
| | 01:00 | process to train your computer to
understand your particular voice, and you'll do that
| | 01:05 | by clicking on the Start voice training link.
| | 01:09 | When you do, it will open up a Welcome
To Speech Recognition training session.
| | 01:13 | There will be a little bit of
instructions here to tell you what to do.
| | 01:17 | Essentially, though, what you'll do is you'll
click the Next button, and then a bunch of
| | 01:22 | text will appear onscreen.
| | 01:24 | You just simply read the text into your
computer, and continue clicking the Next button after
| | 01:28 | each time that you've read the text.
| | 01:31 | The computer will then analyze your voice,
and calibrate itself, so that it has a better
| | 01:36 | chance of understanding your
particular patterns of speech.
| | 01:39 | I'll read through the first couple of screens
on this, and then you can go ahead and follow
| | 01:43 | along on your own to click through
the rest of them on your screen.
| | 01:47 | I am now speaking to my computer.
| | 01:51 | The computer is learning the
sound of my voice as I speak.
| | 01:55 | This will help the computer
better recognize what I say.
| | 01:59 | You can continue following along,
reading the text each time.
| | 02:02 | I'll go ahead and click the
Cancel button to move out of here.
| | 02:06 | Once you've trained your computer, you should
then see a green circle with a check, indicating
| | 02:10 | that your computer has been trained.
| | 02:12 | Now, I have not stepped through the entire
process of training my computer, even though
| | 02:18 | we see the green checkbox indicating
that it has now at this point been trained.
| | 02:23 | All that's indicating is
that I've started the training.
| | 02:26 | So when I click the Continue button, the
computer is going to analyze the audio file that's
| | 02:31 | included on the video track for this project, without
having the benefit of trying to recognize my voice.
| | 02:37 | This should allow both of our systems to have a
similar amount of errors in what the computer
| | 02:42 | interprets my voice as.
| | 02:45 | Your results may vary a little bit from what
you're going to see onscreen as I step through
| | 02:49 | this process, but don't worry; the
general process is going to be the same.
| | 02:54 | So we'll go ahead, and we'll click the
Continue button, and Camtasia Studio will go through
| | 02:58 | and try to transcribe all of the audio
in our recording directly into text.
| | 03:04 | Now, when this process is complete, we'll
have a series of time codes here in the Captions
| | 03:09 | section of our window, and we'll have the text
that's associated with each of those captions.
| | 03:15 | Camtasia has also added a track onto our
project where the text tracks will live.
| | 03:20 | Now, the next step is for us to go ahead and
play our movie, and watch each of the captions,
| | 03:26 | and make edits in the captions if we need to.
| | 03:29 | So we'll begin by simply pressing the Play
button, and we'll watch the timeline for the
| | 03:33 | first little bit, and then stop.
| | 03:37 | (video playing)
| | 03:39 | Okay, so that got pretty close;
Explore California is running Finley.
| | 03:45 | Well, not quite Finley.
| | 03:47 | Let's go ahead and edit that.
| | 03:48 | We'll simply come over here, and I'll double-click
on the word, and instead we'll just type in
| | 03:52 | Explore California is running
three special tours for the summer.
| | 03:57 | I'll go ahead and deselect that by clicking away
from it, and then press the Play button again.
| | 04:03 | (video playing)
| | 04:11 | Let's go ahead and pause that for just a second, and
we'll come up, and we'll change the capitalization here.
| | 04:16 | First, from our backpack California collection,
we'll go ahead and simply change the case
| | 04:23 | of Backpack, so that it
stands out a little bit better.
| | 04:26 | Let's go ahead and keep playing.
| | 04:29 | (video playing)
| | 04:35 | We have the in the steps of John Muir tour,
so instead of your, it should be Muir, and
| | 04:43 | it should be a capital J, and
we'll capitalize his name here again.
| | 04:55 | And we know we said same trails he
helped blaze, instead of blades.
| | 05:02 | Go ahead and add the period at the end,
and let's go ahead and play that again.
| | 05:10 | (video playing)
| | 05:23 | Once again, let's go ahead and capitalize T in taste,
because it's one of our main tour collections.
| | 05:29 | Go ahead and play that.
| | 05:33 | (video playing)
| | 05:40 | So here we say, enjoy a two night stay at the
exclusive, we'll go ahead and keep playing that.
| | 05:52 | (video playing)
| | 05:56 | Let's go ahead and
capitalize Winery; continue playing.
| | 06:04 | (video playing)
| | 06:13 | So let's back that up a little bit, and we'll
come back here, and we'll capitalize For you
| | 06:18 | nature lovers. We out there; it should be we
are running a special on our big Sur. Let's
| | 06:28 | capitalized the b in Big. Endangered species,
and instead of two, it should be tour, and
| | 06:35 | let's keep playing.
| | 06:36 | (video playing)
| | 06:48 | Let's go ahead and
change that, and keep playing.
| | 06:56 | (video playing)
| | 07:10 | So let's go ahead and just fix that.
| | 07:16 | So we'll just change that to
www.explorecalifornia.org, and there we go.
| | 07:23 | So now we have our closed caption track, and you
can back it up and play the whole thing again.
| | 07:27 | And fairly easily we've been able to add a
complete closed caption track to our entire
| | 07:32 | video that we can include when
we export our overall project.
| | 07:38 | In the next movie, we'll look at another
method for adding a script to one of our projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Syncing with a script| 00:00 | Another way to add a closed caption track to
your Camtasia Studio project is by synchronizing
| | 00:06 | the text from a script that you've written in
another application directly into your project.
| | 00:12 | To do this, let's go ahead minimize our
Camtasia project, and we're going to open up the file
| | 00:17 | PowerPoint Script.txt.
| | 00:18 | This is just a plain text document that is a
script that I used when I recorded the PowerPoint
| | 00:25 | presentation. Let's go ahead and select all of
the text by pressing Control+A on our keyboard,
| | 00:30 | then Control+C to copy all of the text.
| | 00:34 | We can then go back to our Camtasia project,
and in the Captions section, there's a place
| | 00:39 | for us to click, and paste the
script directly into our project.
| | 00:43 | We'll click into that field, and then press the
Control+V key on our keyboard to paste in all of the text.
| | 00:49 | In order to be ADA compliant, we need to keep
in mind that we're only allow to have three
| | 00:54 | lines of text included in any one caption.
| | 00:57 | Camtasia recognizes this, and all of the
text past those first three lines shows up in
| | 01:02 | red as a warning to us that this text is not
able to be displayed on the current screen.
| | 01:07 | What we need to do is to use the sync captions capability
to easily synchronize these captions with our audio.
| | 01:15 | So we'll go ahead and click the Sync
captions button here in the Advanced section.
| | 01:19 | Now, if your Advanced section is not appearing,
it may be turned down like this. Go ahead
| | 01:23 | and simply click the small triangle just to the
left of Advanced in order to reveal that section.
| | 01:29 | Then go ahead and click
one time on Sync captions.
| | 01:31 | The Sync Captions
instructions will appear onscreen.
| | 01:35 | As soon as we click the Continue button, the
playhead will start playing our project forward,
| | 01:39 | and we're able to listen to the
text as this being read to us.
| | 01:43 | As soon as we hear the first word that's
listed here in red, we should click on that word,
| | 01:49 | and continue watching our project as it goes
along, clicking on the words as they appear
| | 01:54 | in order for Camtasia to automatically
split our captions at those locations.
| | 01:59 | If at any time you need to pause, you can
use the Pause button that will appear over in
| | 02:05 | this area of your screen.
| | 02:06 | If you need to stop and back up,
there's a Stop button as well.
| | 02:10 | Now, I will warn you that the text goes by
really quickly, so it may take a couple of
| | 02:15 | tries of you going through this to get the
hang of this, and get really in the rhythm
| | 02:19 | of clicking on the word
at the appropriate time.
| | 02:22 | If you don't get all of the clicks in there just right,
simply go ahead and delete Track 2, and try again.
| | 02:29 | I'll go ahead and click the Continue button,
and you can watch and see how this is done,
| | 02:33 | and just follow along on your own.
| | 02:35 | So we'll click the Continue button, and begin.
| | 03:27 | Now, as you're seeing, each time the video
got to one of the points, we simply clicked
| | 03:31 | on the text, and the new caption
was automatically created for us.
| | 03:35 | Now we can go back into our project down at
the bottom, and make some fine tune adjustments.
| | 03:38 | (video playing)
| | 03:42 | Now, as we step through the next phase of doing
the edits, your edits are more than likely
| | 03:46 | not going to be exactly the same edits that
I'm going to be making onscreen, unless you
| | 03:50 | happened to click at exactly the same times that I
did, and made all of the same splits in your file.
| | 03:57 | So in that case, all you need to do is go
ahead and watch this next section, so you get the
| | 04:03 | gist of exactly what you need to do in order
to make the edits, and then go through with
| | 04:08 | your own file, and do the edits.
| | 04:11 | Let's go ahead and replay our
project, and slowly make the adjustments.
| | 04:15 | We'll start by pressing the Play button.
| | 04:18 | (video playing)
| | 04:22 | So right here, we've already switched over
to the new slide, and we have the break that
| | 04:28 | we inserted by using our markers in an earlier
movie to create splits at each of the markers.
| | 04:34 | So we can go ahead and back our playhead up
just a little bit, so that it's sitting right
| | 04:38 | on the split in these two clips.
| | 04:40 | Now, we know that the text here needs to be
moved back over here, so we'll simply move
| | 04:44 | our mouse cursor in between these first two
pieces of text, and we'll drag that over until
| | 04:50 | it snaps right to our playhead.
| | 04:54 | Now we can go ahead and play forward again,
and see where the next piece of media needs
| | 04:58 | to be synchronized at.
| | 05:01 | (video playing)
| | 05:07 | Here we can see where the ending of that
first phrase comes in, so we can grab that text,
| | 05:11 | and drag it back up to our playhead.
| | 05:14 | We can also come up in the top, and we can
edit the text here, so we can get rid of this
| | 05:18 | line break by simply coming up, clicking
inside of here, hitting the Backspace key, and then
| | 05:25 | we'll move the follow in the steps of down into
the next time spot by simply selecting the
| | 05:31 | text, pressing Control+X on our keyboard to cut it,
then going down to the next line, clicking
| | 05:36 | at the beginning, Control+V on our keyboard in
order to paste it, then we can simply clean
| | 05:41 | up the line wrapping.
| | 05:42 | Let's go ahead and play
that to see how that looks.
| | 05:47 | (video playing)
| | 05:53 | Here we can go ahead and we can move this
split back until it lines right with our clip,
| | 05:58 | and proceed on, and go ahead and
clean up this text here as well.
| | 06:03 | Let's see how that looks.
| | 06:09 | (video playing)
| | 06:19 | Let's go ahead and move enjoy a two night
stay down into the next text bubble by simply
| | 06:24 | selecting it, Control+X on our keyboard to cut
it, come down here, Control+V on our keyboard
| | 06:30 | to paste it, and we'll go ahead and clean up
this line return as well, and we'll get rid
| | 06:36 | of the extra line break here at the bottom.
| | 06:39 | And then we can go ahead and simply adjust
the clip here in our timeline, and play, and
| | 06:44 | see how that looks.
| | 06:46 | (video playing)
| | 06:58 | So we can back this up to right here. We
can see the break in our audio file, so we'll
| | 07:03 | go ahead and adjust the timing of the clips
into that section, and then we'll adjust our
| | 07:09 | text to clean up the line wrapping, and
change the Big Sur. Move this text down, so we'll
| | 07:18 | cut that text, move it down here, paste it in place,
and that's looking much better. There we are.
| | 07:28 | Let's go ahead and adjust that clip, so it
matches with our clip border, and we'll play from here.
| | 07:34 | (video playing)
| | 07:47 | By synchronizing your script directly with
your text, you ensure that you get the most
| | 07:51 | accurate text transcript added directly to
your project. You do need to spend some time
| | 07:56 | going in, and making sure that all of your
text aligns perfectly with your project, but
| | 08:01 | the Synchronize Captions tool at least gets
you very close as an initial first pass, and
| | 08:06 | then, with a little tweaking, you end up with a
perfect closed caption track for your project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding captions manually| 00:00 | Let's look at another method for adding
captions directly to our Camtasia Studio project.
| | 00:06 | In this case, we'll add
them manually to our project.
| | 00:09 | Now, the first tip for you is to make sure
that you zoom directly into your project using
| | 00:15 | the Zoom in tool a couple of times. That way you can
clearly see the audio waveform for your project.
| | 00:22 | You'll be able to see the natural breaks in
your speech patterns and you can use those
| | 00:26 | as possible cues for places where you may
want to break the phrasing of your text.
| | 00:31 | The next tip is to make sure that you
keep an eye on where your playhead is.
| | 00:36 | The basic process that we'll be using is to
simply make sure that our playhead is at the
| | 00:41 | insertion point for where we want our new
caption to be, then click the Add caption
| | 00:46 | media button to add another caption that will
begin wherever your playhead is currently located.
| | 00:52 | Now, the general process for us to follow is
to play a little bit of our video, so that
| | 00:57 | we know exactly what we're saying, then back up
to the insertion point, click the Add caption
| | 01:02 | media button, type in our text, check our
work, and then move on to the next phrase.
| | 01:09 | It's an iterative process that takes a
little bit of time to go through, but with little
| | 01:13 | practice, you'll be a pro with this in no time.
| | 01:15 | I'll do the first few edits with you, and then
feel free to complete the project on your own.
| | 01:22 | Let's begin by playing the
first little clip of audio.
| | 01:25 | (audio playing)
| | 01:31 | So we'll go ahead and pause that.
We can see where the first break is.
| | 01:34 | Let's go ahead and back up our playhead, and
then for the first clip, all we need to do
| | 01:39 | is click inside of the first text
field, and then enter in the text.
| | 01:44 | Let's go ahead and back up our playhead,
and listen to our phrasing one more time.
| | 01:50 | (audio playing)
| | 01:55 | So we'll pause our video, and we can see when
we end that phrase right about here, so let's
| | 02:01 | go ahead and grab the right-hand edge of
that text field, and we'll drag it down until it
| | 02:06 | snaps to the edge of our playhead.
| | 02:08 | Now we have the location for our next phrase.
Go ahead and play the video, and listen to
| | 02:13 | it, so that we can add in the next bit of text.
| | 02:18 | (audio playing)
| | 02:23 | We'll go ahead and make a break right here
at this point, so we'll back up our playhead.
| | 02:30 | We'll go ahead and click the Add caption media
button, and then we'll type in that next phrase.
| | 02:36 | Once we get the phrase in place, we can play
our video one more time, so that we're sure
| | 02:40 | we get to the correct endpoint.
| | 02:42 | (audio playing)
| | 02:49 | Go ahead and pause the video, we'll adjust
our playhead back just a little bit, so that
| | 02:52 | it's right here inside of this gap, and then
we'll go ahead and drag our text field all
| | 02:58 | the way until it aligns with our playhead.
| | 03:01 | Let's go ahead and do one more. We'll push
the Play button, and listen to the next phrase.
| | 03:06 | (audio playing)
| | 03:09 | Let's go ahead and end the next one there
at that point, so we'll back our playhead
| | 03:13 | back up to our next insertion point, and this
time, instead of clicking the Add caption media,
| | 03:18 | we'll simply scroll down in the
list, click the Append new caption,
| | 03:22 | and type in our text there.
| | 03:24 | Now our text appears here, we can play the video,
and make sure we have our correct stop point,
| | 03:31 | and click on our Start menu one time.
| | 03:34 | So it's right inside of that gap, so we'll
back up just a little bit, and we'll drag the
| | 03:39 | text back into place.
| | 03:41 | Go ahead and continue on, on your own, finding each
of the different phrase points, and adding the text.
| | 03:48 | Remember, you can either use the Add caption
media button, or you can click on the Append
| | 03:53 | new caption option right here. Just make
sure that when you do either of those options,
| | 03:58 | your playhead is at the place where you
want to have the text begin to appear onscreen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting and importing captions| 00:00 | Another method for adding a closed caption
track to your Camtasia Studio project is to
| | 00:05 | simply import a file that has all of the
time codes and captions already transcribed.
| | 00:11 | Now, there's a variety of ways of
generating one of these files.
| | 00:14 | The most common way is to contract with an
outside company to go ahead and step through
| | 00:18 | the process of creating
one of these files for you.
| | 00:22 | At the end of this movie, I'll show you how
to take a closed caption track in Camtasia
| | 00:26 | Studio, and export it back out,
| | 00:29 | but before we do that, let's go ahead and
look at one of these closed caption tracks.
| | 00:34 | If you're following along, there is a file
called Tabs Text.txt. This is the contents
| | 00:40 | of the file that we're going to be importing.
| | 00:42 | You can see that the file lists out each of
the different time codes, with start and end
| | 00:48 | time codes, and the caption that's associated with
that time code. Each of the blocks are numbered.
| | 00:55 | I'll go ahead and scroll down to the bottom,
so you can see all of the different blocks;
| | 01:00 | it's a fairly straightforward file.
| | 01:03 | In the Exercise Files folder, I've included the
actual file that we're going to be importing.
| | 01:09 | It's called Tabs Text.srt.
| | 01:12 | Now, the .srt file extension is just a plain
text file that has this file extension on it.
| | 01:18 | So if you wanted to open up this file, all you
need to do is just change the file extension
| | 01:23 | to .txt, and you can open it
up in any plain text editor.
| | 01:26 | I've already done that for you here in this
file, which is what we were just looking at.
| | 01:31 | Now let's go back to Camtasia
Studio, and let's import the file.
| | 01:35 | We'll do that by simply making sure that our
playhead is back at the beginning of our timeline,
| | 01:40 | and then in the Captions tab, we'll
click on the button for Import captions.
| | 01:45 | We'll then navigate on our hard drive until
we find our Tabs Text.srt file, and then we'll
| | 01:52 | click the Open button.
| | 01:53 | The file will import, and all of the time
codes will automatically be added to our timeline
| | 01:59 | in a new audio track.
| | 02:01 | Let's go ahead and play a little
bit of this file to see how it looks.
| | 02:05 | (audio playing)
| | 02:23 | You can go ahead and play the rest of this file, and see
how all of the text aligns perfectly with the video.
| | 02:29 | If you have an outside company that can
generate these files for you, it'll save you a lot
| | 02:33 | of time and effort, although it can be quite
expensive if you're doing a lot of closed captioning.
| | 02:39 | You've seen a variety of other methods throughout
this chapter, so that you can do this yourself.
| | 02:44 | I did promise you that I would show you
how to export a closed caption track.
| | 02:48 | So in order to generate this file, rather
than sending it out to an outside company,
| | 02:53 | I simply used the same method that we used
earlier with the speech to text in order
| | 02:58 | to get close to my file, and then I
went ahead and I edited the text myself.
| | 03:03 | Let's go ahead and
look at that process right now.
| | 03:05 | All we need to do is, once we've stepped through
the speech to text method that we saw in an earlier
| | 03:10 | movie, we can then click the Export captions
button, and export out to a location, such as
| | 03:16 | our Desktop, the SRT file.
| | 03:19 | In this case, I'll call it Tabs, and
then we'll click the Save button.
| | 03:25 | Now, if I minimize my browser, I can see
my Tabs.srt file out here on the Desktop.
| | 03:31 | If you right-click on the file, and select
Rename, and then simply change the .srt file
| | 03:37 | extension to .txt, Windows will warn
you about renaming the file extension.
| | 03:44 | Just go ahead and select Yes, and now you
can double-click on the file, and you can go
| | 03:49 | in and edit the file.
| | 03:51 | Now, one thing to note: the time code here
is a little bit different than the time code
| | 03:55 | that's noted inside of Camtasia Studio.
| | 03:58 | So for instance, in Camtasia, we have hours,
minutes, seconds, and frames, and in this file
| | 04:05 | we have hours, minutes,
seconds, and milliseconds.
| | 04:09 | So the frame rate will not match exactly the
same, but as long as the ending time is fairly
| | 04:15 | close to the starting time of the next line,
you should be able to work through this file,
| | 04:19 | and be able to generate
your own files off of it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Making movies searchable| 00:00 | Throughout this chapter, we've seen a variety of
different methods for adding captions directly
| | 00:05 | in to our Camtasia Studio project, and you
may be thinking, wow, that's a lot of work
| | 00:10 | to go through, and is it really
going to be of benefit to my movie?
| | 00:15 | Well, I hope if you haven't been convinced
yet that this movie will completely change
| | 00:19 | your mind, because now that we've done all
this work to add the closed captioning tracks
| | 00:24 | directly onto our project, our
entire project is searchable.
| | 00:28 | There really isn't
anything else for us to do.
| | 00:31 | All we need to do is export our project
in the right format, so let's do that.
| | 00:35 | So if we come here to the top of our screen,
we can simply click the Produce & Share button,
| | 00:41 | and then click the dropdown
menu to select our desired output.
| | 00:44 | Now, there's a variety of these outputs that
will automatically work, but to make sure
| | 00:49 | that you get one that works, I'd like you to
go ahead and select Custom production settings,
| | 00:54 | so go ahead and click one time on that
option, and then click the Next button.
| | 00:58 | Next we need to choose which format that
we want to export our project into, and the
| | 01:03 | recommended format is the
MP4 Flash and HTML5 player.
| | 01:08 | This is the player that we want to select in
order to make sure that our video is searchable.
| | 01:13 | We'll simply click the Next button, and
it'll take us into our Production Wizard.
| | 01:18 | Now, there is a variety of different controls
in all the different tabs here, but the ones
| | 01:22 | that we're interested in right now
can be found here in the Options tab.
| | 01:25 | So go ahead and click on Options.
| | 01:27 | Now we can make sure that the checkbox is set
for Table of contents, and you'll automatically
| | 01:32 | get a table of contents that's based on the
markers that you've set up in your project.
| | 01:38 | Make sure that the checkbox is set to Searchable,
and then all of the text in your closed caption
| | 01:43 | track, in your markers, and if this project
was recorded from PowerPoint, all of the text
| | 01:49 | inside of your PowerPoint
slides will be searchable.
| | 01:52 | Next, make sure the checkbox is set for
Captions; that way the closed caption track will be
| | 01:57 | available to your end user.
| | 02:00 | Now, there are a couple of
options you have for closed caption.
| | 02:03 | The first is Caption type, and Closed caption
allows the user to turn those captions on or off.
| | 02:09 | The second option here of Burned into video
would take all of those captions, and it
| | 02:13 | would burn it directly onto the video, so
that it's permanently attached to there.
| | 02:17 | I like leaving my users with the option of
turning this on, so I always select Closed
| | 02:22 | captions, unless there's a
specific reason why I need to have it on.
| | 02:26 | Finally, you can choose whether or not you
want captions to be initially visible or not.
| | 02:32 | Since the vast majority of my users do not end
up using the closed captioning track directly,
| | 02:37 | I like to leave this option set to off, and
then those who need to have access to it can
| | 02:41 | turn it on if they want.
| | 02:44 | That's really all we need to set up here, so
we'll simply click the Next button, and then
| | 02:48 | click the Next button one
more time, and then Next again.
| | 02:52 | Finally, we can go in and we can set some
of the output settings for our project.
| | 02:57 | We'll need to change our Production name from
Explore California Project to something that
| | 03:02 | is a little more Web friendly.
| | 03:04 | In this case, I like to use a production name
that has no spaces or special characters in it.
| | 03:09 | So we'll simply make this EC_searchable.
We'll choose the location where we want our file
| | 03:16 | to go; mine is set to the Desktop.
| | 03:19 | If you want to set yours to the Desktop,
simply click on the little folder icon, then click
| | 03:23 | on Desktop from your Favorites, and click Save.
| | 03:27 | Now we're ready to export our project.
| | 03:28 | Go ahead and click the Finish button, and our
project will be exported out to our Desktop.
| | 03:34 | As soon as our project is finished compressing, the
file should go ahead and open up in your default browser.
| | 03:40 | Let's go ahead and preview
it and see how it looks.
| | 03:43 | (video playing)
| | 03:46 | When we move our mouse down at the bottom
of the screen, we can see that we have some
| | 03:51 | additional controls, such as the volume control,
we can turn on closed captioning, or turn it off,
| | 03:59 | we can click this button to access the table
of contents that have been laid out for us
| | 04:02 | over here on the left-hand side,
| | 04:04 | and at the top of our table
of contents is a search field.
| | 04:07 | If we click inside of that search field, we
can search for something, such as John, and
| | 04:13 | then hit the Return key, and our project will
automatically navigate to those pages where
| | 04:19 | the term John appears in
our closed caption track.
| | 04:22 | We can then press Play, and
hear exactly where we are at.
| | 04:26 | (video playing)
| | 04:35 | Let's go ahead and jump to another
location by searching for the text www.
| | 04:40 | Now, we know this is located on the last slide,
so we'll go ahead and click on one of these
| | 04:44 | options, and there we go.
| | 04:49 | (video playing)
| | 04:53 | We can see that we've
jumped directly to that slide.
| | 04:56 | So if you weren't convinced before, I hope
you are now, to spend that extra little bit
| | 05:01 | of time to go ahead and add captions
to every single one of your projects.
| | 05:05 | It's the right thing to do, and it really makes
your projects so much more dynamic and usable
| | 05:10 | to your end users.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Using Advanced FeaturesCreating an interactive quiz| 00:00 | As an educator, the single most
powerful feature of Camtasia Studio is the
| | 00:04 | ability to add
interactive quizzes to our projects.
| | 00:08 | In this movie, we'll step through the
process of creating an interactive quiz to
| | 00:12 | assess our learner's
comprehension of the materials.
| | 00:15 | Then, in later movies, we'll step through
the process of exporting our project, so
| | 00:20 | that we can collect results
from the quiz in our e-mail,
| | 00:24 | and we'll also see how to create a
SCORM-compliant assessment that can
| | 00:28 | report the results of our students
directly into our grade book of our
| | 00:32 | learning management system.
| | 00:34 | But before we get to that,
we'll need to create the quiz.
| | 00:37 | To begin, let's jump to the end of our
project by either dragging your playhead
| | 00:42 | to the end of the timeline, or if you
have an extended keyboard, by pressing
| | 00:46 | the Control and End keys on your keyboard to
automatically jump to the end of our timeline.
| | 00:52 | To start adding our quiz, we need to
make sure that our playhead is at the
| | 00:56 | location that we want
our quiz to be inserted at.
| | 00:59 | Then we go ahead and click the More button,
and select Quizzing from the dropdown menu.
| | 01:04 | We then add the quiz by simply clicking
on the Add quiz button of the Quizzing tab.
| | 01:10 | A new quiz is automatically added to
our project, and we can see the small red
| | 01:15 | triangle here indicating
the location of our quiz.
| | 01:19 | The first thing we do to
configure our quiz is to name it.
| | 01:22 | We'll select Quiz 1, and
type in a name for our quiz;
| | 01:25 | we'll call this the Tabs Quiz.
| | 01:29 | Then we'll scroll down
in the window a little bit.
| | 01:32 | Here we can see the questions that
are included as part of our quiz.
| | 01:37 | If we scroll down a little bit further,
we can set up the options for our quiz
| | 01:41 | by selecting the quiz type.
| | 01:43 | There are four types of quizzes that
you can add with a Camtasia project.
| | 01:46 | They are Multiple Choice, Fill in the
Blank, Short Answer, and True/False.
| | 01:52 | Let's go ahead and create
a Multiple Choice question.
| | 01:55 | To create the question, all we need to do
is select the question text, and type in
| | 02:00 | the text for our question.
| | 02:02 | We'll enter in the text, what keys do
you hold down to open a link in a new tab?
| | 02:08 | Next we'll scroll down in the page a
little bit, and we'll enter in our answers.
| | 02:12 | We'll click on the first answer, and
then click on it a second time in order to
| | 02:16 | select the text inside of it.
| | 02:18 | Now we'll type in some answers;
Control Key.
| | 02:23 | To add another answer, we simply click
inside of the Type an answer choice here,
| | 02:27 | and then click a second time
in order to select the text.
| | 02:32 | We'll enter in Shift Key, and then, when
we click down in the open space below, a
| | 02:36 | new answer is automatically created
for us, and we can edit that text as well.
| | 02:43 | We can press the Enter or
Return key on our keyboard to add
| | 02:46 | additional questions.
| | 02:48 | Click inside the text to name it.
| | 02:54 | And so we've added our four
answers of Control Key, Shift Key, Alt
| | 02:58 | Key, Control+Shift Key.
| | 03:01 | Next we need to select the correct answer.
| | 03:04 | The correct answer in this case is
to hold down the Control+Shift key,
| | 03:08 | so we'll check the box next to that answer.
| | 03:12 | If you want to change the order of any
of your answers, you can simply click on
| | 03:15 | the answer to select it, and then use
the up and down arrows to change the order
| | 03:20 | that the answers will appear in.
| | 03:22 | Now that we have our answers set up the
way that we want, we can scroll up to the
| | 03:26 | top, and we can see that that
question is listed here as Question 1.
| | 03:31 | To add a second question, all we need to
do is click on this button on the left
| | 03:35 | that says Add question. A new default
question type is added, and we can scroll
| | 03:40 | down, and repeat the process.
| | 03:43 | This time let's create a True/False question.
| | 03:46 | Click the dropdown menu, and
change the Question type to True/False.
| | 03:50 | Now we simply enter in the text for our
question. To create a new tab you would
| | 03:55 | select New Tab from the Edit Menu.
| | 03:58 | In this case, the correct answer is false,
so in the Answers section, we'll select
| | 04:03 | the radio button for False.
| | 04:05 | Then we can scroll up in our window; we
can see both questions have been added.
| | 04:10 | Now, in this case, I would like my
True/False question to appear first in the
| | 04:14 | list, so I'll select the question, and
then click the up arrow to change the
| | 04:18 | order in which the questions appear.
| | 04:20 | Let's go ahead and add one more question.
| | 04:23 | Click the Add question
button to add a third question.
| | 04:26 | Then scroll down, and under the
Question type, click the dropdown menu, and this
| | 04:31 | time select Fill in the Blank.
| | 04:34 | Now we can type in a question, and our
users will be prompted to type in an answer.
| | 04:40 | We'll enter in our question text: To close
a Tab you click on what button on the Tab?
| | 04:46 | Then we'll scroll down, and enter
in a list of acceptable answers.
| | 04:50 | Now, notice there's two
possible answers for this question.
| | 04:54 | The first answer is that a student
could simply type in an x, because you could
| | 04:59 | click on the x that's on the tab.
| | 05:02 | Alternatively, the name of
that button is the close button.
| | 05:06 | So if you want to accept both answers,
all you need to do is select, and type
| | 05:10 | in the other answer.
| | 05:12 | Now Camtasia will accept
either answer; either the x, or close.
| | 05:17 | Let's go ahead and scroll up, and
check the order of our quiz one more time.
| | 05:21 | The first question we have now is our
True/False question, then we have our
| | 05:25 | Multiple Choice, and then we
have our Fill in the Blank question.
| | 05:28 | We can then set up the
final parameters for our quiz.
| | 05:31 | We can choose to score our
quiz after the quiz is completed.
| | 05:35 | We can also choose whether or not
we want viewers to be able to see the
| | 05:38 | answers after they submit.
| | 05:40 | We'll go ahead and leave
both of these options checked.
| | 05:43 | Then to preview our quiz, go ahead
and click the button that says Preview.
| | 05:47 | Our browser window opens up, and we
can see the quiz appear onscreen.
| | 05:52 | Let's go ahead and take
the quiz, and see how we do.
| | 05:54 | To create a new tab you would select
New Tab from the Edit Menu. I think that's
| | 05:59 | false, so I'll go ahead
and select False for that.
| | 06:01 | Then I'll click the Next button.
| | 06:03 | What keys do you hold down
to open a link in a new tab?
| | 06:07 | I think that's the Control Key, so I'll
go ahead and click the Control Key, and
| | 06:11 | then we'll click Next.
| | 06:13 | To close a Tab you click
on what button on the Tab?
| | 06:17 | In this case, I'll go ahead and type in close.
| | 06:21 | Click the button for Submit
Answers, and then we can view our answers.
| | 06:26 | The quiz will then replay for us, and
we can click through each question.
| | 06:30 | Here we got an answer wrong. We'll go
over to the Next question, and we can see
| | 06:35 | that the correct answer has been
accepted for our Fill in the Blank.
| | 06:38 | We can then click the
Continue button to end our quiz.
| | 06:42 | Go ahead and close your browser
window to return back to Camtasia Studio.
| | 06:47 | Our quiz is completely set up at this point.
| | 06:49 | In the Produce and share chapter, we'll
step through the process of exporting
| | 06:53 | this project out, so that the interactive
quiz is included inside of our finished product.
| | 06:59 | Then in the Teaching and learning
chapter, we'll step through the process
| | 07:02 | of creating a SCORM-compliant
assessment that we can then add in to our
| | 07:05 | learning management system.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a Picture-in-Picture effect| 00:00 | A great way to improve the overall quality
of media playback inside of your Camtasia
| | 00:05 | Studio project is by replacing a piece of
recorded media with an original piece of media,
| | 00:11 | and creating a picture-in-picture effect.
| | 00:14 | In this movie, we'll step through the process
of creating that picture-in-picture effect
| | 00:19 | using a combination of a lot of the different
tools and techniques that you've already seen
| | 00:23 | throughout this title.
| | 00:24 | To begin, let's go ahead and jump down to the
picture-in-picture marker that I've already
| | 00:28 | set up for us inside of this project by pressing
the Control+Right bracket key, and then press
| | 00:34 | the Zoom in button to zoom in to
our project timeline a little bit.
| | 00:38 | At this point in our movie, we've clicked on
an embedded piece of media that we recorded
| | 00:42 | as part of our original capture.
| | 00:45 | The problem is that when we captured this
video with Camtasia Studio, we're not getting
| | 00:49 | a smooth playback of the media, so we would
like to replace this media with the original
| | 00:54 | media that's included in
this project called oo_movie.
| | 00:59 | To do this, we'll first make sure that our
playhead is exactly on the marker, so we know
| | 01:03 | where our insertion point is located at.
| | 01:06 | Then we'll come up here to our clip bin, and
drag the oo_movie media file down on to our timeline
| | 01:12 | on to the next available
track, and drop it into place.
| | 01:16 | Here we can see the overlay of the audio
files from the two pieces of media, and if
| | 01:21 | we want, we can drag the file left and right
until we get those audio files to approximately
| | 01:27 | line up. That way we know that our new movie is
going to play at the appropriate time in our video.
| | 01:34 | Since this oo_movie already has the audio
track that was recorded as part of our computer
| | 01:39 | audio during our recording process, it's no longer
needed, so we can get rid of that entire track
| | 01:45 | by simply right-clicking on the
track, and selecting Remove track.
| | 01:50 | Alternatively, you could simply adjust the
audio level of this track down to 0, so that
| | 01:56 | the track is still present, or you could cut
the audio out of our track altogether. We'll
| | 02:01 | go ahead and remove this track by
right-clicking, and selecting Remove track.
| | 02:05 | Camtasia Studio warns us that we're removing
media from our project, and wants us to make
| | 02:09 | sure that we do want to remove it. We'll
click the Yes button to get rid of that track.
| | 02:15 | Now we'll back up our playhead, and see how
this video looks in place. We'll press the
| | 02:20 | sspacebar to play a little of the video.
| | 02:24 | (video playing)
| | 02:30 | The video is looking pretty good, and
it's coming in at its highest quality.
| | 02:35 | The problem that we need to address now is
to make this video stand out from our page
| | 02:39 | just a little bit, and we'll do that by
clicking one time on the video itself, and then going
| | 02:44 | up to the More menu, and
selecting Visual Properties.
| | 02:47 | Now, with the video selected, we can add some
effects to this video to make it stand out.
| | 02:52 | Go ahead and scroll down in that window, and
check the box for Drop shadow. That'll add
| | 02:57 | a slight drop shadow
effect to that piece of media.
| | 03:01 | We can then check the box for
Border to add a border around the video.
| | 03:05 | Let's change the color of the border by
clicking the dropdown menu, and selecting this nice
| | 03:09 | Orange Primary color.
| | 03:11 | Then we can increase the thickness of the
line that's around that piece of media
| | 03:16 | to about 4. That way the video
really starts to stand off the page.
| | 03:21 | Now there's one more thing that we need to
address, and that is there a zoom effect is
| | 03:26 | being applied to our Camtasia project, and we
can see that our video is not quite fitting
| | 03:31 | directly over top of the area that the
video is at, and it looks a little awkward.
| | 03:36 | Let's open up the animation timeline, and go
back to the previous location where the animation
| | 03:42 | that we're seeing is taking effect. We'll
double-click on that animation to not only
| | 03:46 | select it in our timeline, but
activate it in our Visual Properties window.
| | 03:51 | We can then adjust the scaling of
our overall video at that location.
| | 03:56 | We'll go ahead and scale this back to about
110%. Then we can check our work by dragging
| | 04:02 | our playhead forward to see how this looks with
the new overlay video. That's looking pretty good.
| | 04:09 | Now our video is ready to preview.
| | 04:12 | Let's go ahead and back up our playhead a
little bit, and play the video to see how it looks.
| | 04:17 | (video playing)
That looks great.
| | 04:24 | Now we can check the ending of this video
inset by moving our playhead down to the
| | 04:28 | end, and press Play to see
how it looks on the other end.
| | 04:33 | (video playing)
| | 04:37 | And we go right back into our project.
| | 04:39 | Now you know how to create a picture-in-picture
effect by simply adding a piece of media, making
| | 04:44 | that media stand off the page, and then tying
it into your main project, so that it clearly
| | 04:49 | shows and highlights the
information that you want to show.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding a voiceover| 00:00 | At some point, you're going to run into the
situation where you're editing your project
| | 00:04 | in Camtasia Studio, and you need to replace
a little bit of audio with a new voiceover.
| | 00:10 | Camtasia Studio has the tools built in
to make that an easy project.
| | 00:15 | Let's go ahead and add a
voiceover to this project.
| | 00:18 | To jump to the marker that we've already got set up
in the project, press Control+right bracket on your
| | 00:23 | keyboard, and then zoom in to your project, so we
can clearly see what's going on in our project.
| | 00:28 | Let's go ahead and press the
spacebar to preview the current audio.
| | 00:34 | (audio playing)
| | 00:38 | So instead of using that as the outro, we
want to replace it with an audio file,
| | 00:43 | letting the user know that in the next movie,
they're going to learn how to use the Tabs
| | 00:46 | feature of their browser.
| | 00:48 | So let's begin by going back to that marker
by pressing the Control+left bracket key to jump
| | 00:53 | back to the marker.
| | 00:55 | Now let's go ahead and make a selection of
the existing audio by first clicking on the
| | 00:59 | track, and then using the selection
handles to select the entire end of the file.
| | 01:04 | We'll then click on the Audio button, and
scroll down, and then click the button for Silence.
| | 01:10 | This will turn the volume level all the
way to zero for that section of audio.
| | 01:15 | Now we'll double-click back at our marker to
move our playhead back to the correct starting
| | 01:19 | location, and we're ready
to record our voiceover.
| | 01:23 | To record the voiceover, we need to first click
on the More tab, and select the Voice Narration
| | 01:28 | option. We can then check the input levels
for our microphone, and make any adjustments
| | 01:33 | with this slider right here.
| | 01:35 | My input levels are looking pretty good. If
your input levels are not consistently coming
| | 01:40 | up to approximately the midpoint of this
volume indicator, you may need to increase the input
| | 01:45 | level for your microphone.
| | 01:47 | The next setting that we want to check is to
make sure that we mute our speakers during
| | 01:51 | the recording. This is a good idea, so that
if any additional sounds on any additional
| | 01:55 | tracks were to play back in our recording,
they wouldn't get picked up by our microphone.
| | 02:01 | In our case, we don't have any other audio
at this particular point in our recording,
| | 02:05 | so it's not as big of an issue, but
it could be for some of your projects.
| | 02:09 | Next all we need to do is click to Start
Recording button, and when we do, our playhead
| | 02:15 | will begin playing our movie, so we can see
the action onscreen if anything is taking
| | 02:20 | place, and we can give our new lines,
and record them on our microphone.
| | 02:24 | When we're finished giving the
line, we'll press the Stop button.
| | 02:28 | In the next movie, we'll learn how to
use the tabs feature of our browser.
| | 02:33 | We'll press the Stop Recording button, and a new
window opens up, allowing us to save our file.
| | 02:39 | You can save your file into a convenient location.
I'll go ahead and save mine out to my Desktop.
| | 02:43 | We'll go ahead and name the file outro.wav,
and then press the Save button.
| | 02:50 | The audio file is now saved, and we can now
edit the file here. Let's go ahead and preview
| | 02:55 | by pressing the spacebar to see how we did.
| | 02:59 | (audio playing)
| | 03:04 | So our audio file came in pretty good, but
now we need to adjust the audio, so that we
| | 03:08 | don't have quite as large of a pause right
before it. We can do a trim edit by simply
| | 03:13 | grabbing the left-hand edge, and dragging it
up closer to the beginning of the location
| | 03:18 | where the audio file starts. We can then
grab the entire clip, and drag it back up on our
| | 03:23 | timeline, so that it snaps directly
onto our marker that we've added.
| | 03:28 | Now we can back up our playhead a little bit
into our project, and see how the audio fits
| | 03:32 | in with the rest of our project,
and make adjustments if necessary.
| | 03:36 | (audio playing)
| | 03:43 | So our new audio is quite a bit louder than
our existing audio. We can remedy this by
| | 03:49 | clicking on the clip, and
then clicking on the Audio tab.
| | 03:53 | We can then adjust the audio level down to
a lower level, so it more closely matches
| | 03:58 | our existing audio. Let's back up
our playhead, and see how we did.
| | 04:03 | (audio playing)
| | 04:10 | That's sounding pretty good right there.
| | 04:13 | Let's go ahead and move our playhead back
to the very beginning, and zoom in a little
| | 04:17 | closer on the audio file, and
make one more slight adjustment.
| | 04:21 | And that is we'll make a small selection at
the beginning of our audio file, and then in
| | 04:26 | our Audio editing window,
will add a Fade in effect.
| | 04:29 | Now when we back up our playhead, and play this one
more time, we can see how the finished effect comes in.
| | 04:34 | (audio playing)
| | 04:37 | Now our audio sounds like it belong exactly in the
right place, and we have the correct amount of pause.
| | 04:44 | By going through this process, by adding
additional voice narration, we can add a voice overlay
| | 04:49 | into our project, and replace any
piece of audio that may have a problem.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using markers and groups| 00:00 | An incredibly helpful tool for you to
use when you're editing your Camtasia
| | 00:04 | Studio projects is to use groups and markers
to manage your media inside of your timeline.
| | 00:11 | In this project, we have a
couple of groups already set up.
| | 00:15 | Now you might be thinking, what is a group?
| | 00:18 | If we click on the small plus icon
here, we can see that there's two pieces
| | 00:22 | of media that's here on separate tracks.
| | 00:24 | We have our arrow, and we
have our original video.
| | 00:28 | Let's go ahead and move our playhead down to
that location by clicking up on the timeline.
| | 00:32 | By grouping these two tracks together, we
can collapse our timeline down to a single row.
| | 00:38 | In this next group, if we click the plus
sign, we can see that not only do we
| | 00:42 | have a variety of smaller clips that
are included in this group with multiple
| | 00:47 | clips in the first timeline, but we
have a second group created called Group 3
| | 00:52 | that has additional media grouped in together.
| | 00:54 | To create a group is incredibly easy.
| | 00:57 | All we need to do is click and drag a selection
around the media that we want to have grouped.
| | 01:03 | In this case, we'll group all
of Track 2 with all of Track 1.
| | 01:07 | You create the group by
pressing Control+G on your keyboard.
| | 01:13 | The group is automatically created for
you, and collapses all of those additional
| | 01:18 | tracks down into one single track.
| | 01:20 | You can access the information in the
group by simply clicking the plus
| | 01:24 | button to expand out the group.
| | 01:26 | If you want to ungroup a selection of
items, simply click on the group to select
| | 01:31 | it, and press Contrl+U on
your keyboard to ungroup it.
| | 01:34 | The tracks then separate, and
make the file easier to work with.
| | 01:39 | I'll go ahead and regroup these two
tracks by pressing Control+G again on my keyboard.
| | 01:44 | The other useful tool that we've been
using quite a bit throughout this training
| | 01:47 | is the use of markers, and once again,
we can access the markers by clicking the
| | 01:52 | small widget here, and
clicking the option for Show Markers.
| | 01:55 | Now we can see each of the different
markers that have been added to this project.
| | 02:00 | By adding markers, we can not only get
back to a particular point where we want to
| | 02:04 | edit, but as we saw in an earlier movie,
markers create the table of contents in
| | 02:10 | our final exported video.
| | 02:12 | So it's a good idea to go ahead and make
these markers, and add them on to your timeline.
| | 02:17 | But what happens if you are editing
your video, and you need to move your video?
| | 02:21 | If we grab our Group 4 here, and we drag
it on our timeline, you'll see that the
| | 02:26 | markers stay in place, but
our media moves out of the way.
| | 02:30 | Now are markers are no longer tied
directly to our media; they are tied
| | 02:34 | directly to our timeline.
| | 02:35 | Let's go ahead and click the Undo
button to move our groups back to the
| | 02:39 | correct starting location.
| | 02:41 | We can easily tie our markers
directly to our media, by simply making sure
| | 02:46 | that the marker view is open, and then
we can move our mouse down to the very
| | 02:50 | top of our media track.
| | 02:52 | You can see a small blue icon appear.
We'll go ahead and click that icon, and
| | 02:56 | that will pin that marker to
this particular piece of media.
| | 03:00 | Now if I move my track, you'll see that
that markers stays pinned directly to the
| | 03:05 | track, while the rest of the
markers are staying in place.
| | 03:08 | I'll go ahead and hit the Undo button
to move my track back to the correct
| | 03:12 | location, and then I'll pin the rest
of my markers directly to my media by
| | 03:16 | simply moving over this small bar right
here, and clicking to add the marker into
| | 03:21 | the correct location.
| | 03:22 | Now when we drag our media downstream,
all of the markers move with it, and our
| | 03:27 | table of contents will be
perfect when we export our final movie.
| | 03:31 | I'll go ahead and move this
clip back down to the beginning.
| | 03:33 | By using markers and groups, it's very
easy to keep your project under control,
| | 03:38 | while you're managing all of the
different assets, media, and tracks of
| | 03:42 | information inside of Camtasia Studio.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using animated titles| 00:00 | Camtasia Studio ships with a bunch of
assets that we can use to theme our projects.
| | 00:06 | The themes can be accessed
here inside of our Library tab.
| | 00:09 | In an earlier movie, we saw the Music themes, which are
located here in the top of the list of the Library.
| | 00:15 | Now let's look at the Theme section, and
explore some of the items that we can add into our
| | 00:19 | project from here.
| | 00:21 | Each theme has a name associated with it,
and then a variety of different assets.
| | 00:26 | To preview one of the assets, such as the
Animated Title, all you need to do is double-click on
| | 00:31 | the Animated Title, and you can see a
preview of it over here in your canvas.
| | 00:36 | You can also see the Basic Title by double-clicking it,
and seeing a preview of that inside of your canvas.
| | 00:42 | To access some of the other themes, just simply
click on the minus sign to close that folder,
| | 00:47 | and then click on the plus
sign to open up another theme.
| | 00:50 | Again, you can double-click on the Animated
Title to see a preview of it live in your browser.
| | 00:56 | Each of these themes are unique, but they
all consist of having an Animated Title, a
| | 01:01 | Basic Title, and then a variety of different
callouts that you can include, such as a Callout
| | 01:08 | Arrow, a Curvy Rectangle,
and a variety of other options.
| | 01:14 | I'd suggest taking some time to familiarize
yourself with a variety of the different assets
| | 01:19 | associated with the different themes.
| | 01:22 | In our case, I want to go ahead and
use this Clear Disturbance Theme.
| | 01:26 | So we'll click the plus sign for that theme,
and then we're going to use the Animated Title.
| | 01:31 | Let's get a preview to see what that
title looks like by double-clicking it.
| | 01:36 | I think this theme is going to work
really well with our current project.
| | 01:41 | So we'll go ahead and drag the
Animated Title theme object down into Track 2.
| | 01:47 | The Animated Title has been
added now onto our project.
| | 01:51 | To make sure that we can clearly edit this,
let's go ahead and click one time on our Track
| | 01:55 | 1 objects, which have been grouped, and drag
those down to the right-hand side, so that
| | 02:01 | they're out of the way.
| | 02:02 | We'll go ahead and move this back in place when
we were finished doing the editing for our title.
| | 02:07 | Next, we'll simply click one time
on the Animated Title to select it.
| | 02:12 | Now we can see that there's a plus sign,
indicating that this Animated Title is consisting
| | 02:16 | of a group of objects.
| | 02:17 | Go ahead and open up that group,
so we can see what's going on.
| | 02:22 | The group consists of a video file called
Clear Disturbance.mp4, and a Text Callout
| | 02:28 | that's sitting on an additional track.
| | 02:31 | If we want to edit the text inside of the
callout, we can simply double-click on the
| | 02:35 | Text Callout to bring up the Callouts tab.
| | 02:38 | We can then scroll down in this window, and
edit the text right here inside the text field.
| | 02:44 | Go ahead and press the Delete Key on your
keyboard to get rid of the existing text.
| | 02:48 | Then we'll add in the title Using Tabs, press
the Return Key on your keyboard to go to the
| | 02:54 | next line, and then let's change the font size.
| | 02:58 | We'll change the font size from 48 down to
28, and then we'll add the subtitle of in
| | 03:06 | the Firefox Web Browser.
| | 03:11 | That's looking pretty good.
| | 03:12 | Now we can deselect the entire animated title by
clicking anywhere off of the title on our timeline.
| | 03:19 | We can close up the group, and then drag the
title down to Track 1, and move it up, so that
| | 03:25 | it's aligned at the very
beginning of our timeline.
| | 03:29 | Let's go ahead and back up our playhead to the
beginning, and see how this title effect looks.
| | 03:33 | We'll press the spacebar on our keyboard.
| | 03:42 | That's looking pretty good.
| | 03:43 | The problem that we have now is
that this title is awfully long.
| | 03:47 | It goes on for 20 seconds. That's a really
long time in our video, and we don't need
| | 03:51 | our title to be quite that long.
| | 03:53 | Let's go ahead and move our playhead
back to approximately five seconds.
| | 03:58 | To get the timeline exactly right, once you
get close, you can use the left and right
| | 04:02 | arrows on your keyboard to move the
playhead until it snaps exactly at five seconds.
| | 04:07 | Now we'll simply use a trim edit on the back
of this clip by grabbing the right-hand edge
| | 04:12 | of the clip, and dragging it up until
it snaps directly to our timeline.
| | 04:16 | Now we've trimmed our title
to that five second time.
| | 04:19 | We can then grab the grouping for the rest of
our project, and drag it back in our timeline
| | 04:24 | until it snaps directly
to our playhead as well.
| | 04:27 | Now if we back up and play this
effect, we can see how it looks.
| | 04:32 | (video playing)
| | 04:36 | That's looking pretty good.
| | 04:37 | Let's finish off the effect by adding a
small transition in between these two clips.
| | 04:42 | To do that, we'll simply click on the Transitions
tab, and then we'll scroll down in the list
| | 04:47 | until we find the Fade option.
| | 04:49 | You can choose any transition you want.
| | 04:51 | We saw how to do this in an earlier movie.
So we'll go ahead and click one time on the
| | 04:55 | Fade, and drag it down into our timeline,
and drop it directly in between the two clips.
| | 05:01 | Now we'll back up our playhead one more time,
and preview our work to see the finished effect.
| | 05:07 | (video playing)
| | 05:10 | That's looking much better.
| | 05:12 | We now have a nice animated title that starts
off our project, so our learners know exactly
| | 05:17 | what they are going to be learning.
| | 05:18 | We can also see the transition creates a nice
smooth effect, moving from the title directly
| | 05:25 | into our main project.
| | 05:26 | You could do a similar effect by adding one
of these animated titles at the end of your
| | 05:31 | project if you wanted to add an outro
slide directly to the end of your project.
| | 05:35 | I'll let you go ahead and do that on your own,
now that you know the process to go through.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding themed callouts| 00:00 | In the last movie, we saw
how to add animated titles.
| | 00:03 | Now let's look at adding a themed
callout directly into our project.
| | 00:09 | I've added a timeline marker, which
appears in green approximately 50 seconds in.
| | 00:14 | Go ahead and click on that green marker to
jump down to that location in our timeline.
| | 00:18 | If we back up just a little bit, we can see
that we're using the Control+Shift key to click
| | 00:23 | on a link, and have it open up in a new tab.
| | 00:27 | That new tab appears
approximately right here in our timeline,
| | 00:30 | so it would be nice to have an arrow that
points at this tab to highlight it to our user.
| | 00:36 | We can use a themed
animated callout for this purpose.
| | 00:40 | To do this, we'll simply click on the Library
tab, and then we'll navigate to the theme that
| | 00:45 | we're using for this project,
which is the Clear Disturbance.
| | 00:48 | We'll click the plus
sign to open up that theme.
| | 00:51 | We can preview some of the themed callouts
by simply double-clicking on them, and seeing
| | 00:56 | how they appear here inside of our canvas.
| | 00:59 | We'll double-click a few of these
to check and see how they look.
| | 01:04 | If you're working on your own project, you
may want to check out some of the other themes
| | 01:08 | in the list, and look at
some of their options.
| | 01:10 | This basic process will work
the same for any of those items.
| | 01:14 | In our case, we're going to
add this Callout - Arrow 1.
| | 01:18 | We'll go ahead and double-click
that to see what it looks like.
| | 01:21 | Here we've got an arrow that's just
going to dissolve in, and then dissolve out.
| | 01:26 | We can add that callout directly to our
project by simply dragging it down to our timeline,
| | 01:31 | and dropping it right here
where our playhead is located.
| | 01:34 | Now we can adjust this animation by moving
our playhead just a little bit forward in
| | 01:39 | our timeline, so we can see
the arrow clearly onscreen.
| | 01:43 | We can then make the adjustments we need, just
like any other item. As we rotate it around,
| | 01:48 | you'll notice that the text that's included
inside of the callout will automatically rotate
| | 01:53 | around, so that it's in the correct orientation.
| | 01:56 | We can move the item into the correct location,
and then adjust the scaling of it, so that
| | 02:01 | it appears correctly onscreen.
| | 02:03 | Now, for the text, we can simply double-click
on the text here inside of our canvas, or we
| | 02:08 | could do the same thing down here in our
timeline to access the callout window.
| | 02:12 | Let's go ahead and scroll down, and here we can
see the Abc text that's included with this callout.
| | 02:19 | For the purposes of this callout, we don't
need any text to appear inside the callout;
| | 02:24 | we just want the item to point out to
the user where that tab is located.
| | 02:28 | So I'll simply press the Delete Key on my
keyboard to get rid of the text from the callout.
| | 02:34 | Our callout is now all set up.
| | 02:36 | Let's go ahead and back up our timeline, and
play our video to see how this animation looks.
| | 02:43 | Press the spacebar on our
keyboard to preview the video.
| | 02:46 | (video playing)
| | 02:58 | So adding a themed callout directly into your
project works the same as adding any other callout.
| | 03:03 | It just has some additional parameters, such
as the animation effects, and the text layers
| | 03:09 | that are already created as part of the theme.
| | 03:12 | You can use these assets throughout your projects
to make really dynamic and engaging presentations.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. Producing and SharingExporting a movie| 00:00 | Now that you've spent all of this time recording
and editing your project, it's time to export
| | 00:05 | your movie, so you can
distribute it out to your viewers.
| | 00:09 | Throughout this chapter, we're going to be
exporting our movies into a variety of different
| | 00:13 | formats, and using a
variety of different techniques.
| | 00:17 | Each method will be a little bit different,
and show you how to export your movie for
| | 00:22 | a particular type of audience, or for a particular type
of technology that you're using as part of your movie.
| | 00:28 | In this movie, we're going to be
exporting just a plain, basic movie.
| | 00:31 | There are no additional markers, or
closed caption track to this movie.
| | 00:35 | It's just the plain, basic movie that
we've been editing and working with.
| | 00:40 | Simply go up and click on
the Produce and Share button.
| | 00:43 | The Production Wizard will open up,
| | 00:45 | and the first thing we need to decide is
which format we're going to export our movie in.
| | 00:49 | There are a variety of different formats that
you can choose from, from this dropdown menu.
| | 00:54 | In our case, we're going to choose
one of these two MP4 Only versions.
| | 00:58 | Now, the MP4 Only versions are going to create
an MP4 movie that will play on most Desktops,
| | 01:06 | and most mobile devices.
| | 01:08 | The choice between 480p and 720p is simply
based on the editing size of your movie.
| | 01:14 | If we select the 480p model, we can see that
our current editing dimensions are 854 by 480.
| | 01:21 | We can also see that if we move the window
down just a little bit, we can see those
| | 01:25 | dimensions up here at the
top of our canvas window.
| | 01:28 | In the Description, it tells us that any
dimensions larger than 854 by 480 will automatically be
| | 01:34 | scaled down to this size if we use this preset.
| | 01:38 | If we change the preset over to the MP4 Only
for up to 720p, then it would scale any video
| | 01:45 | that we were editing at 720p down to that size.
| | 01:50 | Since we've been editing at 854 by 480, if we
export our video using this preset, we won't
| | 01:56 | gain anything by having the extra size.
| | 01:59 | So let's go ahead and change the
setting back to MP4 Only up to 480p.
| | 02:04 | You can read through the rest of the description here
to see what other features will and will not work.
| | 02:09 | But basically, this setting is
just for a plain, basic movie.
| | 02:13 | We'll go ahead and click the Next
button to move on to the next screen.
| | 02:17 | The first thing we need to do
is to set our Production name.
| | 02:21 | Now, the default name is going to
be the name of your CAMPROJ file.
| | 02:25 | We can go ahead and edit that by simply
typing directly over top of this Production name.
| | 02:30 | Instead of calling it Tabs, we're
going to call this Tabs_Movie480.
| | 02:37 | That way, later on, we'll be able to tell
the difference between this movie, and some
| | 02:41 | of the other projects.
| | 02:42 | Next, we need to set the location for
where this movie is going to be exported to.
| | 02:47 | We do that by simply clicking on the small
icon over here on the right-hand side, and
| | 02:52 | navigating on our hard drive to find the
location where we want to save the file.
| | 02:56 | In my case, I'm going to go
ahead and save it on my Desktop.
| | 02:58 | So I'll click on the link for
Desktop, and then click the Save button.
| | 03:02 | Now we'll set a couple of other options.
| | 03:05 | We want to organize our
produced files into subfolders.
| | 03:08 | That way, when Camtasia Studio exports our file
out, it will create a folder called Tabs_Movie480,
| | 03:15 | and stick all the resulting
files inside of that folder.
| | 03:19 | We can then choose whether or not we want to see
any of the production results, or automatically
| | 03:23 | open up and play the video
after the export is completed.
| | 03:26 | We'll go ahead and leave all of these
options set, and then click the Finish button.
| | 03:31 | Camtasia Studio will now begin the process
of rendering out our video, and creating that
| | 03:36 | one single file, and it's going to put it
inside of that Tabs_Movie480 folder that's
| | 03:41 | there on our Desktop now.
| | 03:47 | Now that the export is complete, our movie
opens up inside of our default video player
| | 03:52 | for our operating system.
| | 03:54 | We can then preview the video by simply
clicking the Play button, or depending on your media
| | 03:59 | player it may begin automatically
playing as soon as the video opens up.
| | 04:04 | Let's go ahead and see how this
video turned out in the end.
| | 04:07 | (video playing)
| | 04:12 | Let's go ahead and close the video,
and here we can see our production results.
| | 05:17 | This gives us a detailed review of the
production process that Camtasia went through.
| | 05:22 | Feel free to have a look at these results.
| | 05:24 | I'll go ahead and close this result, and then
I'll minimize my Camtasia project, so we can
| | 05:29 | look at the folder that got created.
| | 05:32 | If we double-click on the folder, we can see
that it did create the folder Tabs_Movie480,
| | 05:37 | and there is the movie that
got created; Tabs_Movie480.mp4.
| | 05:43 | You can take this video file,
and then use it in your projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Publishing to Screencast.com| 00:00 | Now let's publish a
video out to Screencast.com.
| | 00:04 | Screencast.com is a service hosted by TechSmith,
the company that produces Camtasia Studio.
| | 00:10 | It's a free service for a basic account, which will
allow you to serve out a certain number of your videos.
| | 00:17 | Let's step through the process of
posting this video out to Screencast.com.
| | 00:22 | To do this, we simply go up to the Produce
and Share button, and click on it one time.
| | 00:26 | Now we'll click the dropdown menu, and make sure
that we have Share to Screencast.com selected.
| | 00:33 | Some information about these
settings will be presented here to us.
| | 00:36 | We then simply click on the Next button, and
Camtasia will do a quick check to make sure
| | 00:44 | our Screencast.com settings are up to date.
| | 00:46 | Next we need to go ahead and log
in to our Screencast.com account.
| | 00:52 | If you don't have a Screencast.com account,
you can simply use this link here to step
| | 00:57 | through the process of signing
up for your own free account.
| | 00:59 | I already have a Screencast.com account, so
I'll go ahead and enter in my information here.
| | 01:06 | Once you've got your account set
up, feel free to follow along.
| | 01:13 | Be sure to type in your e-mail address that
you used to sign up for your Screencast.com
| | 01:17 | account, and then type in your password.
| | 01:19 | If you want to have Camtasia Studio remember
your password, so you don't have to go through
| | 01:23 | this step each time, go ahead and
check the box that says Remember Me.
| | 01:27 | Then click the Next button.
| | 01:32 | We then get a chance to name our video.
| | 01:33 | We'll go ahead, and select the default name of
browser, and type in Learn to use your web browser.
| | 01:43 | We can then choose which folder
we want to upload our project to.
| | 01:47 | In this case, I'll just go ahead and
take the default folder of Camtasia Studio.
| | 01:52 | If you'd like to customize your export, you
can go ahead and click on the Options button.
| | 01:56 | Here we can control how we want our controller
to appear, the size of our video, any specific
| | 02:02 | video settings that we may want to adjust,
any additional audio settings we may want
| | 02:07 | to change, or any additional settings, such
as including a table of contents, making our
| | 02:12 | movie searchable, adding the
captions with the closed captioning track;
| | 02:17 | if we had included a quiz,
we could check this box here.
| | 02:20 | If we want to allow users on Screencast.com
to be able to add comments about our video,
| | 02:25 | we can check this box.
| | 02:26 | I'm going to go ahead and leave all of these
settings at their default settings, and click OK.
| | 02:31 | Then we'll click the Finish button.
| | 02:34 | Camtasia Studio then renders out our project, and
uploads it directly to Screencast.com for us.
| | 02:41 | When everything is complete, our Web browser
should open up, and we should be taken directly
| | 02:46 | to the URL where our movie is
located up on the Internet.
| | 02:49 | We can see the URL up here:
screencast.com/ and then the rest of this URL.
| | 02:55 | I'm going to go ahead and play, just to check
and see that everything is working properly.
| | 03:00 | (video playing)
| | 03:06 | I'll go ahead and pause the video now.
| | 03:09 | Let's check our closed caption track. Yep!
| | 03:11 | The closed caption
track is appearing properly.
| | 03:13 | If we play a little bit of video,
we should see this moving along.
| | 03:16 | (video playing)
| | 03:24 | Let's go ahead and check and see
how our table of contents did,
| | 03:27 | so we'll go ahead and click on that.
| | 03:29 | And here, we can see all of our markers
have been translated into a table of contents.
| | 03:33 | We can navigate around by double-clicking
on one of those markers, and it will jump
| | 03:39 | us to that portion of our video.
| | 03:40 | Let's go ahead and play, and see how that looks.
| | 03:42 | (video playing)
| | 03:56 | All that worked great.
| | 03:57 | Let's go ahead and check one more thing.
| | 03:59 | Let's check the search field,
and see how our search field did.
| | 04:03 | Let's go ahead and type in URL, and hit Return,
and now we can see that Enter URL showed up
| | 04:10 | in a chapter marker, and
| | 04:11 | it also showed up in our
closed caption track.
| | 04:14 | We can jump to that portion of our video by double-
clicking on that result, and then press the Play button.
| | 04:20 | (video playing)
| | 04:23 | And we were able to navigate around inside
of our video using our table of contents, and
| | 04:27 | see our closed caption track.
| | 04:29 | We can go ahead and close our browser now,
and in the production summary results, we
| | 04:33 | can see the URL where our video is
located, and we have the Embed code.
| | 04:37 | If you want to include your video in another
Web site, or in your learning management system,
| | 04:43 | all you'll need to do is press the Copy
button next to this Embed code, where the text is
| | 04:48 | copied to your clipboard, then navigate inside
of your learning management system, or your
| | 04:52 | Web site, and paste the code
into the appropriate location.
| | 04:56 | When you're finished reviewing that
information, go ahead and click the Finish button.
| | 05:00 | Now you know how to upload your
video, and share it on Screencast.com.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting a PowerPoint movie| 00:00 | When you use the Camtasia Studio PowerPoint
add-in to record a PowerPoint presentation,
| | 00:05 | you reap a lot of benefits immediately
just from the fact of using that plug-in.
| | 00:12 | First of all, you get all of your markers
automatically added into your presentation for you.
| | 00:17 | These markers form the basis
for your table of contents.
| | 00:21 | Secondly, if you've included speaker notes in
your PowerPoint slides, those notes automatically
| | 00:28 | get added as the closed caption track inside of your
presentation, and get added directly into your video.
| | 00:35 | So when it's time to export your video,
you're able to reap all of these benefits.
| | 00:40 | You get a table of contents built, you get closed
captioning, and your video is entirely searchable.
| | 00:47 | Let's step through the process of
producing, and sharing your video.
| | 00:51 | To do that, go up to the
Produce and Share button.
| | 00:54 | Then you have a couple of options.
| | 00:57 | With a PowerPoint video, you're going to reap
the most benefits by choosing either Share
| | 01:02 | to Screencast.com, MP4 with video player (up
to 480p), MP4 with video player (up to 720p),
| | 01:11 | or creating your own
custom production settings.
| | 01:14 | For this video, let's go ahead and use
the MP4 with video player (up to 480p).
| | 01:21 | With these export settings, we'll be able
to take advantage of the table of contents,
| | 01:25 | closed captioning, quizzes,
hotspots, and additional features.
| | 01:31 | Because we've been editing our video at the
854 by 480 dimensions, that's the maximum size
| | 01:37 | for this type of export,
| | 01:38 | so we'll go ahead and choose this, and not
have to worry about any of the other settings.
| | 01:42 | Let's go ahead and click the Next button.
| | 01:45 | The next thing we need to do
is we need to name our file.
| | 01:47 | Because we're going to be exporting this file,
the export process is going to create a folder
| | 01:52 | with all of the content of our project included
in it, and we'll be able to upload that entire
| | 01:57 | folder directly to the Web.
| | 01:59 | So we want to change the Production name to
something that's going to be Web friendly.
| | 02:03 | In this case, instead of being Explore
California Project, we'll simply type in EC_powerpoint.
| | 02:12 | You'll notice that the Production name does
not have any spaces, or special characters.
| | 02:16 | That way, any of the Web files that use
relative links between them will work properly.
| | 02:21 | Next we need to determine the location of the
folder that we're going to export our files to.
| | 02:27 | Go ahead and click on the link over here on
the right for the folder, and then choose
| | 02:31 | a location that's appropriate on your machine.
| | 02:33 | I'm going to go ahead and
save mine to the Desktop,
| | 02:35 | so I will click on Desktop here in the
Favorites, and then simply click the Save button.
| | 02:41 | It's a good idea to check the box for
Organize produced files into subfolders.
| | 02:46 | That way all of our files would be contained
inside of one folder, and it will be easier
| | 02:50 | to manage those documents.
| | 02:52 | Next we can choose the
postproduction options that we want to set.
| | 02:56 | If we want to see the production results,
we'll leave this box checked, and then we'll
| | 03:01 | leave the second box checked as well, which
will automatically open our presentation after
| | 03:05 | the rendering is complete.
| | 03:07 | Let's complete the export by
pressing the Finish button at the bottom.
| | 03:14 | Our project then begins rendering out, and
you can see the folder that's been created
| | 03:17 | here on our Desktop that
will contain all of our files.
| | 03:21 | When the export is complete, our video should
automatically open up inside of our browser.
| | 03:26 | The export is complete, and our browser
window opened up directly to our project.
| | 03:32 | We can press the Play button
to begin playing our project.
| | 03:36 | (video playing)
| | 03:41 | We'll go ahead and pause the video,
and have a look at what got produced.
| | 03:44 | If we come over here, we can see that the audio
level controls have been added to our project.
| | 03:50 | We can turn on closed captioning
and then if we play our video --
| | 03:54 | (video playing)
| | 03:56 | -- our closed caption track appears
directly here inside of our video.
| | 04:01 | Finally, our table of contents
has been added.
| | 04:05 | We can use the table of Ccntents
to navigate around on our project.
| | 04:09 | We can click to another slide to jump to
that location, or we can come up to the search
| | 04:15 | field, and we can search for
a particular piece of text.
| | 04:18 | In this case, we'll search for Sur.
| | 04:21 | Here, the search field has searched not only
the slide titles, but it's also searched the
| | 04:26 | closed caption track.
| | 04:28 | If we want to jump to this particular link,
we can simply double-click on the link, and
| | 04:31 | it will take us directly
to that point in our video.
| | 04:34 | Let's go ahead and close the video now.
| | 04:37 | We can see the window that
has our production results.
| | 04:40 | Here, we can see all the different files
that were created, and any specific information
| | 04:45 | about the export process.
| | 04:46 | We'll go ahead and close that
by clicking the Finish button.
| | 04:50 | Then we can minimize our Camtasia project, and we
can look at the folder that was created for us.
| | 04:55 | The folder is named EC_powerpoint,
just as we named our project.
| | 05:02 | Here are all of the different files that
are created as part of this project, including
| | 05:06 | all of the code to create the player.
| | 05:09 | If you want to include this entire project
inside of one of your own Web sites, simply
| | 05:13 | upload this entire folder, and then link to
the EC_powerpoint.html file in order to link
| | 05:20 | directly to this project.
| | 05:22 | You can also open up this file in your favorite HTML
editor, and edit the HTML to customize it even further.
| | 05:32 | By using the Camtasia Studio PowerPoint add-in
to record your video, and then open that video
| | 05:37 | up in Camtasia Studio, and edit it, you have
an enormous amount of control over your final product.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Publishing to YouTube| 00:00 | One of the best ways to share your
movie is to post it on YouTube, and Camtasia
| | 00:04 | Studio makes this incredibly easy.
| | 00:07 | All we need to do is make sure we have
our movie open, and then go up to the
| | 00:11 | Produce and Share button.
| | 00:12 | We'll then click the dropdown
menu, and select Share to YouTube.
| | 00:16 | We'll then click the Next button, and we'll
go ahead and log in to our YouTube account.
| | 00:21 | Now, if you don't have a YouTube
account, you may have a Google account that
| | 00:25 | you can log in with.
| | 00:26 | If you don't, go ahead and set
up an account at www.youtube.com.
| | 00:32 | I'll go ahead and log in to my account.
| | 00:38 | I'll type in my user name,
and then my password.
| | 00:40 | If I want to save these settings, and
not have to log in again, I can check the
| | 00:45 | box for Remember Me, and then I
don't have to do this step anymore.
| | 00:49 | I'll go ahead and click the Next button,
| | 00:52 | and then we're able to set up the
specific information about our movie before
| | 00:56 | it's posted to YouTube.
| | 00:58 | We'll go ahead and give it a title;
| | 00:59 | Learn to use the Tabs feature of your browser.
| | 01:08 | For the description, we'll enter in A
short movie that shows how to use the
| | 01:13 | Tabs feature of the Firefox web browser.
| | 01:17 | We can type in any keyword tags
that we want to add to our movie here.
| | 01:20 | I'll go ahead and add keywords, and
separate them with commas: Firefox, and Tabs.
| | 01:26 | For Category, you can click the
dropdown menu and choose from a variety of
| | 01:30 | different categories.
| | 01:31 | In this case, I'll go
ahead and select Education.
| | 01:34 | Then I can choose whether or not I
want my video to be Public or Private.
| | 01:39 | I'll go ahead and set this option to
Public, and then click the Finish button.
| | 01:43 | Camtasia Studio then does the rest of the work.
| | 01:46 | It renders out our video, and
uploads it directly to YouTube.
| | 01:50 | When Camtasia finishes rendering and
uploading your video, it needs to upload
| | 01:55 | that video to YouTube, and then
YouTube needs to process the video before it
| | 01:59 | becomes available online.
| | 02:01 | Once it is, you can simply share your
video using the URL at the top of your
| | 02:05 | screen, or you can use any of the
other controls that you're already used to
| | 02:10 | using inside of YouTube.
| | 02:12 | By publishing your videos directly to
YouTube, it's very easy to share your work
| | 02:17 | out to the rest of the world.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Publishing a quiz| 00:00 | Let's step through the process of
producing a movie that has a quiz attached to it.
| | 00:05 | We can tell that this movie has a quiz
attached to it by clicking the small dropdown widget
| | 00:09 | here, and selecting the Show Quiz view.
| | 00:12 | Here we can see that we have one quiz
called Tabs Quiz associated with this movie.
| | 00:18 | The quiz appears at the
very end of our timeline.
| | 00:21 | So after our user watches our entire movie,
they will be able to take a quiz, and will
| | 00:25 | be able to assess their
comprehension of the rest of the materials.
| | 00:29 | Let's go up to the Produce and Share
button, and see how to export this project.
| | 00:33 | If we click the dropdown menu, there are a couple of
options that we can choose to incorporate a quiz with.
| | 00:39 | Those are Share to Screencast.com, MP4 player
with video player (up to 480p), and MP4 player
| | 00:47 | with video player (up to 720p), or we can
create our own Custom production settings.
| | 00:54 | The difference here is that for the Custom
production settings, and both of these MP4
| | 00:59 | settings, we'll create a folder on our local computer that
will have all of the files self-contained inside of them.
| | 01:05 | We can then use those files to upload to our own
learning management system, or to our own Web site.
| | 01:12 | Screencast.com will host our video file, and host
our quiz, and simply send us the results via e-mail.
| | 01:18 | Let's go ahead and select the option
for MP4 with video player (up to 480p).
| | 01:23 | We'll then click the Next button, and we're
able to choose how we want the results to
| | 01:27 | our quiz to be reported to us.
| | 01:30 | We can choose to have no quiz reporting at
all, so that our quiz is simply self-grading,
| | 01:35 | and our viewers are able to watch our video, click
through the quiz, and then get immediate results,
| | 01:40 | but none of those results
will be transferred back to us.
| | 01:43 | The next option, Report quiz results using
SCORM, will allow us to create a SCORM package,
| | 01:50 | which we can then load directly into our learning
management system, and have those grades reported
| | 01:56 | back to us inside of our grade book.
| | 01:58 | We'll step through this
process in a later movie.
| | 02:00 | For now, let's go ahead and choose the
option for Report quiz results through email.
| | 02:05 | We can then enter in the e-mail address
that we want to receive the quiz results.
| | 02:10 | Now, what we will get is an e-mail every time
someone completes our quiz at the end of the
| | 02:15 | day that will contain all of
the results for that quiz.
| | 02:19 | So we'll simply enter in the e-mail address
that we want to receive those results at,
| | 02:27 | and then we'll hit the Tab key, and type in
the same e-mail address again to confirm that
| | 02:31 | we got it correct.
| | 02:34 | Finally, we can choose how we want our
users to be able to identify themselves.
| | 02:41 | If we choose the first option, Require
viewers to input name & email address, anyone who
| | 02:46 | completes the quiz, and submits the results
will have to enter that information in, so
| | 02:51 | that it's not anonymous.
| | 02:52 | Otherwise, we can check the second box to
Allow viewers to take the quiz anonymously.
| | 02:57 | That way, we just collect
all of the results at the end.
| | 03:00 | This is great if you want to do a survey of results, or if
you want to know specific information about your users.
| | 03:07 | I'll go ahead and select the option to
Require users to input their name & email address,
| | 03:12 | and then click the Next button.
| | 03:13 | Finally, we can step through
the final output settings.
| | 03:17 | We can change the name of our production file.
| | 03:19 | Here we want to make sure that we're using
a Web friendly name that has no spaces or
| | 03:24 | special characters.
| | 03:25 | We'll type in Tabs_quiz.
| | 03:28 | Then we set the folder where
we want our output file to go.
| | 03:33 | We'll go ahead and click the icon here on
the right-hand side, and navigate to the folder
| | 03:38 | on our computer where we want our files to go.
| | 03:41 | In this case, I'm going to go ahead and
select my Desktop, and then click the Save button.
| | 03:45 | We can then choose if we want to have all
of our files contained into one subfolder.
| | 03:49 | This is always a good idea to do,
| | 03:51 | so I will go ahead and
leave this option checked.
| | 03:54 | For Post production options, it's always nice
to be able to see the production results, and
| | 03:59 | to open up the video immediately, so we
can see our finished product first-hand.
| | 04:04 | If you want to upload your video directly to
your Web server, you can select the option
| | 04:08 | to upload video to FTP server, and then you'd
be able to enter in some additional information
| | 04:14 | about your FTP server.
| | 04:15 | I'm going to leave this
option unchecked for now.
| | 04:18 | Finally, we're given our list of all
the files that are going to be created.
| | 04:23 | Let's go ahead and click the Finish
button, so that our project renders out.
| | 04:27 | When our project finishes rendering out,
our Web browser automatically opens up.
| | 04:31 | Here we can see a warning letting us know
that due to some of the local network security
| | 04:36 | features, some features are not quite functional
right now, but would be functional once it
| | 04:41 | was uploaded to a final Web server.
| | 04:43 | That would be the final submitting of our quiz.
| | 04:45 | Let's go ahead and click the Play
button, and see how our project looks.
| | 04:49 | (video playing)
| | 04:56 | We'll go ahead and pause the video, and then
we'll navigate around our project by clicking
| | 05:00 | on the table of contents link.
| | 05:01 | Let's go ahead and navigate all the way
down to the Summary section by double-clicking
| | 05:05 | on it, and then Play in
order to access our quiz.
| | 05:10 | As soon as the video finishes, we can see
there's a pop-up window here that appears
| | 05:14 | that allows us to take the quiz now.
| | 05:17 | We can go ahead and click on the Take Quiz Now
button, and then we're taken directly into our quiz.
| | 05:23 | We can answer the questions, such as True,
Next, we'll select Control+Shift key, and then
| | 05:31 | Next, and then we can type in the answer
for this last question; type in close.
| | 05:36 | We'll click the button for Submit Answers,
and then we'll return back to our main project.
| | 05:41 | If we want to review the answers, we can
click on the View Answers button, and we can see
| | 05:46 | the answers for our quiz, and we can see which
ones we got right, and which ones we got wrong.
| | 05:53 | If this project had been uploaded directly to
our Web server, or if we had published directly
| | 05:57 | to Screencast.com, we would then be given
the option to be able to submit our answers,
| | 06:02 | and have those answers reported back
directly to the e-mail address that we entered in.
| | 06:07 | Let's go ahead and close our browser, and we
can see the production results that have a
| | 06:10 | detailed list of all the
files that were created.
| | 06:13 | We can go ahead and review those, and then
when we're done, click the Finish button.
| | 06:17 | Now let's minimize Camtasia Studio, and we
can see the Tabs_quiz folder that was created
| | 06:23 | for us as part of the export.
| | 06:25 | Let's go ahead and double-click on that
folder, and now we can see all the contents here.
| | 06:29 | If you wanted to include this entire
project in a Web site, all you would need to do is
| | 06:34 | upload the entire folder to your Web server,
and then link to the Tabs_quiz.html file.
| | 06:41 | Being able to produce interactive quizzes
using Camtasia Studio is very easy, and you
| | 06:46 | can collect the results from your students.
| | 06:50 | It's a fantastic tool, and I
urge you to take advantage of it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Batch producing multiple movies| 00:00 | You may find yourself in a situation where
you've created several different Camtasia
| | 00:04 | Studio projects, and you want to
render them all out at the same time.
| | 00:09 | Well there's a way to do that,
and it's called batch processing.
| | 00:12 | In order to do that, all you need to do
is go ahead and open up Camtasia Studio.
| | 00:17 | You don't have to have any project open.
| | 00:20 | Then simply go up to the Tools menu, and go
down to Sharing, and select Batch production.
| | 00:26 | The Batch Production wizard opens up. Simply
click on the button that says Add files/projects.
| | 00:32 | You can then navigate your hard drive
to find each of your different projects.
| | 00:36 | If you're following along inside the Chapter 10
Exercise Files, let's go into the 01 Export Project folder.
| | 00:44 | Then select tabs.camproj; click the Open
button to add that project to our list. Then click
| | 00:51 | Add files/projects.
| | 00:53 | Go back to Chapter 10, and let's go into 02
Screencast Project, select the browser.camproj
| | 01:00 | file, and click the Open button again.
| | 01:03 | Let's add one more. Click the Add files/projects,
go back to Chapter 10 folder, and this time
| | 01:09 | go into 03 PowerPoint Project, and select Explore
California Project.camproj. Go ahead and click the Open button.
| | 01:17 | Now we have all three projects that we've
been working on queued up inside of our batch
| | 01:23 | processor. Let's go ahead
and click the Next button.
| | 01:26 | Now we have a choice between using one production
preset for all of our files, or we can choose
| | 01:33 | a custom preset for each individual file.
| | 01:36 | Let's go ahead and use
one preset for each file.
| | 01:39 | We can then click the dropdown menu; we can
choose from some of the different presets.
| | 01:43 | Let's go ahead and select MP4 only (up to
480p). That's the minimum settings, and it's
| | 01:49 | going to create a simple movie
file for each of our project files.
| | 01:53 | If we wanted to customize the preset manager,
we could use the button here to go into that.
| | 01:57 | Let's go ahead and click the Next button.
| | 01:59 | Now we can set where we want
our output folder to be located.
| | 02:03 | We can click the folder icon over here to
the right, and we can navigate on our hard
| | 02:07 | drive to find that location.
| | 02:08 | I am going to simply select my
Desktop, and then click the OK button.
| | 02:13 | It's a good idea to choose Organize produced
files into sub-folders, and to go ahead and
| | 02:18 | show the production
results when we are finished.
| | 02:20 | When you're all set,
click the Finish button.
| | 02:23 | The batch render process will then begin.
Each of your files is queued up, and you can
| | 02:29 | see the Status, the Start time, when the
file completes, you'll see the End time and the
| | 02:35 | Source for the final file.
| | 02:37 | Each of these files will proceed one after
another, and it may take a while for this render
| | 02:42 | process to take place, depending
on the speed of your machine.
| | 02:46 | Through the magic of editing,
our files are already done.
| | 02:51 | When the render process completes, you'll be
shown the Production Results screen, where
| | 02:55 | you can review all the information from
each of the files that have been produced.
| | 02:59 | When you're finished looking at this
information, you can click the Close button.
| | 03:03 | Your Camtasia Studio
project window opens back up.
| | 03:06 | Let's go ahead and minimize that project, and
look at the files that got created for us.
| | 03:11 | We can see that it created three folders on
our Desktop; one for each of our projects.
| | 03:16 | Then we can simply go ahead and double-click
on each of those folders, and we can see the
| | 03:20 | MP4 video file that was created
for us for that particular project.
| | 03:26 | Let's go ahead and double-click on
one of these to see what it did.
| | 03:31 | (video playing)
| | 03:36 | So in the browser video, the closed caption
track got burned in directly into the video.
| | 03:41 | Notice there are no controls here to
turn that closed captioning track off.
| | 03:45 | If we close that video, and we go over to
the tabs.mp4 video, the project file for this
| | 03:51 | video did not include the
closed captioning track,
| | 03:55 | so when we play the video, we can see that the
closed captioning track was not burned in.
| | 04:00 | (video playing)
| | 04:03 | Because of the preset we selected, that
determined what our final output file looks like.
| | 04:08 | By using the batch processing of files, we
can do all of our recording, and then all of
| | 04:13 | our editing, and then queue up all of your
files at night, and let them render out while
| | 04:18 | you sleep, and in the morning, all your files
will be finished, and ready to upload to your web site.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a custom export setting| 00:00 | Camtasia ships with a lot of really great
presets for producing and sharing our videos,
| | 00:06 | and we have been stepping through each of
those thus far throughout this chapter.
| | 00:10 | However, there are times when you want a
little more control over your exported product,
| | 00:15 | and for that, you need to create
your own custom export settings.
| | 00:19 | And in this movie,
we are going to do just that.
| | 00:21 | So let's go ahead and click on the Produce and
share button, and then select Custom production
| | 00:27 | settings from the dropdown
menu, and click the Next button.
| | 00:31 | The first choice that we need to make is to choose
which specific format we want our video exported in.
| | 00:37 | Now, I will warn you: none of these file formats
will work in every single case that you might
| | 00:42 | want to have. For instance, the MP4-Flash/
HTML5player will work for most devices.
| | 00:50 | However, if a device doesn't have the Flash
player installed on it, this option may not work.
| | 00:56 | For the Windows Media format, it works great
if you're only producing a video that's only
| | 01:02 | going to be watched by viewers who
have the Windows operating system.
| | 01:05 | However, if somebody's using a Mac, they will
need an extra plug-in in order to access the
| | 01:09 | Windows Media Player.
| | 01:12 | Likewise, for the QuickTime movie, while all
Mac users already have the QuickTime player,
| | 01:18 | and all Windows users are able to install
either QuickTime or iTunes, not everyone will
| | 01:23 | have the QuickTime movie format.
| | 01:26 | The AVI format is not a great choice in
general for shareable video; it produces a good high
| | 01:32 | quality video, but the file size is very
large, and your playback may vary depending on the
| | 01:37 | end machine that your users going to have.
| | 01:40 | The M4V format works great for iPods,
iPhones, and any iTunes compatible device.
| | 01:47 | However, this format may
not work in all devices.
| | 01:51 | The MP3 format is for audio only, and you'll lose
all of your video, but if all you're producing
| | 01:57 | is an audio only podcast, this
may be a great choice for you.
| | 02:01 | The last choice of format we have here for
GIF animation is only really useful if you
| | 02:06 | have an extremely short video, otherwise
your file size will end up being very large, and
| | 02:11 | the quality; let's just say it
leaves a little bit to be desired.
| | 02:15 | For this purpose, we are going to go ahead
and select the MP4 flash/HTML5player. For
| | 02:20 | the most part, it's the most flexible.
| | 02:22 | We'll simply click the Next button, and now
we can set some of our custom options that
| | 02:27 | we may want to choose. The first tab here
allows us set up the options for a controller.
| | 02:32 | We can choose the theme that we want for our
controller; we have a controller preview down
| | 02:37 | here at the bottom.
| | 02:38 | So if we change to some of these other options,
we can see what that option looks like down
| | 02:42 | here at the bottom.
| | 02:44 | Personally, I like the Black theme; it's got a
nice, clean, modern look to it. We can choose
| | 02:49 | whether or not we want to Auto-hide our
controls, or if we deselect this option, our controls
| | 02:55 | will automatically be displayed at
all times underneath of our movie.
| | 02:59 | I like having this option set. Even though
the trend now seems to be more towards hiding
| | 03:04 | the controls, I like having them invisible
for the user; that way there's no question
| | 03:08 | about how to control my video when
I have it published up to my site.
| | 03:11 | Let's go over the next tab, which is Size.
Here we are provided with the Embed size, and
| | 03:17 | with the final Video size.
| | 03:19 | It's a really good idea to leave these
options set as they are, unless you know the exact
| | 03:23 | size that you looking for.
| | 03:25 | If you know that, go ahead and type in those
values here. I'll go a head and leave these
| | 03:29 | set to the Default.
| | 03:30 | Next we'll go over the Video settings. If
you're familiar with video compression you
| | 03:35 | may want to come in here, and control some
of these options to make some adjustments
| | 03:39 | in your final video.
| | 03:40 | However, going into all the specific aspects
of both Video settings and Audio settings
| | 03:46 | is well beyond the scope of this course;
it's a whole course in and of itself.
| | 03:51 | Let's go over to the Options tab. Here we
can choose whether or not we want to have
| | 03:55 | a table of contents
included as part of our video,
| | 03:58 | whether or not we want our video to be
searchable, whether we want our closed caption track to
| | 04:02 | be visible, and then how we want
that closed captioned track to appear.
| | 04:06 | The default option allows us to use the
closed captions, which mean our users would be able
| | 04:11 | to turn that feature on and off as need be.
| | 04:14 | The other option here is burned into the video,
meaning our closed captions would always be
| | 04:19 | present for our users, and they would
have no ability to turn the captions off.
| | 04:24 | This can be quite distracting for some users,
so I always prefer to give my users the choice
| | 04:29 | as to whether or not they want
the captions visible or not.
| | 04:33 | If you're producing a video where most of
your users will use the captions, but not all,
| | 04:38 | you may want to check the box here to allow
the captions to initially be visible, and then
| | 04:42 | for those few users that are not going to use
the captions, they can turn that feature off.
| | 04:47 | I like to go ahead and set this to off
for most of the videos that I'm producing.
| | 04:52 | Finally, we can set whether or not we want the
quizzing to be included as part of our video.
| | 04:57 | Since we have a quiz included as part of this
project, we will go ahead and leave this option
| | 05:01 | Set, and then go to the Next button
to set up the next of the settings.
| | 05:06 | Here we can set up some additional video
information. To do that, simply click the Options button.
| | 05:12 | Here we can add a bunch of different
metadata to our video project. We can set up a bunch
| | 05:17 | of author information
| | 05:19 | if we want to attach that to our video, and
if our video is going to be imported into
| | 05:23 | iTunes, it may be helpful to go ahead
and add some of that information as well.
| | 05:28 | All of this is pretty self explanatory, and you can
feel free to go through each of the different
| | 05:33 | options, and enter in the information
that's appropriate for your video.
| | 05:37 | I'll go a head and click
the Cancel button for that.
| | 05:39 | Next, we can have Camtasia burn a
watermark directly on to our video.
| | 05:45 | Now, a watermark is the small icon that you'll
see in most of our Lynda.com videos down here
| | 05:50 | in the lower right-hand corner.
| | 05:52 | You can include a watermark
on all of your videos as well.
| | 05:55 | To do that, simply checks the box for Include
watermark, and then click the Options button
| | 06:00 | to set up the parameters for it.
| | 06:03 | You get a Watermark Preview window over here
that shows you what the watermark would look like.
| | 06:08 | Let's step to the process of
adding a watermark to this project.
| | 06:11 | We'll go and click the folder, so we can
find an image that we would want to use.
| | 06:15 | We'll navigate on our hard drive out to our
Exercise Files, and I will now go into the
| | 06:20 | Chapter 10 folder in the Custom Settings project.
| | 06:23 | Here I've got a logo.png file that's ready
for us to add as a watermark. Go ahead and
| | 06:29 | click one time on that file,
and then click the Open button.
| | 06:32 | The watermark appears here
inside of the Preview window.
| | 06:36 | We can now set some different options. We
can choose to have that watermark appear as
| | 06:40 | simply an Emboss, and you can see
what that looks like over here.
| | 06:43 | It's not quite the effect I'm looking for,
so I'll go ahead and uncheck that box.
| | 06:48 | If your file type needs to use a specific
transparent color, you can check this box here,
| | 06:53 | and then set the parameter.
| | 06:54 | Since we are using a PNG file that already
has transparency added to it, we don't need
| | 06:59 | to use this option.
| | 07:01 | Next we can choose how we want to
control the scaling of our watermark.
| | 07:05 | If you use this slider here, you can drag
the slider to the right, and increase the size
| | 07:09 | of your watermark, or you can drag it
to the left, and decrease the size.
| | 07:13 | I'll like set my watermark to about 15%. That way
it's a fairly small size over here in the corner.
| | 07:20 | Next we can choose where we want to position
our watermark. We use this positioning grid
| | 07:26 | here on the left-hand side of the window.
| | 07:28 | We can click one of the regions, and have
a watermark move directly to that region.
| | 07:32 | I'll go a head and set my watermark to be
in the lower left-hand corner of my video.
| | 07:37 | Then you can choose the
Horizontal and Vertical Offset.
| | 07:40 | If you are adjust this slider, it will move
the watermark to that desired offset Location,
| | 07:45 | 5% seems to be a pretty good value for
both the Horizontal and Vertical offset.
| | 07:51 | Now that we have our Watermark settings set, let's
go ahead and click the OK button to accept them.
| | 07:56 | The next option we can set is a HTML options.
| | 08:00 | Since we're going to produce a video with
all of the associated HTML files, you may want
| | 08:04 | to go ahead and click on this button here,
and then you can title your HTML page, so that
| | 08:09 | reflects something that's more appropriate.
| | 08:11 | In this case, we'll go ahead and select the title, and
type in Learn to use the Tabs feature of your browser.
| | 08:22 | Since our title is very descriptive, it will
help with the search engine optimization, and
| | 08:27 | it'll help with our overall rankings when
our page is picked up by the search engines.
| | 08:31 | Let's go ahead and click the OK
button, and then click the Next button.
| | 08:36 | Next we can set up how we want our
markers to work with a table of contents.
| | 08:41 | If we want a number each of our marker
entries, we could check this box here.
| | 08:45 | I think our markers are labeled
quite clearly, so we'll uncheck the box.
| | 08:50 | Next we can choose whether or not we want to
have our table of contents initially visible
| | 08:54 | as soon as the project file opens.
| | 08:56 | If we want to do that, we can check this.
| | 08:57 | I am going to go ahead and leave that off, and let
the users discover the table contents on their own.
| | 09:04 | If we want to hide a particular marker, such
as Open Link, we could simply on check that
| | 09:09 | box, and then that marker would not
appear inside of our table of contents.
| | 09:14 | I'll go a head and leave all of mine checked, because
all of them are appropriate for our particular video.
| | 09:19 | If you wanted to rename one, you could select
the Rename button right here, and change the
| | 09:23 | name of one of your markers.
| | 09:25 | Finally, we can control how we want our
table of contents to be displayed; whether we want
| | 09:29 | the text and the graphics to
be aligned left, or aligned right.
| | 09:33 | And then we can choose whether or not we want
our markers to be displayed with text and
| | 09:37 | thumbnails, text only, or only thumbnails.
| | 09:40 | I like the option of Text with thumbnail,
because it gives the most information to our viewers.
| | 09:45 | They can see a picture representing the particular
frame of the video, and they have a text description
| | 09:51 | that gives them additional information.
| | 09:53 | Let's go a head and click the Next button.
| | 09:55 | Now we can choose how we
want our quiz to be produced.
| | 09:58 | We've already seen some of these options, so
we'll go ahead and leave is set to No quiz
| | 10:02 | reporting for this particular project.
| | 10:04 | Then we'll go ahead and click the Next button.
| | 10:07 | On our final page, we set up
the Production name for our file.
| | 10:11 | Again, you want to make sure that you're using a
Production name that has no spaces or special
| | 10:16 | characters, because this name is going to be
included in some of the HTML, JavaScript,
| | 10:21 | and other files that are going to be
produced as part of this project file.
| | 10:26 | We'll go ahead and call this tabs_project.
| | 10:30 | We'll then set our location where
we want the files to be saved too.
| | 10:34 | We click the folder icon over here to the right,
and then we will select the desired location.
| | 10:38 | I am going to go ahead and save mine to the
Desktop, so I will click on Desktop, and then
| | 10:43 | click the Save button.
| | 10:44 | It's always a good idea to organize produced
files into subfolders. You can also choose
| | 10:50 | to show the production results, and to
play the video after production is finished.
| | 10:55 | If we were going to upload this file directly
to an FTP server, we could check this box, and
| | 10:59 | then we would have some
additional settings we could set up.
| | 11:02 | Let's go ahead and leave this box unchecked, since
we are not going to upload the file right now.
| | 11:06 | We get a summary of our project, and then we can
click the Finish button to begin the render process.
| | 11:13 | The rendering will take place, and our files
will all be created inside of our tabs_project
| | 11:19 | folder that's located here on our Desktop.
| | 11:22 | When our project finishes rendering out, our
browser should automatically open up to our video.
| | 11:28 | Now we can check our work. Already we can
see the watermark that's been added directly
| | 11:33 | to the lower left-hand corner of our
project where we told it should be.
| | 11:36 | Let's go ahead and click the Play
button, and check over the rest of our file.
| | 11:40 | (video playing)
| | 11:46 | We'll go ahead and pause the video. Here we
can see the custom player controls that we
| | 11:50 | selected, and they were initially visible.
| | 11:53 | We didn't have to move our mouse over top of
the video in order to get them to appear.
| | 11:57 | We have our closed caption track that we can
turn on, or turn off, we can access our table
| | 12:02 | of contents, and navigate around. Our
project is searchable with the search field here.
| | 12:08 | We can use the full screen button to
expand our project up to full screen.
| | 12:12 | Everything seems to be
working as we expected it.
| | 12:15 | Let's go ahead and close our project window,
and we can review the Production Results.
| | 12:19 | If you scroll down through the list, you
can see a detailed review of all the settings
| | 12:24 | that we just created.
| | 12:26 | Let's go ahead and press the Finish button,
and it will return us right back to our project.
| | 12:30 | If we minimize our project out of the way, we can
review the tabs_project folder by double-clicking
| | 12:36 | it, and seeing all the files that got created.
| | 12:39 | If you're uploading this project to your Web site,
all you need to do is upload the entire project
| | 12:44 | folder, and then create a link out to the
tabs_project.html file from inside of your Web site.
| | 12:51 | You could also open this project file up in
your HTML editor of choice, and you can further
| | 12:56 | customize the project.
| | 12:59 | Now that you have been through the custom settings
once, I encourage you to go back through those
| | 13:02 | settings, and make a bunch of changes to your
projects, render them out, and see how they work.
| | 13:08 | Make sure that your projects work with your
particular Web server, and your particular
| | 13:12 | circumstances. There's no one set of settings that
are going to work for everyone in all situations,
| | 13:18 | but with a little bit of trial and error,
you'll be able to find the specific settings that
| | 13:22 | are going to be work best
for you and your projects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sharing custom export settings| 00:00 | Throughout the rest of the movies in
this chapter, we've been going through
| | 00:04 | producing and sharing our videos
using all of the presets that are included
| | 00:08 | inside of Camtasia Studio.
| | 00:10 | In the last movie, we just stepped through the
process of creating our own custom presets.
| | 00:16 | Now, if you have not gone through that
movie, you need to go through that movie,
| | 00:20 | because you'll be creating all of the
specific settings that we're going to be
| | 00:23 | using in this movie.
| | 00:24 | So if you didn't go through it, go
back a movie, watch that movie; follow
| | 00:28 | along to make sure that your copy of Camtasia
is set up exactly the same way that mine is.
| | 00:33 | Now let's go ahead and create our own
custom preset settings that we can reuse,
| | 00:39 | and then share out to other users.
| | 00:41 | To do this, simply go up to the
Produce and share button, and then in the
| | 00:45 | dropdown menu, select the
bottom option: Add/Edit presets.
| | 00:50 | Here we can select one of the
existing preset options that are already
| | 00:54 | available inside of Camtasia Studio,
but we want to create our own custom
| | 00:59 | preset settings, so we'll click the New
button, and then we'll name our preset settings.
| | 01:05 | We'll call this our Lynda.com Settings.
We'll give it a description of settings
| | 01:11 | created for my Lynda.com training.
| | 01:13 | We will then step through the
process of setting up all of our individual
| | 01:21 | settings. Because we just stepped through
this process in the last movie, all of our
| | 01:26 | presets will remain.
| | 01:27 | If we want to choose a custom icon
for our settings, we can choose that by
| | 01:31 | clicking on the Choose Icon, and
navigate on our hard drive, and find an
| | 01:36 | icon that's appropriate.
| | 01:37 | In this case, we're to leave no icon set,
then we'll simply click the Next button.
| | 01:43 | All of our settings from the last movie are
still here. We'll just click the Next button,
| | 01:47 | and then here on the Video
Options, we'll click the Finish button.
| | 01:52 | Finally, our preset settings have
been added. We can review all the preset
| | 01:57 | information by scrolling down
here, and then click the Close button.
| | 02:01 | Now when we go back into our Camtasia
Studio Production window, and we click the
| | 02:05 | dropdown menu, there we have our Lynda.com
Settings ready for us to select and
| | 02:10 | use as part of our project.
| | 02:12 | We'll go ahead and click the Cancel
button, because we don't need to produce
| | 02:15 | this video right now.
| | 02:17 | The next thing that you may want to do
is, if you're working in a team of users,
| | 02:21 | you might want to share
those settings with another user.
| | 02:23 | So we'll go ahead and access those
settings by minimizing our project.
| | 02:28 | If you're using Microsoft Windows XP
or earlier, you'll need to look for your
| | 02:33 | file in c:\documents and settings\
my documents\camtasia studio\custom
| | 02:42 | production presets 8.0.
| | 02:45 | If you're using Windows 7 or
earlier, you'll look for your files in
| | 02:49 | c:\user\documents\camtasia studio
\custom production presets 8.0.
| | 02:59 | We'll go ahead and
navigate to that location now.
| | 03:03 | I'll come down and click on my
Start menu, and start by accessing from
| | 03:07 | my Documents folder.
| | 03:08 | I can then go directly into my
Camtasia Studio folder, and find my Custom
| | 03:13 | Production Presets 8.0 folder.
| | 03:16 | When I open that up, I can find my
Lynda.com Settings.html file. I can simply
| | 03:22 | e-mail this document to another
member of my team. They'll need to put that
| | 03:27 | document into this same location on
their machine. Then, when they restart
| | 03:31 | Camtasia Studio, that preset should be
available to them. I'll go ahead and
| | 03:36 | include this preset file inside of the
Exercise File, so you can add it directly
| | 03:41 | into your files as well.
| | 03:44 | By creating your own custom settings,
you'll save yourself a lot of time on the
| | 03:49 | production and sharing of your projects,
so that you'll always have a set of
| | 03:52 | settings that work
specifically for your situation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Teaching and Learning TechniquesPublishing SCORM assessments| 00:00 | In previous movies, we've seen how to add a
quiz directly into one of our projects, and
| | 00:05 | then export that quiz out, so that our learners
will simply be able to see feedback directly
| | 00:11 | inside of the quiz, or we've seen how to
produce and share that project, so that the results
| | 00:16 | can be e-mailed directly to us.
| | 00:18 | In this movie, we're going to step through
the process of creating a SCORM compliant
| | 00:23 | shareable object that we can then load
into our learning management system.
| | 00:27 | Now, you maybe wondering, what
is a SCORM compliant object?
| | 00:32 | SCORM stands for Shareable Content Object
Reference Model, and it's essentially just
| | 00:37 | a standard that's been created to allow developers
to create learning objects, and have them interact
| | 00:44 | with other learning management systems.
| | 00:46 | Now, for the purposes of this movie, you'll
be able to follow along, and create the same
| | 00:50 | SCORM compliant object that I'm
going to be creating onscreen.
| | 00:53 | After that, I'm going to show you how to upload that
object directly into a learning management system.
| | 00:59 | I'm going to be using the Moodle Learning
Management System that I've loaded locally onto my machine.
| | 01:05 | Now, there are a bunch of different learning
management systems out there. Some of the
| | 01:08 | most popular ones are Moodle, and Blackboard.
| | 01:11 | If you'd like to learn more about those
learning management systems, feel free to check out
| | 01:16 | some of the great titles that we have
here at Lynda.com on Moodle, and Blackboard.
| | 01:21 | Let's get started by creating our SCORM object,
by clicking on the Produce and share button,
| | 01:26 | and then make sure you select MP4 with video
player (up to 480), and click the Next button.
| | 01:33 | Next we'll select the option to Report quiz
results using SCORM, and then click the SCORM
| | 01:39 | options button, so we can set up
some more specific parameters.
| | 01:43 | We need to add some
metadata for our SCORM manifest.
| | 01:46 | The first item for Identifier
is automatically created for us.
| | 01:50 | It's a uniquely generated key that will
identify this particular SCORM object.
| | 01:55 | Next we need to add a title.
| | 01:57 | Now, this would be the title of your course,
and the course that I'm going to be adding
| | 02:00 | this object to is called Web Basics.
| | 02:04 | For the Description, you'd add
in a description for your course.
| | 02:08 | In this case, I'll simply add
Introduction to Web Basics.
| | 02:14 | For the Subject, this will be the
subject or discipline that your course is in.
| | 02:19 | I'll go ahead and add Information Technology.
| | 02:26 | Version refers to the version of SCORM that
your particular learning management system
| | 02:30 | is compliant with.
| | 02:31 | Since I'll be using the Moodle Learning
Management System, I'll go ahead and leave this set to
| | 02:35 | 1.2, which is the default.
| | 02:37 | Most of the current modern learning
management systems will also use this setting.
| | 02:41 | Next we'll come down
here to Lesson information.
| | 02:44 | Here we'll give this lesson a name.
| | 02:46 | We'll simply call it Browsing with Tabs.
| | 02:49 | Finally, we need to select some
options for our SCORM package.
| | 02:54 | We can either simply produce a ZIP file that
we would upload into our learning management
| | 02:58 | system, we could produce the unzipped files,
or we could produce both, so we could check
| | 03:02 | our work on our local machine.
| | 03:04 | Let's go ahead and select the option for
produce both with zip file, and unzipped files, and
| | 03:10 | then click the OK button.
| | 03:11 | Then click the Next button, and
we'll set up our final output settings.
| | 03:16 | We need to set a Production name.
| | 03:18 | We'll go ahead and call this one tabs_scorm.
| | 03:20 | Then we'll set the folder
where we want our files to go.
| | 03:25 | We'll click the folder icon, and make sure
we're pointed out to our Desktop; it's a
| | 03:29 | nice convenient place.
| | 03:30 | If you would like to save your
files in another location, feel free.
| | 03:33 | Go ahead and click the Save button.
| | 03:35 | You want to make sure that we have
Organize produced files into sub-folders checked.
| | 03:40 | For the Post production options, I'll go ahead and
uncheck Play video after production (before upload).
| | 03:45 | We've already seen that step in several other
movies, so we'll go ahead and skip that for
| | 03:49 | now, but we will show the production results.
| | 03:52 | Then we'll click the Finish button.
| | 03:55 | Our project then renders out, and our SCORM
object is going to be created in the new tabs_scorm
| | 04:01 | folder that's been added to our Desktop.
| | 04:03 | When our project finishes exporting, we can
see our Production Results, and review them.
| | 04:08 | We can see here that one of the files that
got created is our tabs_scorm.zip file; that's
| | 04:14 | the file that we're going
to be most interested in.
| | 04:16 | Let's go ahead and click the Finish button,
and then we can minimize our Camtasia project,
| | 04:21 | and open up the tabs_scorm folder, so
we can see the files that got created.
| | 04:27 | The file that we're most interested in
is this one right here: tabs_scorm.zip.
| | 04:33 | This is the file that you would load
into your learning management system.
| | 04:36 | Now, for the rest of this video, I'm going
to demonstrate that process using Moodle.
| | 04:41 | Now, for the rest of this movie, don't worry
about following along, because each learning
| | 04:45 | management system is going to be different,
but I want you to see the power of being able
| | 04:49 | to add a SCORM compliant asset.
| | 04:51 | I'm going to go ahead and close this window.
| | 04:53 | I've already got my Firefox Web browser loaded
up to a local copy of Moodle, and you can see
| | 04:59 | that I'm the one that's logged in,
and I'm logged in as the instructor.
| | 05:03 | We'll go ahead and our tabs_scorm
object directly into our project.
| | 05:07 | I'm going to click on the Add an activity
or resource, and then select SCORM package.
| | 05:12 | I'll go ahead and click the Add button,
and then I'll give my package a name.
| | 05:16 | I'll simply call this Browsing with Tabs,
and for Description, Learn to use the Tabs
| | 05:27 | feature of your browser.
| | 05:30 | I'll then scroll down in the page to where
I've got the package information, and I need
| | 05:37 | to add in the zip file.
| | 05:38 | I'll go ahead and open up that tabs_scorm
project folder, and drag the zip file, and drop
| | 05:44 | it directly inside of my browser.
| | 05:48 | That will add the zip file into the Upload
field, and then I'll simply scroll down to
| | 05:52 | the bottom, and click Save and return to course.
| | 05:56 | Now we can see that the Browsing
with Tabs assignment has been created.
| | 06:00 | I'm going to go ahead and click on the Grades
to look inside of the grade book, and we can
| | 06:05 | see that we have one student currently in
the course, Elvis McNamara, and the Browsing
| | 06:10 | with Tabs assignment has been
automatically created inside of our grade book.
| | 06:15 | Now let's see what happens when a
student completes this assignment.
| | 06:18 | I have another Web browser opened up, and you can see
that I'm logged in as the student Elvis McNamara.
| | 06:24 | I'm going to go ahead and refresh this page,
and now we can see the Browsing with Tabs
| | 06:29 | assignment that we just added.
| | 06:31 | I'll go ahead and click on the assignment,
and we're given a little bit of instructions
| | 06:36 | about the assignment.
| | 06:37 | We'll then click the Enter button to go
into the assignment, and I'll hide the sidebar,
| | 06:43 | and expand my browser out to full screen.
| | 06:46 | I can then scroll down on the
page, and interact with the movie.
| | 06:52 | (video playing)
| | 06:57 | We've already seen this several times, so
I'll go ahead over, and I'll click on the table
| | 07:01 | of contents, and then jump
directly to the Summary section.
| | 07:07 | Now we'll watch the last bit of
the movie, and enter into our quiz.
| | 07:14 | (video playing)
| | 07:21 | We can now take the quiz.
| | 07:22 | I'll go ahead and click the Take
Quiz Now button to have the quiz begin.
| | 07:26 | I'll then step through answering each of the
questions, and click the Next button after
| | 07:31 | I select my choice.
| | 07:34 | Finally, I'll click the Submit Answers button.
| | 07:38 | I can then review the answers
to see how I did on the quiz.
| | 07:42 | Finally, I can click the Continue button.
If I wanted to, I could replay this assignment,
| | 07:48 | or simply scroll back up in the page,
and click the Exit Activity button.
| | 07:54 | From the student's
perspective, everything just worked.
| | 07:57 | Now I'll go ahead and minimize this browser,
and I'll go back to my Mozilla Firefox browser,
| | 08:02 | where I'm logged in as the instructor.
| | 08:05 | Once again, I'll refresh
the page on the grade book.
| | 08:08 | Now we can see that Elvis's score has been
automatically added into our grade book for
| | 08:14 | us by the SCORM compliant object.
| | 08:17 | So within a few steps, we were able to take
a quiz that we created inside of Camtasia
| | 08:22 | Studio, export it out using the SCORM options,
and then add it into a learning management
| | 08:28 | system, where a student can complete that
assignment, and the grade is automatically entered in
| | 08:33 | to our grade book for us,
saving you time and effort.
| | 08:38 | Now, obviously the steps to go through on
the different learning management systems, and
| | 08:42 | any learning management system that you have
set up at your school or university may be
| | 08:47 | different, but work with your IT department,
or your instructional designers, and they will
| | 08:51 | get you set up.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Recording training videos for software| 00:00 | Perhaps the most common feedback I hear
from teachers is that they want to spend
| | 00:04 | more time with students, focused on
teaching their content, and less time focused
| | 00:09 | on teaching software.
| | 00:11 | This is one problem that Camtasia
Studio can certainly help you with.
| | 00:15 | Screencast could quite possibly be the
single best way to learn software that
| | 00:21 | has yet been invented.
| | 00:22 | Your students can see the action on
screen. They can hear you explain how best
| | 00:27 | to use the tools. They can read the
captions, and can have their comprehension
| | 00:32 | assessed all inside of a single movie.
| | 00:37 | With a little bit of upfront work, you
can create your own collection of learning
| | 00:41 | objects that cover the specific tools
that your students need to master in order
| | 00:47 | to be successful in your class.
| | 00:50 | You've already seen a lot of
techniques for preparing, recording, editing, and
| | 00:54 | producing your own screencast
throughout this title.
| | 00:57 | I'd like to take a minute, though, and
give you just a few more tips on preparing
| | 01:01 | your own video-based learning objects.
| | 01:04 | First, and most important of all, is to
focus on your specific assignments, and
| | 01:09 | projects for your class.
| | 01:11 | What are the key challenges that get
your students hung up year after year?
| | 01:16 | Target those top two to five
challenges for each project, and develop short,
| | 01:22 | concise videos that address each
issue individually. Then, the next time you
| | 01:27 | teach the course, you'll already have
these videos ready to go, and you can simply
| | 01:32 | add the next few short
videos to your collection.
| | 01:35 | Make sure you keep each movie
focused on one specific topic, though.
| | 01:40 | You may be tempted to simply create
one movie that tries to cover all the
| | 01:44 | material, but try to resist this
urge, and take on each topic separately.
| | 01:50 | Trust me; your students will thank you
when they can get the just enough in time
| | 01:55 | training they need to fill a specific
knowledge gap, and move on, rather than
| | 02:00 | watching lots of content that may not
be relevant to their specific need at
| | 02:04 | that specific time.
| | 02:08 | Next, as you prepare your materials, use
resources, such as the program's built-in
| | 02:14 | help system, or manual.
| | 02:16 | By spending a few minutes to truly
master a technique well enough to teach it to
| | 02:21 | someone else, you'll greatly increase
your confidence and knowledge when it comes
| | 02:26 | to teaching with technology.
| | 02:29 | Learn from your fellow teachers. Spend
some time searching online at Web sites
| | 02:34 | such as Lynda.com, YouTube, Screencast.com,
and others to see how your fellow
| | 02:40 | teachers may have addressed this
issue already with their students.
| | 02:44 | There's a good chance you'll be
able to find a movie on your specific
| | 02:48 | application that addresses the same
challenges that your students are facing.
| | 02:52 | By recording your own movie for your
students, you'll be better able to address
| | 02:57 | their specific needs.
| | 02:59 | And speaking of Lynda.com, if you want
to see great video-based training in
| | 03:03 | action, spend some time browsing
through the online training library, and don't
| | 03:08 | limit yourself to titles and
authors you're already familiar with.
| | 03:12 | We all have a slightly different style
of instruction, so I strongly encourage
| | 03:17 | you to spend some time exploring the
online training library, and watching a wide
| | 03:22 | variety of movies with a focus on
how we cover complex challenges.
| | 03:28 | Finally, have some fun, and don't
worry about producing an Oscar-nominated
| | 03:33 | instructional video. Your video does
not have to be perfect, and with practice,
| | 03:39 | your overall quality will naturally improve.
| | 03:42 | As with anything, recording video-based
instruction just takes practice to get
| | 03:47 | it right. You're already a great
teacher; just record it, and distribute it to
| | 03:52 | your students.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using screencasts for grading| 00:01 | Did you know that you could use Camtasia
Studio to help you with your grading?
| | 00:05 | Many teachers have spent countless
hours bleeding red ink all over the papers
| | 00:10 | that their students have handed in to
them, in hopes that the students would go
| | 00:14 | back, read the comments,
and learn from their mistakes.
| | 00:18 | However, if you have your students hand
in their assignments electronically, you
| | 00:22 | can open them up on your computer,
launch Camtasia Recorder, press the Record
| | 00:27 | button, talk the students through
their assignment, point out all the places
| | 00:31 | where they've made errors,
or need to make adjustments.
| | 00:34 | By making a couple of quick changes
inside of Camtasia Recorder, we can make this
| | 00:38 | process even easier.
| | 00:40 | Go ahead and open up Camtasia
Recorder, and click on the Tools men,u and
| | 00:44 | then select Options.
| | 00:48 | When the Options window opens up,
make sure you're on the General tab.
| | 00:52 | Come down to the Saving section,
where you've been working with the Record
| | 00:55 | to .camrec file format.
| | 00:57 | Go ahead and change that
file format over to .avi.
| | 01:01 | When you record to .avi file, you can
take those files, and send them directly to
| | 01:06 | your students, and they can open them up.
| | 01:08 | They don't need Camtasia
Studio in order to view that media.
| | 01:11 | Now, the file formats can be a little
bit large, and you may want to go ahead and
| | 01:15 | compress the files afterwards,
| | 01:17 | but this will give you a very quick and
easy way to be able to record the videos
| | 01:21 | in a way that you can give them to your students.
| | 01:24 | Next go over to the Program tab.
| | 01:26 | Here we'll change a couple of
settings in the workflow section.
| | 01:30 | Uncheck the box for Show
countdown timer before recording.
| | 01:33 | Once you get in the habit of doing
these recordings for your students over and
| | 01:38 | over, you don't want to have to sit and
wait for the countdown timer each time
| | 01:42 | to come up onscreen.
| | 01:43 | You'll also be able to remember the
keyboard command of F10 to stop the
| | 01:47 | recording when you're done,
| | 01:49 | so you won't need the little reminder.
| | 01:51 | Next, check the box next to Hide
preview window after recording is stopped, and
| | 01:56 | make sure that the dropdown menu is set to Save.
| | 02:00 | That way you don't have to review the
materials after you record a response to
| | 02:04 | your students each and every time.
| | 02:06 | Camtasia Studio will
automatically bring up the Save dialog box.
| | 02:11 | Let's go and click OK, and I'll show
you a quick sample using this Sample Data
| | 02:15 | Table Excel spreadsheet as to how to
review a document with your students.
| | 02:20 | I'll go and press the Record key,
and began recording immediately.
| | 02:23 | When I opened this document, I'm
looking here, and I can see that you've not
| | 02:29 | centered the text here inside of these cells.
| | 02:32 | You want to make sure that you center it.
| | 02:33 | So go ahead and select the cells, and
come up, and click the center button.
| | 02:37 | Next, when I was looking at your
document, I noticed that you entered in specific
| | 02:42 | values for each of these totals.
| | 02:45 | That will work, but if you've got a really
large data table, that can be quite tedious.
| | 02:49 | A better way to do this would be to
click into an open cell, press the Equals
| | 02:54 | key on your keyboard, and then go over
and click the first cell that you want to add.
| | 02:59 | Press the Plus key to create a
sum, and then click on the second cell.
| | 03:04 | If you hit Return on your
keyboard, Excel will do that work for you.
| | 03:08 | You can then copy that down to the
rest of the cells by simply grabbing the
| | 03:12 | lower right-hand corner, and dragging it down.
| | 03:14 | Now you get the same results, but in
each of these cells, you can see right here
| | 03:19 | that there's a formula that's
doing the calculation for you.
| | 03:23 | Next time you do this work, I want to
see the formulas that you've created, so
| | 03:27 | that you're a little bit more efficient.
| | 03:28 | As soon as your recording is done,
and you press the F10 key, you can then
| | 03:35 | immediately save your
document to a convenient location.
| | 03:39 | I would then typically save the file
with the student's name, and I'll put it in
| | 03:45 | a convenient location, such as on my Desktop.
| | 03:48 | Now I'm ready to review the
answers from my next student.
| | 03:52 | By using Camtasia Studio to help you
with your grading, your students will get
| | 03:56 | much more effective and rich
feedback from you, and there learning will
| | 04:01 | continue to increase.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Flipping your classroom| 00:00 | We all struggle with the fact that we
have more and more content to cover in our
| | 00:04 | courses than we have time for.
| | 00:06 | One part of the solution to this
problem is to do what is commonly referred to
| | 00:11 | as flipping your classroom.
| | 00:12 | The traditional way of teaching a
class is to have class time for the
| | 00:17 | dissemination of
information in a variety of formats,
| | 00:21 | the most common being the lecture.
| | 00:23 | The students then have out of class
time to work homework problems, group
| | 00:28 | projects, or other types of assignments.
| | 00:31 | By flipping the classroom,
you turn this model upside down.
| | 00:35 | Instead of giving your PowerPoint slides,
or chalk and talk lectures in front of
| | 00:40 | your students, you record
these lectures with Camtasia.
| | 00:43 | You then provide these materials to
your students for them to review on their
| | 00:48 | own time outside of class.
| | 00:50 | Now, I know what you're thinking:
| | 00:52 | but Chris, if I post my lectures online,
then my students won't need to come to class.
| | 00:57 | And that's where the second part
of flipping your classroom comes in.
| | 01:01 | During class time, you spend time with
your students, discussing the materials,
| | 01:06 | working problems, doing group work, or
other activities that actively engage
| | 01:11 | them in the materials.
| | 01:12 | You will be able to spend much more time
coaching and guiding your learners, and
| | 01:17 | they will be more prepared to engage in
the conversation since they've already
| | 01:21 | watched the lecture before coming to class.
| | 01:24 | Now, I will warn you; this will
completely change how you teach, how engaged
| | 01:30 | your learners are, and how much deeper
you're able to get into your subject
| | 01:34 | matter with your students.
| | 01:36 | There will be some additional time
that you will need to spend upfront in
| | 01:40 | preparing your instructional materials,
| | 01:43 | but the next time you go to teach this
same course, you will already have the
| | 01:47 | vast majority of those
materials ready to go on day one.
| | 01:51 | You can then spend time refining the
materials you've already recorded, or record
| | 01:57 | some new content to keep everything
fresh, up to date, and to continue to go
| | 02:02 | deeper and deeper into your subject matter.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Preparing materials for class| 00:00 | Did you know that you could use
Camtasia Studio to help you capture and create
| | 00:05 | materials for your course?
| | 00:07 | Many of us find ourselves in a
situation where we're teaching in a classroom, or
| | 00:11 | in a space that either has
limited or no access to the Internet.
| | 00:16 | Or even if we do have access to the
Internet, it's a good idea to make sure that
| | 00:20 | your materials are all prepared and
ready to go before you go into your
| | 00:25 | classroom, so you're not having to
fumble around with the technology.
| | 00:29 | In this movie, we'll look at how to
use Camtasia Recorder to capture some
| | 00:33 | information from a Web site, and then
include it directly inside of one of
| | 00:37 | your presentations.
| | 00:38 | All you need to do is navigate to your Web site.
| | 00:41 | In this case, we're going to use the
example of www.explorecalifornia.org.
| | 00:47 | I've scrolled down in the page, and we can
see the video that we recorded in an
| | 00:51 | earlier movie, when we were
recording the entire screen.
| | 00:54 | However, it would be great to be able to
capture just the video portion of this page.
| | 01:00 | We can do that using the selection
area controls inside of Camtasia Recorder.
| | 01:05 | Throughout this entire training title,
we've been using the Full screen mode for
| | 01:09 | all of our captures, but the
other option is to select Custom.
| | 01:14 | We'll go ahead and click the Custom
button, and then we can see that there is a
| | 01:18 | selected area around our screen
outlined by the small green dashes.
| | 01:23 | You can then change the size of the
recorded area by changing the pixel
| | 01:26 | dimensions that appear here.
| | 01:28 | You'll notice there's a small lock
icon over on the right-hand side.
| | 01:32 | This lock icon will lock the perspective
of this area, so that anytime we make an
| | 01:38 | adjustment of the area,
| | 01:40 | it will keep the dimensions locked, so
that they remain in the same perspective.
| | 01:44 | If you click the lock icon, you can then
make a selection of the screen that is
| | 01:48 | not bound by the initial settings.
| | 01:51 | In this case, we'll go head and use the
selection handles around the edge of our
| | 01:55 | capture area to make a
selection of just the movie.
| | 02:03 | Then, with our selection made, we will go over to
the Audio section, and click the dropdown menu.
| | 02:09 | We will deselect our Microphone, click
the dropdown menu again, and select to
| | 02:15 | Record system audio.
| | 02:17 | You can then press the Record button,
and then press the Play button to record
| | 02:23 | the video that appears onscreen.
| | 02:25 | When you're finished recording, you
simply stop the recording, open up your
| | 02:29 | file inside of the Camtasia editor, trim
your video so that it starts and stops at
| | 02:34 | the appropriate sizes.
| | 02:36 | You can then step through the same
process of outputting your video to one of
| | 02:40 | the video output settings that we've
used throughout this title, and then drop
| | 02:43 | that video directly into
your PowerPoint presentation.
| | 02:47 | You can use this method for capturing
any kind of content that you can see
| | 02:51 | onscreen, and then use that content
either in standalone mode, or embedded in a
| | 02:56 | presentation for your class.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating review notes| 00:00 | Have you ever struggled with trying to
remember all the detailed steps you need
| | 00:04 | to follow in order to
accomplish a task on a computer?
| | 00:07 | Have you ever tried to teach someone
how to follow a complex procedure, and
| | 00:11 | while they're sitting there in front of
you, they could repeat the process, but
| | 00:15 | you soon found them back in your office to go
over the same exact problem again and again?
| | 00:21 | Most of us find ourselves in these or
other similar situations all the time.
| | 00:27 | As the learner, it's not fun to have to
keep struggling, and as the teacher it can
| | 00:32 | be difficult to keep going over the
same material over and over again.
| | 00:37 | However, there is a great method that
you can use to help your learner, and you,
| | 00:42 | keep your sanity, and your dignity.
| | 00:44 | Let's say you have a learner that makes
an appointment with you to learn how to
| | 00:48 | create a simple formula in Excel.
| | 00:51 | Work with the learner using all the
normal teaching methods that you already use,
| | 00:55 | but before the learner leaves your
office, fire up Camtasia Recorder, grab your
| | 01:00 | microphone, press Record, and record a
quick, off-the-cuff movie for your learner
| | 01:05 | to quickly cover the steps you just
walked through with them. Or better yet, have
| | 01:10 | the learner sit down at your computer
with Camtasia on it, and coach them through
| | 01:15 | making their own video notes.
| | 01:17 | By doing this, the learner not only gets
the experience of seeing the process one
| | 01:22 | more time in person, but they can then
replay the video as many times as they
| | 01:26 | need to until they finally master the skill.
| | 01:30 | I regularly make my own video notes
for a whole range of things that I need
| | 01:34 | to do on the computer.
| | 01:35 | In fact, if there's something that I
need to make sure that I remember exactly,
| | 01:40 | step by step, how to complete that's
not on the computer, I'll use the video
| | 01:44 | recorder on my smartphone to make a
short video, and then keep that in the same
| | 01:49 | folder as my other Camtasia recorded notes.
| | 01:52 | Now, here's where the magic happens.
| | 01:54 | Keep a copy of these
off-the-cuff videos you make.
| | 01:57 | Chances are pretty good that there's
another student waiting just around the
| | 02:01 | corner that is going to have the same question.
| | 02:04 | You can then just give the
same video to another student.
| | 02:07 | Once you see that particular video is
especially popular or useful to your
| | 02:12 | students, make a more polished recording,
using all the techniques you've learned
| | 02:17 | throughout this course.
| | 02:18 | It's a great way to build up your own
library of materials and personal notes on
| | 02:22 | how to complete complex
procedures on the computer.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Learners become teachers| 00:00 | When did you truly master the
subject matter that you teach every day?
| | 00:04 | Was it high school? College?
Graduate school? On the job?
| | 00:09 | For most of us, we do gain a great
deal of understanding through school, and
| | 00:13 | other real world experiences.
| | 00:16 | However, when you had to teach
your subject matter to a classroom of
| | 00:20 | students for the first time, that's
when you really buckle down, and learn to
| | 00:24 | master the material.
| | 00:26 | It's quite simple really; when you have
to struggle with teaching someone else, we
| | 00:31 | naturally have to develop a very
deep understanding of the materials.
| | 00:36 | So why don't we have our
students teach the materials as a way of
| | 00:39 | assessing there learning?
| | 00:41 | Tools such as Camtasia not only make
this possible, but entirely feasible.
| | 00:46 | Let's say you're teaching a biology class.
| | 00:48 | Instead of having your students simply
complete all the even number problems in
| | 00:53 | Chapter 4, assign the students to
record a screencast to teach the other
| | 00:58 | students how to complete one,
or even two of the problems.
| | 01:03 | Each student could then tackle a
smaller subset of the problems.
| | 01:07 | But by having to teach others how to
complete the problem, or understand the
| | 01:12 | concept, they will gain a deeper
understanding of the materials.
| | 01:17 | You can then have the students load
their videos up your course Web site, or
| | 01:21 | learning management system, and share
their videos with each other. Have the
| | 01:25 | students critique each other's work.
Very quickly you'll have a library of
| | 01:30 | videos that will show how and why
to complete each and every problem.
| | 01:35 | Your students will become
more engaged with the materials.
| | 01:39 | There are many ways you can apply
this simple idea of having students
| | 01:43 | record instructional screencasts about the
materials that they're learning in your class.
| | 01:49 | One thing to note about this type of project:
| | 01:51 | you will need to have access to screen
recorders for your students, but here are
| | 01:56 | a few ideas you can use, in case you
find it difficult to get enough copies of
| | 02:01 | Camtasia for all of your students.
| | 02:04 | The first idea is to simply direct
your students to one of the free screen
| | 02:08 | recording programs on the
market today, such as Jing.
| | 02:11 | Jing is a free recorder by TechSmith,
the same company that makes Camtasia,
| | 02:17 | but Jing has a limit of only being able
to record five minutes for each video.
| | 02:23 | Now, that should be more than
enough for most student projects.
| | 02:28 | Alternatively, many of our students
these days have their own smartphones, which
| | 02:33 | have video cameras built into them.
| | 02:35 | Your students could simply use the
smartphone that they already own to make the
| | 02:40 | recording. And then there is always that
one lonely computer in the back of your
| | 02:44 | classroom, or that computer lab down the hall.
| | 02:48 | There are a lot of different options,
but the general process of having your
| | 02:51 | students record instructional screencasts
really will help engage the learners in
| | 02:57 | the materials that you're already teaching them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionGoodbye| 00:00 | This brings us to the end of this
training series on Camtasia Studio 8.
| | 00:05 | Throughout this title, we've gone
through the process of setting up your
| | 00:08 | recording account, and equipment.
| | 00:10 | We've learned how to
prepare and record our screencast.
| | 00:13 | We've even learned how to edit and produce
our videos, so they could be published online.
| | 00:18 | Finally, we spent time talking about
specific teaching and learning techniques
| | 00:23 | that you can use tomorrow in your classes.
| | 00:26 | I hope you've had as much fun learning
about Camtasia Studio 8 as I've had
| | 00:30 | recording this title.
| | 00:31 | I look forward to seeing some of the great
screen recordings you're going to be making.
| | 00:36 | Until next time, I'm Chris Mattia.
| | 00:38 | Thanks for watching.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
